Genicom Printer GEK 00031B User Manual

GEnicom  
5000 Series  
Programmer’s Manual  
GEK – 00031B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Page  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation (Continued)  
ANSI 4800/4410 Strap 1 OUT........................................................ 46  
ANSI 4800/4410 Strap 1 IN ........................................................... 46  
Setting Bar Code Parameters.......................................................... 47  
Bar Code Dimensions .................................................................. 48  
Default Bar Code Characteristics................................................. 50  
Human-Readable Line (HRL) .......................................................... 50  
Font Styles and Enhancements ...................................................... 50  
Spacing and Bar Code Editing Aids ................................................ 50  
Bar Code Readability Statement ..................................................... 51  
Bar Code Program Examples .......................................................... 52  
Test Program.................................................................................. 52  
Error Symbol.................................................................................. 52  
Changing Parameters ..................................................................... 53  
Commas and Spaces as Delimiters................................................. 53  
Horizontal Spacing ......................................................................... 54  
Printer Option Strap 11, Group 2 IN............................................... 55  
EXAMPLE 1: Strap 11 OUT.......................................................... 55  
EXAMPLE 2: Strap 11 IN ............................................................. 55  
EXAMPLE 3: Strap 11 OUT with no suppression of LF/CR on line 30  
.................................................................................................... 56  
Vertical Bar Codes.......................................................................... 57  
COMMAS: With HRL.................................................................... 57  
COMMAS: Without HRL............................................................... 58  
SPACES: With HRL...................................................................... 58  
SPACES: Without HRL................................................................. 58  
Horizontal Tabs ........................................................................... 59  
OVERSIZE CHARACTER FONT ......................................................... 60  
Entering and Exiting Oversize ........................................................ 60  
Selecting Size ................................................................................. 61  
Size Parameters for Rotation........................................................ 61  
Spacing Between Characters........................................................ 61  
Sample Programs ........................................................................... 62  
Example 1 ................................................................................... 62  
Example 2 ................................................................................... 62  
Example 3: Showing the Importance of Resetting Scaling Factors. 63  
Printer Control Strap GenPrtOpts/Group 2/Strap 13................... 64  
Example 4: GenPtrOpts | Group 2 Strap 13 IN ............................ 65  
Example 5: GenPtrOpts | Group 2 Strap 13 OUT ........................... 65  
3
GEK-00029B  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Page  
Chapter 3.Printronix P300/P600 Emulation..................................66  
Introduction ......................................................................................66  
Control Codes....................................................................................66  
Printronix Graphics ...........................................................................69  
Dot Patterns and Densities..............................................................69  
Dot Patterns.................................................................................70  
Normal-Density Graphics .............................................................71  
High-Density Graphics .................................................................71  
P300/600 8-Bit Horizontal Graphics...............................................71  
P300/600 Electronic Vertical Format Unit .........................................72  
Using the EVFU ..............................................................................72  
Points to Remember .....................................................................72  
PI Lead Codes – Use with Serial Interface......................................73  
Codes Not Using the PI Lead.........................................................73  
Example EVFU Loading Program ..................................................74  
Example Form Printout ................................................................75  
Sample Program to Print Form......................................................75  
Chapter 4.Printronix P-Series Emulation.......................................76  
Special Function Control Character (SFCC)........................................76  
Command Line................................................................................76  
Set and Reset Codes........................................................................77  
Command Index ................................................................................78  
Control Codes....................................................................................80  
character sets, FONT handling and enhancements.............................82  
Housekeeping Commands..................................................................92  
Plot Mode Graphics Operational Description......................................98  
Plot Density ....................................................................................98  
Normal Density Plot Mode...............................................................98  
Double Density Plot Mode ...............................................................98  
Plot Mode Format............................................................................98  
Plot Data Line Format.....................................................................99  
Normal Density Plot Mode Format...................................................99  
Double Density Plot Mode Format .................................................100  
Plot Mode Graphic Character Chart...............................................101  
Exiting Plot Mode Graphics...........................................................101  
Plot Mode Graphics density commands............................................102  
Differences From Target Printer Emulation ......................................104  
Discarded Commands...................................................................104  
Select Extended Character Set (SFCC OSET;n) ...........................104  
Download a Language (SFCC V)..................................................104  
Download a Character Shape (SFCC c) .......................................104  
4
5000 Programmer’s Manual  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Page  
Chapter 4.Printronix P-Series Emulation (Continued)  
Postnet Bar codes (SFCC |p*xxxxx-yyyy-zz*).............................. 104  
Ribbon Minder Enable/Disable (SFCC r E/SFCC r D) ................ 104  
Ribbon Minder Set Job Rate (SFCC r J nnnn E) ......................... 104  
Ribbon Minder Worn Message (SFCC r A n)................................ 104  
Command Line Debug..................................................................... 105  
Font Styles, Pitches, and Character Sets......................................... 106  
Font Styles................................................................................... 106  
Font Pitches................................................................................. 106  
Character Sets ............................................................................. 106  
Extended Character Sets.............................................................. 106  
Form Length................................................................................. 106  
Plot Mode Graphic Densities......................................................... 107  
Enhancements ............................................................................. 107  
High Vertical Density Plot Mode Graphics .................................. 107  
Chapter 5.Proprinter Emulation.................................................. 108  
Introduction.................................................................................... 108  
Differences from proprinter............................................................. 108  
Proprinter Control Codes................................................................. 108  
Command Directory........................................................................ 111  
Escape Sequences........................................................................... 112  
Proprinter Dot Graphics.................................................................. 119  
Chapter 6.Epson FX286-e Emulation .......................................... 122  
Introduction.................................................................................... 122  
Conventions Used in this Chapter ................................................ 122  
Print Mode Combinations............................................................. 123  
Functional Differences .................................................................... 124  
Additional Escape Sequences.......................................................... 125  
Unsupported Escape Sequences...................................................... 125  
FX-286e Control Codes ................................................................... 126  
FX-286e Escape Sequence DIRECTORY .......................................... 129  
FX-286e Escape Sequence GROUPINGS.......................................... 131  
Margins .......................................................................................... 132  
Line Spacing................................................................................... 134  
Character Spacing .......................................................................... 135  
Tabs ............................................................................................... 136  
Paper Movement ............................................................................. 138  
Print Position.................................................................................. 139  
Print Modes .................................................................................... 141  
Special Character Printing .............................................................. 145  
5
GEK-00029B  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Page  
Chapter 6.Epson FX286-e Emulation (Continued)  
Miscellaneous Commands ...............................................................149  
FX-286e Dot Graphics .....................................................................150  
Specifying Graphics Line Length ...................................................150  
Image Data Bytes..........................................................................151  
Graphics Programming Example ...................................................151  
Printed Results of Sample Program ...............................................151  
FX-286e Dot Graphics Control Sequences........................................152  
Chapter 7.DEC LG / Compaq LG Plus Emulation..........................155  
Control Code Definitions..................................................................155  
Commands......................................................................................158  
Chapter 8.PPL3 Plus Emulation...................................................195  
INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................195  
General Considerations.................................................................195  
Coded Characters .........................................................................195  
7-Bit Versus 8-Bit Environments ..................................................196  
Printable Characters .....................................................................198  
CONTROL CODES ...........................................................................199  
Introduction..................................................................................199  
C0 Control Characters ..................................................................199  
C1 Control Characters ..................................................................201  
SPECIAL CHARACTER PROCESSING ..............................................203  
Hex 20..........................................................................................203  
Hex 7F..........................................................................................203  
Hex A0..........................................................................................203  
Hex FF..........................................................................................203  
Special Character Parsing .............................................................204  
ESCAPE SEQUENCE / control function syntax................................205  
Escape Sequence Syntax...............................................................205  
Control Sequence Syntax ..............................................................205  
Parameter Values Within Control Sequences.................................206  
COMMAND DIRECTORY..................................................................207  
COMMAND DICTIONARY.................................................................209  
PAGE COORDINATE SYSTEM..........................................................251  
Coordinate System Models ............................................................251  
Character Cell Model..................................................................252  
Point Model ................................................................................252  
Point Model Has Precedence .......................................................252  
Origin and Extent .........................................................................252  
Origin.........................................................................................252  
6
5000 Programmer’s Manual  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Page  
Chapter 8.PPL3 Plus Emulation (Continued)  
Printable Area............................................................................ 253  
Positioning and Movement............................................................ 253  
Horizontal Advance Increments .................................................... 254  
Fixed HAI................................................................................... 254  
SIXEL GRAPHICS ........................................................................... 256  
Terminology and Concepts............................................................ 256  
General Sixel Graphics Operation................................................. 257  
Sixel Graphics Commands............................................................ 258  
Appendix A. Using the Hex Dump................................................ 261  
Appendix B. Font Print Samples.................................................. 262  
Appendix C. Postnet Bar codes.................................................... 265  
Entering and Exiting POSTNET Bar Codes ...................................... 265  
Selecting POSTNET Style Bar Codes ............................................. 265  
Appendix D. Description of Strapping Options ............................ 268  
General Printer Options Definitions................................................. 269  
Legacy Parallel Software Strap Definitions....................................... 270  
Emulation Option descriptions........................................................ 271  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts ........................................................ 275  
Index .......................................................................................... 310  
7
GEK-00029B  
Table of Contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION  
OVERVIEW OF PRINTER EMULATION  
Commands are sent to the printer in the form of control codes and  
escape sequences. These differ from normal data to be printed in that  
they give instructions to the printer on paper movement, style of  
print, size, density, and many other selectable features.  
Certain protocols are needed so that the printer can recognize and  
act on these commands sent from the host.  
The shuttle matrix printer contains emulations to make it behave in a  
manner that is functionally similar to other printers. The emulations  
that it contains are:  
ANSI Standard X3.64-1979 (Default)  
Printronix P300/P600  
Printronix P Series  
IBM Proprinter  
Epson FX286-e (9-wire dot matrix)  
DEC LG / Compaq LGPlus  
DEC PPL III  
Each emulation has a set of control codes and/or escape sequences  
that are explained in this manual. There is a separate chapter for  
each emulation.  
CONTROL CODES  
Control codes are used to transmit information other than printable  
characters to the printer. They may occupy the first 32 locations on  
the ASCII code chart and are represented by two- or three-letter  
abbreviations. Locations 0X80 through 0X9F may also be interpreted  
as control codes, depending on the emulation and settings.  
The control code <LF> (10 decimal, 0A hex), for instance, is almost  
universally interpreted as a line feed. However, the response of the  
printer to other control codes will depend on the emulation.  
ESCAPE SEQUENCES  
Remote selection of the printer's functions and features is achieved  
by using command strings (a combination of characters and  
parameters) preceded by an <ESC> (27 decimal, IB hex) or CSI  
character (155 decimal, 9B hex). Escape sequences associated with  
similar functions will vary from one emulation to the next.  
8
Chapter 1. Introduction  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
The physical spaces in the escape sequences shown in this  
publication are only for clarification purposes and are not used in  
the actual string. If a space is actually needed in the sequence, it  
will be shown as an <SP> in the mnemonic form of the sequence.  
In the decimal form, it will appear as a 32, and in the  
hexadecimal form, as 20.  
Examples are shown below of escape sequences as written in the  
text: with parameters filled in and written in the BASIC programming  
language assuming the use of the LPRINT instruction. The parameter  
values are actualized in these examples, but will be shown as  
parameters thereafter. Note that parameters are surrounded by angle  
brackets (<>).  
Tab Clear  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<ESC> [ <p1> g  
27 91 16 103  
1B 5B 10 67  
(assume p1=16)  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[16g"  
Horizontal Tabs Set  
Mnemonic:  
<ESC> [ <p1> ; <p2>... u  
(assume p1=648,  
p2=1386, p3=2808)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 648 59 1386 59 2808 117  
1B 5B 288 3B 56A 3B 0AF8 75  
CHR$(27);"[648;1386;2808u"  
Expand Characters  
Mnemonic:  
<ESC> [ <p1> ; <p2> SP B  
(assume p1=200  
and p2=200)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 200 59 200 32 66  
1B 5B C8 3B C8 20 42  
CHR$(27);"[200;200 B"  
CSI AND OSC  
A control sequence introducer <CSI> signals the beginning of an ANSI  
sequence using the <ESC> code and the left bracket ([). <CSI> (9B  
hex) can be used instead of <ESC> [ (1B 5B hex) when the printer is  
receiving and processing 8-bit data. <ESC> [ will be used  
predominately in this manual for the examples.  
An operating system command (OSC) signals the start of a download  
sequence using the <ESC> code and the right bracket (]). <OSC> (9D  
hex) can be use instead of <ESC> ] (1B 5D hex) when the printer is  
receiving and processing 8 bit data. <ESC> ] will be used  
predominately in this manual for the examples.  
9
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LINE TERMINATORS  
Some control codes and escape sequences act as line terminators.  
Line terminators cause all data received since the last terminator to  
be printed. Without a terminator, data will remain buffered.  
DECIPOINTS  
Throughout this manual decipoints are used as a unit of measure. A  
decipoint equals 1/720th of an inch and is used as a standard of  
measurement for parameters associated with set distances. A few  
examples are margins, tabs, and vertical paper movements. See  
Appendix D for the decipoint conversion tables.  
SCS SMART GRAPHICS CAPABILITIES  
The 5000 series printers have SCS smart graphics processing as a  
standard feature that can be enabled via the CCU control panel  
menus. The graphics emulations include both IGP and QMS Code V  
version 2. There are separate programming manuals for each of these  
graphics language emulations.  
The graphics printing emulations provide capabilities for such things  
as:  
Barcoding (including POSTNET codes)  
Rotated text  
Downloading of and host-controlled selection of predefined forms  
Loading of data into predefined forms  
Dynamic alphanumeric data  
10  
Chapter 1. Introduction  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 2. ANSI EMULATION  
CONTROL CODE AND ESCAPE SEQUENCE ACTIVITY LEVELS  
ANSI control codes and escape sequences are assigned activity levels  
depending on which print mode is currently active. The following  
charts provide information on what to expect from the control codes  
and escape sequences in each printing mode.  
I
-IGNORED  
No noticeable effect on printing will occur.  
V
-VALID  
These sequences do not affect the printing mode in  
progress, but take effect when normal printing  
resumes.  
A
–ACTIVE  
This sequence takes effect immediately.  
These control codes are used as data.  
D
–DATA  
Notes  
Note 1  
When printer option 1 is active, either in ANSI (4800)  
or ANSI (4410) emulation, <SO> and <SI> activate or  
deactivate this printing mode. <SO> and <SI> are  
VALID in bar codes and oversize print mode. They are  
ACTIVE in expanded print mode. Please see Appendix  
D, Description of Strapping options, ANSI (4800) or  
ANSI (4410) tables on page 271 for details on options  
which affect printer operation in ANSI emulation.  
Note 2  
VALID during enhanced oversize, ACTIVE during  
normal oversize.  
Note 3  
Note 4  
Discarded while in the native mode.  
Causes an error symbol to print (XOX).  
11  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Code Activity Levels  
Control Code Activity Levels  
Control  
Code  
BEL  
BS  
Line  
Terminator  
Dot  
Graphics  
Bar  
Codes  
D
Normal  
Oversize  
POSTNET  
Note 4  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
I
I
Note 4  
CR  
DC1  
DC3  
DEL  
FF  
A
I
A
A
Note 4  
A
D
Note 4  
No  
A
A
D
A
Note 3  
A
Note 4  
Note 4  
Note 4  
A
No  
Note 3  
Note 3  
D
Yes  
No  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
I
HT  
A
A
LF  
Yes  
No  
I
A
Note 4  
Note 4  
Note 4  
Note 4  
SI  
Note 1  
Note 1  
I
Note 1  
Note 1  
A
SO  
VT  
No  
I
Yes  
A
12  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Escape Sequence Activity Levels  
Escape  
Sequence  
Line  
Terminator  
Dot  
Graphics  
Bar  
Codes  
Normal  
Oversize POSTNET  
DCS (Graphics)  
Font Load  
GENBCS  
GENFD  
GENGRM  
GENHTS  
GENOSM  
GENSLR  
GENSNC  
GENSPM  
GENTST  
GENVFU  
DENVTS  
GSM  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
I
I
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
A
A
V
A
V
A
V
V
A
A
A
V
A
A
A
A
A
I
A
A
A
A
V
A
V
A
I
A
A
A
A
A
A
Note 2  
A
A
A
A
V
A
A
A
A
A
I
A
A
A
HPA  
A
HPB  
A
HPR  
A
HTS  
A
HVP  
A
PLD  
A
PLU  
I
I
A
REP  
A
A
A
V
A
V
A
A
I
I
A
RIS  
A
A
V
A
V
I
A
RM  
A
SGR  
Note 2  
SM  
A
SPI  
Note 2  
ST  
I
TBC  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I
A
A
A
A
A
A
VFU Load  
VPA  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
VPB  
VPR  
VTS  
13  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL CODE DEFINITIONS  
BEL  
Bell (07H):  
Receipt of a BEL code causes the beeper to sound for  
approximately 1/2 second after any preceding printable data has  
been processed.  
BS  
Back Space (08H):  
Line terminator. The paper position remains  
unchanged and the print position is moved left one character space  
from the current. If the print position is at the left margin, no action  
is taken.  
CR  
Carriage Return (0DH):  
Line terminator. The print position is reset  
to the left margin, and the paper position is left unchanged.  
CSI  
Control Sequence Introducer (9BH):  
Signals the beginning of an  
ANSI control sequence. When 8-bit data is used, CSI (9BH) can be  
substituted for ESC [ (1BH 5BH). Also see ESC.  
DC1  
Device Control 1 (11H):  
Parallel and Serial Interface: Receipt of a  
DC1 code with the printer in local mode puts the printer online  
(selects printer) and enables receipt of data.  
Through CCU menu options, a serial interface protocol may be  
selected that transmits a DC1 code to the host to signal that the  
printer is ready to receive data.  
NOTE  
The print position can also be set to the left margin via the  
CCU Control Panel Menu using the SETUP/FORMAT/MODIFY  
FORMAT/PRINT CONTROL menu selection.  
DC3  
Device Control 3 (13H):  
Parallel and Serial Interface: Receipt of a  
DC3 code when online places the printer in local mode (deselects  
printer) and causes it to ignore all data except a <DC1>.  
selected that  
Through menu options, a serial interface protocol may be  
transmits a <DC3> code to the host to signal that the printer is not ready to  
receive data.  
(See note for <DC1), above.)  
ESC  
Escape (1BH):  
Signals the beginning of an escape sequence. See also  
CSI above.  
14  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FF  
Form Feed (0CH):  
next  
Line terminator. The paper is advanced to the  
top-of-form position. When the EVFU is enabled and programmed, paper  
will advance to the next stop in channel 1.  
NOTE  
An option strap from the CCU Control Panel Menu using the  
SETUP/FORMAT/MODIFY FORMAT/GENPRTOPTS selection  
can disable this feature.  
HT  
LF  
Horizontal Tab (09H):  
Advances the print position to the next  
horizontal tab location. If no tabs are set, an HT code is either converted to a  
space or ignored, depending on the menu option settings.  
Line Feed (0AH):  
next  
Line terminator. The paper is advanced to the  
line. When printing horizontal dot graphics, the paper is advanced to the next  
dot row.  
(See note for <FF>, above.)  
SI  
Shift In (0FH):  
Used to exit a Special Print Mode (GENSPM) when  
ANSI emulation strap 1 (Appendix G, tables 5 and 6) is active.  
SO  
VT  
Shift Out (0EH):  
ANSI emulation strap (Appendix G, tables 5 and 6) 1 is inactive.  
when  
Used to enable a special print mode (GENSPM)  
Vertical Tab (0BH):  
the  
Line terminator. The paper is advanced to  
next vertical tab stop. If no tabs are set, a VT code causes a line feed. When  
using the EVFU, paper advances to the next stop in channel 12.  
(See note for <FF>, above.)  
15  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESCAPE SEQUENCE DIRECTORY  
Sequence  
Meaning  
Page  
19  
CSI or ESC [  
Control Sequence Introducer  
GENEMU: Selects emulation  
CSI p1 p2 SP ~  
ESC [p1 ; p2 SP B  
21  
GSM: Modifies vertical (p1) and horizontal (p2)  
character size  
31  
ESC [p1 ; p2 SP G  
ESC H  
SPI: Sets lpi (p1) and/or cpi (p2) in decipoints  
HTS: Sets a tab at current print position  
VTS: Sets a tab at current paper position  
PLD: Moves print line down 3/72 inch (subscript)  
PLU: Moves print line up 3/72 inch (superscript)  
DCS: Introduces dot graphics  
32  
30  
28  
25  
42  
40  
ESC J  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC P  
ESC Q  
Self-Test: Inactive. Sequence ignored.  
ESC [ p1 a  
ESC [ p1 b  
HPR: Moves print position right p1 distance (relative)  
25  
40  
REP: Dot graphics: repeat preceding character p1  
times  
ESC c  
RIS: Resets printer to a known initial state  
VPA: Sets vertical position to p1 decipoints or lines  
VPR: Moves paper forward p1 decipoints  
HVP: Moves paper and print position (absolute)  
TBC: Clears tabs: p1=3 for horizontal  
35  
26  
26  
26  
28  
34  
ESC [ p1 d  
ESC [ pl e  
ESC [ p1; p2 f  
ESC [ p1 g  
ESC [ p1 ; ...; pn h  
SM: Set mode (PUM, LNM, proportional, character  
mapping)  
ESC [ p1 j  
HPB: Moves print position left by decipoints or  
columns  
26  
ESC [ p1 k  
ESC [ p1 l  
VPB: Moves paper backward by decipoints or lines  
27  
32  
RM: Reset mode (PUM, LNM, proportional, character  
mapping)  
ESC [ p1; ... pn m  
ESC [ p1 p2 ! p  
SGR: Selects font styles and enhancements  
32  
44  
41  
GENVF2: EVFU vertical paper movement command  
ESC [ p1 ; p2 ; p3 q  
GENGRM: Selects graphics horizontal and vertical dot  
densities  
ESC [ p1; p2 ; p3 r  
ESC [ p1; p2 s  
ESC [ p1 t  
GENFD: Sets form length (pl), margins: top (p2),  
bottom (p3)  
28  
29  
46  
GENSLR: Sets margins: left (p1), right (p2) in  
decipoints  
Selects bar codes p1=3, quit bar code p1=0  
16  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequence  
Meaning  
Page  
ESC [ p1;… pn u  
GENHTS: Sets horizontal tabs (p1, etc.) in decipoints  
or columns  
30  
ESC [ p1 ;… p12;v  
GENVTS: Sets vertical tabs (p1, etc.) in decipoints or  
lines  
30  
22  
ESC [ p1 x  
GENSNC: Selects international character sets  
Selects bar code parameters  
ESC [ p1 ; ...;p10 }  
ESC [ p1 SP }  
GENDFC: Download Font Control: Checks printer for  
downloaded font  
35  
OSC or ESC ]  
ESC ] 5  
Operating System Command: introduces sequence  
19  
35  
BFL (Begin Font Load): Valid only if download option  
is installed.  
ESC ] !  
Begins 12-channel EVFU table loading  
ST: String Terminator. Exits special modes  
HPA: Horizontal Position Absolute  
Character Map Load  
42  
19  
27  
23  
ESC \  
ESC [ p1 `  
OSC 9 ; p1 ; ... ; p8-pn  
ST  
17  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ANSI ESCAPE SEQUENCE CATEGORIES  
The ANSI escape sequences have been separated according to  
functionality. Special areas of interest, such as graphics and the  
electronic vertical format unit (EVFU), have been described in  
separate sections. The functional groups are:  
Housekeeping  
Paper and Print Positioning  
Margins and Tabs  
Font Handling and Enhancements  
Graphics  
EVFU  
18  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Housekeeping Sequences  
ESC [  
CSI (Control Sequence Introducer):  
This sequence is used to begin  
sequences, that generally have multiple parameters.  
ESC ]  
OSC (Operating System Command):  
This is another special  
sequence introducer. Sequences which begin with OSC require the  
ST string terminator sequence (ESC \) to end them.  
ESC \  
ESC c  
ST (String Terminator):  
Terminates the loading of EVFU tables,  
download fonts, and dot graphics strings.  
RIS (Reset to Initial State):  
Resets the printer to either the standard  
state shown below or to the state stored in the customer save area of  
memory. The RIS sequence can be disabled by ANSI option strap 3  
(see Appendix D, ANSI (4800) or ANSI (4410), option 3).  
RIS – Reset to Initial State  
Parameter  
State  
Font Style  
Gothic Draft  
Character Size  
1X Vertical, 1X Horizontal  
Character Pitch  
Country Selection  
Code Page  
10 cpi  
USA  
437  
Line Spacing  
6 lpi  
Partial Line Up  
Partial Line Down  
Bold Print  
Reset  
Reset  
Inactive  
Underline Mode  
Expanded Mode  
Proportional Mode  
Horizontal Tab Table  
Left Margin  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Reset  
Empty  
None - Column 0  
Right Margin  
None - Maximum  
Form Number  
Page Size  
7
7920 decipoints/ 66 lines/11 inches  
Top Margin  
None  
Bottom Margin  
Forms Position  
Vertical Tab Table  
Vertical Format Unit  
Graphics Density  
VFU Load In Progress  
Bar Code Mode  
Dot Graphics  
None  
Top of form - current position  
Empty  
Default  
60 H dpi, 72 V dpi, horizontal format  
Exit (nothing saved)  
Inactive  
Inactive  
Decimal  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 99:  
1B 63  
CHR$(27);"c";  
19  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC Q  
GENTST (Self-Test):  
This sequence is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 102 or 120  
1B 5C or 9C  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"Q";  
20  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CSI p1 p2 SP ~  
GENEMU (Emulation Control):  
Switches the control of the printer to  
another emulation. The parameters in the sequence are defined as  
follows:  
p1  
Emulation identifier. This parameter selects the particular  
emulation by a reference number supplied by GENICOM  
engineering. The assigned numbers may be found in the table  
below.  
p2  
Reset control. Permits the parameters of the printer to be  
reset or defaulted. It is not always possible to meet the strict  
definition of this parameter, so each printer has a definition of  
how the reset control is implemented. The values as currently  
defined are:  
0
Hold values (default). All possible values for printer  
control, e.g., tabs, margins, page length, are to be  
retained.  
1
Full reset. Resets parameters to initial state.  
p1  
0
Manufacturer  
GENICOM  
GENICOM  
GENICOM  
IBM  
IBM  
Epson  
IBM  
Epson  
Emulation  
ANSI  
4410 ANSI  
Reserved  
Graphics Printer  
Proprinter XL 9-wire  
FX286-e  
Proprinter XL 24-wire  
LQ2500  
10  
1-19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
30  
40  
41  
Data Products  
Printronix  
Printronix  
ANSI  
P300  
P5008  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If no emulation parameter is supplied, the emulation remains in the  
current state and the rest of the sequence is ignored. Other  
parameter values and other parameters are reserved.  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<CSI> <p1> <p2> <SP> ~  
27 91 <p1> <p2> 32 126  
1B 5B <p1> <p2> 20 7E  
CHR$(27);"<p1><p2><SP>~";  
BASIC:  
21  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Set Selection  
ESC [ p1 x  
GENSNC (Select National Characters):  
This sequence selects the  
national character substitution if the currently selected character  
style supports it. The following values may be used for p1.  
p1  
0
Country Map or Character Set  
USA (ISO)  
1
2
German (ISO)  
French A (ISO)  
3
French B  
4
French Canadian  
5
6
Dutch (Netherlands)  
Italian  
7
8
United Kingdom (ISO)  
Spanish  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Danish/Norwegian A  
Danish/Norwegian B  
Danish/Norwegian C  
Danish/Norwegian D  
Swedish/Finnish A  
Swedish/Finnish B  
Swedish/Finnish C  
Swedish/Finnish D  
Swiss  
17  
18  
(Ignored)  
19  
Yugoslavian  
20  
United Kingdom A  
21  
Turkish  
22  
Greek  
23  
Italian (ISO)  
24  
Spanish (ISO)  
437  
850  
852  
853  
855  
860  
863  
864  
865  
866  
867  
8572  
8573  
8574  
8575  
8576  
8577  
8578  
8591  
8592  
IBM PC USA (MS Code Page 437)  
IBM PC Multilingual (MS Code Page 850)  
Microsoft Code Page 852 (East Europe)  
Microsoft Code Page 853 (Turkey)  
Microsoft Code Page 855 (Cyrillic)  
Microsoft Code Page 860  
Microsoft Code Page 863 (French Canadian)  
Microsoft Code Page 864  
Microsoft Code Page 865  
Microsoft Code Page 866 (Russian)  
Microsoft Code Page 867  
USSR GOST (Russian)  
Greek Code Page 437  
DEC Multinational (LA-210)  
Roman 8  
Polish Mazowia  
Turkish 8-bit Code Page  
Greek Code Page 851  
ISO 8859-1 Latin Alphabet #1  
ISO 8859-2 Latin Alphabet #2  
22  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
p1  
8593  
8594  
8595  
8596  
8597  
8598  
8599  
Country Map or Character Set  
ISO 8859-3 Latin Alphabet #3  
ISO 8859-4 Latin Alphabet #4  
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic  
ISO 8859-6 Latin/Arabic  
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek  
ISO 8859-8 Latin/Hebrew  
ISO 8859-9 Latin Alphabet #5  
Character Map Load  
OSC 9 ; p1 ; ... ;  
p8-pn ST  
Character Map Load:  
This sequence signals the beginning of a  
Character Map Load data transfer. Character map definitions, which  
follow this sequence, are stored in non-volatile memory. The  
character map is selected with the GENICOM Select National  
Characters (GENSNC) command using the p2 parameter that is  
specified in the load sequence for this command. The load is  
terminated by a String Terminator (ST) sequence. The downloaded  
character map replaces the USA ISO character set in character map  
memory.  
A single character map containing 128 substitutions may be  
specified. A character map may be designated for either the GL table  
(codes 20H-7EH) or the GR table (codes 80H-FFH). Any substitutions  
not specified within a character map load will be mapped one-to-one.  
For example, code 41H prints the character normally found at  
location 41H (upper case A). When a character map designated as a  
GR map is selected by the GENSNC command (see Character Set  
Selection on page 22), the GL map will automatically be mapped  
one-to-one. A standard GL (7-bit) character map, such as French A,  
may be specified as the base for a downloaded GR (8-bit) character  
map, but an 8-bit GR map, Code Page 866, for example, may NOT be  
used as the base for a GL character map.  
The complete syntax for the Character Set Load is shown below:  
<OSC>9;<p1>;<p2>;...;<pn><ST>  
p1  
Control Command  
0
1
Stores new character map  
Erases existing character. In this case, parameters p2-  
pn are ignored and need not be supplied. An existing  
downloaded character map need not be erased before a  
new character map is loaded.  
All other values of p1 are reserved.  
p2  
GENSNC (CSI p1 x) select parameter. Values must be between  
90 and 99 in order not to interfere with GENICOM standard  
character maps. If a downloaded character map select  
parameter is a value other than 90 through 99, the download  
character map command is ignored.  
p3  
p4  
Reserved. This parameter is marked by inserting a semicolon  
(;) in the command sequence.  
Reserved. This parameter is marked by inserting a semicolon  
(;) in the command sequence.  
23  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
p5  
p6  
Reserved. This parameter is marked by inserting a semicolon  
(;) in the command sequence.  
A literal string indicating the GENSNC select parameter of an  
existing character map (such as 437 or 850) to be used as a  
base in which substitutions from this command sequence  
may be made. This string may be up to 10 characters in  
length and must be specified only if the downloaded character  
map uses an existing map as a base. The string is terminated  
by a semi-colon (;). The base character map always defaults to  
Code Page 437 if an ACT character map is specified and the  
downloaded character map is a GR table. If the downloaded  
map is a GL table, p6 must specify an existing GL table as the  
base or a one-to-one default base is used.  
p7  
A literal string used to identify the character map in the  
Progam Mode Font – Country menu. This string may be up to  
20 characters in length and is terminated by a semi-colon (;).  
Note that only the first 11 characters of this string are used  
for display purposes.  
p8-pn A trio of parameters used to specify the actual character map  
substitution. A semicolon must separate each parameter  
within the trio, and a semicolon must terminate each trio. The  
semicolon is not required for the last trio that immediately  
precedes the String Terminator (ESC \).  
The elements of each trio are defined as follows:  
1
A decimal number that identifies the destination  
character. This is the character value received from the  
host. For example, an upper case "A" has a decimal value  
of 65. Values of 32 through 126 and 128 through 255 are  
valid for this element.  
The first element processed in the first substitution trio  
defines whether the map is for GL (7-bit) or GR (8-bit)  
substitution. If the first element is between 32 and 126  
(inclusive), the map is GL, and the first element of each  
trio must also be between 32 and 126. Likewise, if the first  
element of the first trio is between 128 and 255, the map  
is a GR map and all first elements must fall between 128  
and 255. The character substitution map is discarded if  
this rule is violated.  
2
3
A decimal number that identifies the source character.  
This is the location value of the desired character pattern  
in the printer font set. For example, an upper case "A" has  
a decimal value of 65. Values of 0 through the last  
available character for the currently selected font are valid  
for this element.  
Reserved. A semicolon (;) is required to mark this element  
position. A zero is permitted.  
24  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper and Print Position Movements  
ESC K  
PLD (Partial Line Down):  
Line terminator. Moves the print line down  
3/72 inch for subscript printing. Also returns to the original line  
following a partial line up (<ESC> L - superscript) sequence. See note  
below.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 75  
1B 4B  
BASIC:  
CHR(27)$;"K";  
ESC L  
PLU (Partial Line Up):  
Line terminator. Moves the print line up 3/72  
inch for superscript printing. Also used to return to the original line  
following a partial line down (ESC K - subscript) sequence. See note.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 76  
1B 4C  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"L";  
NOTE  
In the 4800 emulation, these sequences can be used in  
succession to advance or reverse the paper to another line. In  
the 4410 emulation, they can be used in pairs to change from  
superscript directly to subscript or subscript directly to  
superscript, but can not be used to position the paper.  
Also see the SScript: ON/OFF menu selection in the User's  
Manual.  
ESC [ p1 a  
HPR (Horizontal Position Relative):  
Line terminator. Moves the  
print position to the right of the current position. The distance  
specified by the p1 parameter is in decipoints. An HPR move  
exceeding the right margin sets the print position at the margin. If  
the p1 parameter is zero or missing, the command is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 97  
1B 5B <p1> 61  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>a";  
25  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 d  
VPA (Vertical Position Absolute):  
Line terminator. Sets the vertical  
position to the value specified by <p1>, moving paper forward or  
backward to the new position. The distance specified by the <p1>  
parameter is in decipoints. This command can be used to print inside  
top and bottom margins. If the specified position is not within the  
current page, the command is ignored. If the parameter value is  
omitted or less than 5 decipoints, it will result in the vertical position  
being set to the top of form position.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 <p1> 100  
1B 5B <p1> 64  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[";CHR$(<p1>);"d";  
ESC [ p1 e  
VPR (Vertical Position Relative):  
Line terminator. Increases the  
current vertical position by the value specified by p1. Decipoints are  
converted to provide the 1/144-inch moves shown in the table.  
Decipoint Value  
Missing or 0 – 4  
5-9  
Movement In Inches  
No Movement  
1/144 inch  
10-14  
2/144 inch  
15-19  
3/144 inch  
17,280 or greater  
24 inches  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 <p1> 95  
1B 5B <pl> 65  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>e";  
ESC [ p1 ; p2 f  
HVP (Horizontal and Vertical Position):  
Line terminator. Sets the  
vertical paper position to the value of <p1> and the print position to  
the <p2> value. Values are sent as decipoints. HVP can position  
printing inside margins. The vertical position can not exceed the form  
length and the horizontal position cannot exceed the maximum width  
for the printer.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 52 96  
1B 5B <p1> 3B <p2> 66  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>;f";  
ESC [ p1 j  
HPB (Horizontal Position Backward):  
Line terminator. Moves the  
print position left of the current position by the distance specified in  
<p1>. Values are sent as decipoints. The print position is set to the  
left margin if the <p1> value would exceed the margin. An HPB with a  
<p1> value of zero is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 106  
1B 5B <p1> 6A  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>j";  
26  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 k  
VPB (Vertical Position Backwards):  
Line terminator. Moves the  
paper in reverse by the distance specified by p1. Values can be sent  
as decipoints. The paper position is set to the top margin if the p1  
value exceeds the margin. A VPB with a p1 value of 5 decipoints or  
less is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 <p1> 107  
1B 5B <p1> 6B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>k";  
ESC [ p1 '  
HPA (Horizontal Position Absolute):  
Line terminator. Moves the  
print position to the value specified in <p1>. Values are sent as  
decipoints. Position zero is column one. The print position is set to  
the right margin if the <p1> value would exceed the margin. An HPB  
with a <p1> value greater than 9792 is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 96  
1B 5B <p1> 60  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>'";  
27  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Margins and Tabs  
ESC H  
HTS (Horizontal Tab Set):  
Sets a tab at the current print position  
and updates any existing horizontal tab table. A total of 22 tabs can  
be set. If this number is exceeded, the leftmost 22 tabs will be  
retained.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 72  
1B 48  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"H";  
ESC J  
VTS (Vertical Tab Set):  
Sets a tab at the current print position and  
updates any existing vertical tab table. A total of 12 tabs can be set.  
If this number is exceeded, the 12 tabs closest to the top of the page  
will be retained.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 74  
1B 4A  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"J";  
ESC [ p1 g  
TBC (Tab Clear):  
Clears horizontal or vertical tab stops based on the  
p1 value as follows:  
p1 = 0  
p1 = 1  
p1 = 3  
p1 = 4  
Clears horizontal tab at current print position.  
Clears vertical tab at current print position.  
Clears all horizontal tabs.  
Clears all vertical tabs.  
More than one parameter can be used.  
Example: To clear all horizontal and vertical tabs, send:  
<ESC> [ 3 ; 4 g  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 <p1> 103  
1B 5B <p1> 67  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;"g";  
ESC [ p1; p2 ; p3 r GENFD (Forms Definition):  
Establishes the form length <p1>, the  
top margin <p2>, and the bottom margin <p3> in decipoints. Default  
parameters are for an 11-inch (7,920 decipoints) long form with a top  
and bottom margin of zero.  
p1 - maximum allowable length is 24 inches (17,280 decipoints).  
p2 - top of page to first print line  
p3 – non-printable area at bottom of form  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 <p1> <p2> <p3> r  
1B 5B <p1> <p2> <p3>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[<p1>;<p2>;<p3>r";  
28  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sequence  
Explanation  
ESC [ r  
Default values of 11-inch form length,  
zero top and bottom margins.  
11.5-inch form length, default top and  
bottom margins of zero  
Default length of 11 inches, top margin  
of 1-inch. Default bottom margin of zero.  
Default length of 11 inches, default top  
margin of zero, and a 1-inch bottom  
margin.  
ESC [ 8280 r  
ESC [ ; 720 r  
ESC [ ; ; 720 r  
ESC [ 7920 ; 360 ; 360 r 11-inch form length, ½-inch top and  
bottom margins  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> <p2> <p3> 114  
1B 5B <p1> <p2> <p3> 72  
CHR$(27);"[<p1><p2><p3>r";  
ESC [ p1; p2 s  
GENSLR (Set Left/Right Margins):  
The p parameters are distances  
from the left edge of the printable area of the paper. Parameter <p1>  
sets the left margin and <p2> sets the right margin. An omitted  
parameter clears that margin. Invalid parameters set the left margin  
to zero (column 1) and the right margin to 9,504 decipoints (column  
136 at 10 cpi for the 13.6-inch machines).  
A new left margin takes effect following any line terminator that  
normally calls for a print position set to the left. A new right margin  
takes effect when the print position reaches the new margin.  
Margin settings stored as decipoint values are enforced to the nearest  
1/120 of an inch. Character printing operates at 1/120 of an inch.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> <p2> 115  
1B 5B <p1> <p2> 73  
CHR$(27);"[<p1><p2>s";  
NOTE  
There is a physical left margin of .6 to 1.6 inches from the  
edge of the paper to the first printable column. This distance  
is adjustable by sliding all four tractors sideways. The margins  
set with this sequence begin at the first physical print  
position, not at the edge of the paper.  
29  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 ; ... p22; u GENHTS (Multiple Horizontal Tab Set):  
Sets up to 22 horizontal  
tabs. The p parameters are set in decipoints.  
If more than 22 tabs are set, the highest numbered tabs (farthest  
right) will be pushed out of the tab table. Tabs set in front of the left  
margin, or beyond the right margin. are not usable. Moving the  
margins will make them active.  
Example: To place tabs at columns 10, 20, and 40 at 10 cpi, send  
ESC [ 10 ; 40 ; 20 u (tabs can be specified in any order).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 59 <p2> 59 … <p22> 59 117  
1B 5B <p1> 3B <p2> 3B ... 3B <p22> 3B 75  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>; ... ;<p22>;u"  
ESC [ p1 ; …; p12 ; vGENVTS (Multiple Vertical Tab Set):  
Sets up to 12 vertical tabs.  
The p parameters are set in decipoints. If more than 12 tabs are set,  
the 12 tabs nearest the top of form will be retained. If a tab is set in  
the top margin area, it will be stored but will not be active until the  
margin is moved. If a tab is set beyond the bottom margin,  
attempting to move to that tab will advance the paper to the next top  
of form.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 59 <p2> 59 … <p12> 59 118  
1B 5B <p1> 3B <p2> 3B … <p12> 3B 76  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>;...;<p12>;v";  
30  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font Handling and Enhancements  
ESC [ p1; p2 SP B  
GSM (Graphic Size Modification):  
This sequence modifies the  
vertical <p1> and horizontal <p2> size of expanded and oversize  
characters. When using expanded characters, the currently selected  
font style is used. Oversize uses its own distinct font style.  
Parameter values are percentages of the normal size character, so  
values over 100 are needed for expansion. Expansion factors are  
obtained by dividing values by 100.  
Example: A parameter value of 526 would be divided by 100 to  
produce an expansion factor of 5 (5X expansion). Values less than  
100 are treated as 1X expansion.  
X1:  
X2:  
X3:  
X4:  
X5:  
X6:  
X7:  
X8:  
0-199 (Default)  
200-299  
300-399  
400-499  
500-599  
600-699  
700-799  
800-UP  
Mixed sizes within a line can be top or bottom justified depending on  
the Program Mode menu option (see VExOpt:Default and  
VExOpt: Baseline).  
The top of an expanded character is used as the starting point for  
vertical paper movement (line feed). The top or bottom of oversize  
characters can be used depending on the state of menu option  
SETUP | FORMAT | MODIFY FORMAT |GENPRTOPTS |  
GROUP 2 |Strap 13.  
When this sequence is received with a value of 200 or more,  
expanded printing starts if the printer is in the text mode (not bar  
codes, oversize, etc.  
Examples:  
ESC [ ; 200 B  
ESC [ 200 ; 200 B  
ESC [ 800 ; 400 B  
X1 Vertical  
X2 Vertical  
X8 Vertical  
X2 Horizontal  
X2 Horizontal  
X4 Horizontal  
During vertically expanded printing, blank lines (lines with no printed  
characters) are not expanded from the current lpi setting.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 p1 59 p2 32 66  
1B 5B p1 3B p2 20 42  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>B";  
31  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 ; p2 SP G SPI (Spacing Increment):  
This sequence is used to set line spacing  
(p1) and character spacing or pitch (p2). If the parameter is missing  
or zero, the spacing remains unchanged. In the native mode, p1 can  
range from 1 to 17,820 decipoints (24 inches). The printable area  
(between the top and bottom margin) can not be exceeded. The range  
of p2 is dependent on the font and will be ignored if exceeded.  
Examples of Spacing Values  
LPI Spacing  
p1  
CPI Spacing  
p2  
LPI  
3
4
6
8
(decipoints)  
CPI  
10  
12  
13.3  
15  
16.7  
(decipoints)  
240  
180  
120  
90  
72  
60  
54  
42  
36  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 p1 59 p2 32 71  
1B 5B p1 3B p2 20 47  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>G";  
ESC [ p1 ; pn... m  
SGR (Select Graphic Rendition):  
Selects font style and  
enhancements (bold and underline). One font designator plus any  
number of enhancements can be entered in the escape sequence  
using the parameter values in the following table. If the requested  
font is not installed, the default font is selected.  
Parameter  
Enhancement  
0
1
4
Cancel all print enhancements  
Bold (enhancement)  
Underline (enhancement)  
Double Wide  
5
21  
22  
24  
25  
26  
Underline  
Cancel Bold  
Cancel Underline  
Cancel Expanded  
Cancel Proportional  
Parameter  
Font  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Default Font - Data Processing  
Gothic Draft Font  
Character Graphics  
Gothic NLQ Font  
Courier NLQ Font  
High Speed Draft Font  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Italic NLQ Font or Download A*  
Correspondence or Download B*  
32  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 ; p ... m  
(continued)  
*A download font (if loaded) overrides any other font. See Character  
Map Load on page 23.  
Examples:  
For Gothic NLQ font underlined send:  
ESC [ 4 ; 13 m  
To cancel underlining and retain Gothic NLQ - send one of the  
following:  
ESC [ ; 13 m  
ESC [ 0 ; 13 m  
ESC [ 0 m  
ESC [ 24m  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> ; <pn> m  
1B 5B <p1> 3B ... <pn> 6D  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;...<pn> m";  
33  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1; ... pn h  
SM (Set Mode):  
Sets the mode or modes specified by the parameters  
listed below. Parameters preceded by the 'greater than' sign are  
privately defined modes and should be sent separately.  
Parameter  
Number  
20  
Mode  
Mnemonic  
LNM  
Mode Function  
Line Feed New Line Mode  
LNM - Line Feed New Line Mode  
. When using this mode, a received  
line feed command causes a carriage return (new line). When LNM is  
reset, a line feed command only causes a vertical position movement.  
The following parameters are privately defined modes.  
Parameter  
Number  
Mode  
Mnemonic  
GENPRM  
GENC1C  
GENCS2  
Mode Function  
>1  
>2  
>5  
Proportional Print Mode  
C1 Control Code Mode  
Character Set 2 Mode  
GENPRM (Proportional Print Mode):  
Enables proportional printing.  
This mode does not apply to the oversize character feature. When  
reset (default), characters are spaced at the current cpi.  
GENC1C (C1 Control Code Mode - PC Set 1):  
When set, it allows  
the use of C1 control codes. When reset, 80H - 9FH are ignored. See  
Appendix E for an explanation of how character sets are mapped. The  
default state is set using ANSI emulation option 6 (see Appendix D,  
ANSI (4800) or ANSI (4410) Tables).  
GENSC2 (Character Set 2 Mode - PC Set 2):  
Selects character set 2  
of any of the 8-bit international character sets. See PC Set 2 in  
Appendix H for an explanation of how character sets are mapped. The  
default state is set using option strap 7 in the ANSI emulation  
options (see Appendix D, ANSI (4800) or ANSI (4410) Tables).  
EXAMPLE: To print proportional, send ESC [ > 1 h.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 62 49 104  
1B 5B 3E 31 68  
CHR$(27);"[>1h";  
ESC [ p1 ... pn l  
RM (Reset Mode):  
Resets any modes turned on by the Set Mode  
command above. Parameters and syntax are the same.  
34  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC ] 5  
BFL (Begin Font Load):  
This sequence is not honored when self-test  
determines that the download font option is not installed. Permits  
downloading of customer-defined font characters into printer  
nonvolatile memory from the host. Loading is terminated when an  
ESC \ sequence is received.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 93 53  
1B 5D 35  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"]5";  
ESC [ p1 SP }  
GENDFC (Download Font Control):  
Using the serial interface, this  
command allows the host to see if at least one valid font is loaded  
(p1=2). The printer sends DCS 30H 30H ST if a font is loaded,  
DCS 44H 45H ST if no font is loaded. It also provides the capability to  
erase the download font area (p1=1).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 32 125  
1B 5B <p1> 20 7D  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>}";  
35  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GRAPHICS  
The ANSI emulation graphics mode provides both horizontal and  
vertical dot plotting methods. These methods enable the printing of  
ASCII characters in their binary code form. Since each character has  
a unique pattern of 1s and 0s (dots and voids) that make up its  
binary code, the correct placement of these binary forms enables you  
to form larger images on the paper.  
For clarity in the text, a binary 1 (a printed dot) is shown as an X and  
a binary 0 (empty dot position) will be shown as a 0.  
Six-Bit Graphics  
In the graphics mode, only the low order six bits of a character are  
used (bits 1-6). Looking at an ASCII code chart, the question mark  
(?)  
character  
is represented by the binary number 1111110 (bit 1 -  
bit 7). Since only the first 6 bits are used. a "?" prints six dots on the  
paper. An asterisk "*" is represented by 010101 which prints the  
following:  
Horizontal Graphics  
Vertical Graphics  
0
X
0
X
0
X
0X0X0X  
Notice that in horizontal graphics the character is printed on a single  
horizontal dot row. In vertical graphics, the character is printed six  
dots high, one character per dot column.  
Using the question mark that prints all dots, a series of these  
characters in horizontal graphics produces a one-dot-high solid line  
across the paper. The same character in vertical graphics produces a  
six-dot high band across the paper.  
By repeating, omitting and mixing characters across a page, images  
such as graphs, charts, and pictures can be produced.  
Dot Patterns and Densities  
The chart on the next page shows the dot patterns for each of the  
ASCII characters. Each character represents six dots or dot positions,  
and their spacing is dependent on the density selected. At 60 dpi  
density, the dots are spaced 1/60 inch apart. At 120 dpi, each  
character represents six dots spaced 1/120 inch apart.  
36  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This chart shows the dot patterns for the ASCII characters needed to  
cover all dot/void combinations. Other valid characters (although  
they are repeat patterns of the characters in the chart) are 20H-3FH.  
Character  
Value  
Dots  
Character  
Value  
Dots  
000000  
X00000  
0X0000  
XX0000  
00X000  
X0X000  
0XX000  
XXX000  
000X00  
X00X00  
0X0X00  
XX0X00  
00XX00  
X0XX00  
0XXX00  
XXXX00  
0000X0  
X000X0  
0X00X0  
XX00X0  
00X0X0  
X0X0X0  
0XX0X0  
XXX0X0  
000XX0  
X00XX0  
0X0XX0  
XX0XX0  
00XXX0  
X0XXX0  
0XXXX0  
XXXXX0  
00000X  
X0000X  
0X000X  
XX000X  
00X00X  
X0X00X  
0XX00X  
XXX00X  
000X0X  
X00X0X  
0X0X0X  
XX0X0X  
00XX0X  
X0XX0X  
0XXX0X  
XXXX0X  
0000XX  
X000XX  
0X00XX  
XX00XX  
00X0XX  
X0X0XX  
0XX0XX  
XXX0XX  
000XXX  
X00XXX  
0X0XXX  
XX0XXX  
00XXXX  
X0XXXX  
0XXXXX  
XXXXXX  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
40H  
41H  
42H  
43H  
44H  
45H  
46H  
47H  
48H  
49H  
4AH  
4BH  
4CH  
4DH  
4EH  
4FH  
50H  
51H  
52H  
53H  
54H  
55H  
56H  
57H  
58H  
59H  
5AH  
5BH  
5CH  
5DH  
5EH  
5FH  
a
b
c
d
e
f
60H  
61H  
62H  
63H  
64H  
65H  
66H  
67H  
68H  
69H  
6AH  
6BH  
6CH  
6DH  
6EH  
6FH  
70H  
71H  
72H  
73H  
74H  
75H  
76H  
77H  
78H  
79H  
7AH  
7BH  
7CH  
7DH  
7EH  
7FH  
g
h
i
J
j
K
L
k
l
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
\
|
}
]
^
~
?
_
Legend:  
X=dot 0=no dot (void)  
37  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal Format  
Graphics data printed in horizontal format is comprised of a stream  
of bytes from left to right across each dot row.  
This chart shows that byte 1 (or character 1) in row 1 prints its six  
bits from left to right in a single dot row. The next byte (byte 2) prints  
its six bits, representing a character, in the same dot row across the  
page.  
Byte!  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte n  
Row "  
1
2
3
.
.
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
. . . . . . . . . . . . …. . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . …. . . . . .  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
Vertical Format  
In vertical format, each byte (or character) occupies six dot rows of  
one column. Each character is one dot wide and six dots high. The  
next character (byte 2) is printed beside the first, moving from left to  
right across the page.  
Byte!  
Row  
1
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
…n  
…bit  
…1  
…2  
…3  
…4  
…5  
…6  
1
2
3
4
5
6
38  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Eight-Bit Graphics  
Horizontal Format  
Graphics data printed in horizontal format is comprised of a stream  
of bytes from left to right across each dot row.  
This chart shows that byte 1 (or character 1) in row 1 prints its eight  
bits from left to right in a single dot row. The next byte (byte 2) prints  
its eight bits, representing a character, in the same dot row across  
the page.  
Byte!  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte n  
Row "  
1
2
3
.
.
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 …1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 …1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 …1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
. . . . . .  
…. . . . . .  
…. . . . . .  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 …1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Vertical Format  
In vertical format, each byte (or character) occupies six dot rows of  
one column. Each character is one dot wide and six dots high. The  
next character (byte 2) is printed beside the first, moving from left to  
right across the page.  
Byte!  
Row  
1
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
bit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
…n  
…bit  
…1  
…2  
…3  
…4  
…5  
…6  
...7  
...8  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
39  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Graphics Considerations  
In horizontal format, an LF causes the paper to advance one or two  
dot rows based on the vertical dot density, regardless of whether 6-bit  
or 8-bit graphics has been selected.  
In vertical format, the paper is advanced as the dot rows (6 or 8,  
depending on graphics mode) are printed.  
Graphics Sequences  
ESC P  
DCS (Device Control String):  
Enters dot graphics mode at the  
density and format previously selected by the  
ESC [ <p1> ;<p2> ; <p3> q sequence. Following this sequence, the  
printer prints discrete dots and leaves spaces based on the 1s and 0s  
in the low order six bits of each byte received. forming graphic dot  
rows from left to right. To exit from dot graphics mode, use ESC \.  
While in graphics mode (after ESC P and before the ESC \ sequence),  
8-bit graphics can be printed instead of 6-bit by using one of the  
following sequences:  
ESC " 1 n1 <data bytes>  
ESC " 2 n1 <data bytes>  
ESC " 3 n1 <data bytes>  
60 dpi horizontal  
120 dpi horizontal  
Uses current horizontal and vertical  
density.  
n1  
number of data bytes to follow  
<data bytes> n1 bytes of graphics data  
When the number of bytes of 8-bit data specified by n1 have been  
processed, and prior to receiving an ESC \ sequence, the data will  
print as 6-bit graphics.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 80  
1B 5B 50  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"P";  
ESC [ p1 b  
REP (Repeat Text or Dot Graphics Character):  
Repeats the single  
preceding character p1 times. If p1 is 0 or unspecified, it is set to 1.  
The maximum value for p1 is 32,767.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> 98  
1B 5B <p1> 62  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>b";  
40  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [ p1 ; p2 ; p3 q GENGRM – Select Graphics Mode:  
Selects the graphics mode,  
format, and horizontal or vertical density for dot graphics.  
IMPORTANT  
This sequence must be sent before entering the graphics mode  
with ESC P.  
The first parameter selects the graphics mode: the second parameter  
selects the vertical spacing, and the third selects the horizontal dot  
spacing.  
p1  
value Selects Graphics Format  
null  
0
1
2
3
Reserved: Vertical format 60h x 72v if no <p2> or <p3>  
Reserved: Vertical format 60h x 72v if no <p2> or <p3>  
Reserved: Vertical format 120h x 72v if no <p2> or <p3>  
Reserved: Vertical format 120h x 144v if no <p2> or <p3>  
Reserved: Sequence ignored  
4
5
6+  
Horizontal format 60h x 72v if no <p2> or <p3>  
Similar to 4, above, if <p3> = 5, 6, or 7, else ignore  
Reserved: Sequence ignored  
Note: <p2> and <p3> are ignored in this mode.  
p2  
null  
0-6  
7+  
Selects Vertical Density  
72dpiv (p1=4 only)  
144dpiv  
72dpiv  
p3  
null  
0-3  
4
Selects Horizontal Density  
60dpih (p1=4 only)  
Reserved: Leave current value unchanged  
Reserved: Leave current value unchanged  
Reserved: 120dpih  
5
6-7  
8-10  
11+  
120dpih  
Reserved: 60dpih  
60dpih  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> <p2> <p3> 112  
1B 5B <p1> <p2> <p3> 70  
CHR$(27);"[<pl><p2><p3>q";  
41  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ELECTRONIC VERTICAL FORMAT UNIT - EVFU  
Downline vertical tab loading is accomplished through the EVFU. The  
EVFU allows loading a form table with a minimum form length of  
.33 inches (240 decipoints) and a maximum length of 24 inches  
(17,280 decipoints).  
Since the maximum length is 24 inches, the number of lines is  
dependent on the lpi setting. 3 lpi = 72 lines. 4 lpi = 96 lines.  
6 lpi = 144 lines, and 8 lpi = 192 lines. Exceeding the maximum  
causes a fault.  
Downloading the EVFU  
The vertical format type must be set to VtType:Emul VFU through  
the control panel using the Program Mode.  
No paper instruction lead (PI) is required.  
When the printer has an EVFU table loaded, VFU is displayed on  
the control panel.  
ESC ] !  
Start EVFU table loading sequence  
. Each line of the form requires  
an entry. Dummy values (filler codes - See Table of Channel Codes on  
page 5-30) are required in lines with no channel. Two bytes are  
required for each line of the form. Loading Is terminated by the ESC \  
sequence.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 93 33  
1B 5D 21  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"]!";  
Loading the Table  
The first table location is normally loaded with the channel 1 code.  
This is defined as the top-of-form (TOF) channel. The table may be  
left without channel 1, and a command to skip to channel 1 will  
cause a normal form feed as though there were no VFU. Two bytes  
are loaded for each line of the form to be controlled. One or more  
channel numbers may be indicated in the two-byte code.  
The format of two-byte channel control code is:  
Bit Number  
Channel Number  
First Byte  
8
x
x
7
one  
one  
6
6
y
5
5
y
4
4
y
3
3
y
2
2
y
1
1
y
Bit Number  
Channel Number  
Second Byte  
8
x
x
7
one  
one  
6
12  
y
5
11  
y
4
10  
y
3
9
y
2
8
y
1
7
y
y:  
x:  
0 = no stop in channel  
1 = stop in channel  
bit has no meaning  
42  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE  
To make characters acceptable, bit 7 must be set.  
Each "channel control code" pair of bytes has the capability to  
indicate multiple channels since each channel indication has a  
unique bit position, which is either ON=1 or OFF=0.  
TABLE OF CHANNEL CODES  
Decimal  
Value  
Binary  
Value  
ASCII  
Character  
1
2
1
2
1
@
A
B
D
H
P
`
@
@
@
@
@
@
2
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
A
B
D
H
P
`
Remarks  
Fillers: see Note  
Channel 1  
64  
65  
66  
68  
72  
80  
96  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
64  
65  
66  
68  
72  
80  
96  
1000000  
1000001  
1000010  
1000100  
1001000  
1010000  
1100000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000000  
1000001  
1000010  
1000100  
1001000  
1010000  
1100000  
Channel 2  
Channel 3  
Channel 4  
Channel 5  
Channel 6  
Channel 7  
Channel 8  
Channel 9  
Channel 10  
Channel 11  
Channel 12  
BASIC Programming Example for EVFU Table Loading  
PROGRAM INSTRUCTION  
1500 WIDTH "LPT1:" 255  
REMARKS  
Required by some BASIC languages to avoid auto LF at  
column 80  
1510 LPRINT CHR$(27);"]I";  
1520 LPRINT CHR$(65);CHR$(64);  
1530 FOR I=1 to 4  
Enables EVFU loading.  
Resets TOF, Channel 1 Sao Table of Channel Codes  
1531 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(64);  
1532 NEXT I  
4 filler lines  
1540 LPRINT CHR$(68);CHR$(64);  
1550 FOR I=1 to 16  
1551 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(64);  
1552 NEXT I  
Selects Channel 3. See Table of Channel Codes  
16 filler lines  
1560 LPRINT CHRS$72);CHR$(64);  
1570 FOR I=1 to 31  
1571 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(64);  
Selects channel 4. See Table of Channel Codes  
31 filler lines  
1572 NEXT I  
1580 LPRINT CHR$(80);CHR$(64);  
1590 FOR I=1 to 8  
1591 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(64);  
1592 NEXT I  
Selects channel 5. See Table of Channel Codes  
8 filler lines  
1600 LPRINT CHR$(64);CHR$(66);  
1610 LPRINT CHR$(27);"\";  
1620 END  
Selects channel 8. See Table of Channel Codes  
Exit EVFU loading.  
43  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EVFU Default  
The default EVFU will be generated based on the current form length  
and lpi setting under the following conditions:  
When the printer is initialized  
When either the forms definition or lpi setting is changed  
When the start EVFU load escape sequence ESC ] is immediately  
followed by the end load sequence ESC \  
When the emulation is changed from P Series or Dataproducts, to  
ANSI  
The following chart shows how the default EVFU table is defined:  
CHANNEL  
DESCRIPTION  
1
2
Top Margin (first line  
Bottom Margin (last line)  
3
4
Single Spacing  
Double Spacing  
5
Triple Spacing  
6
Half Form  
7
Quarter Form  
8
Tenth Line  
9
Bottom of Form (bottom margin)  
Bottom of Form minus 1 line  
Top of Form minus 1 line (last line this form)  
Top of Form  
10  
11  
12  
Skip to Channel Command  
ESC [ p1 ; p2 ! p  
GENVFU (VFU Channel Command):  
Commands vertical paper  
movement to the channel specified by the number formed by p1 and  
p2. Valid channel numbers are in the range 1- 12.  
0;1 - selects channel 1  
0;9 - selects channel 9  
1;1 - selects channel 11  
Channel 1 is always used for TOF; channel 12 is always used for  
vertical tab. When the channel number is greater than 12, the  
program defaults to channel 1. If the table has not been loaded and a  
channel command is received, it is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 <p1> ; <p2> ! 112  
1B 5B <p1> 3B <p2> 21 70  
CHR$(27);"[<p1>;<p2>!p";  
44  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC Programming Example for Skip to Channel  
This is a sample program showing the use of the skip-to-channel  
command. It makes use of the previously loaded EVFU program.  
PROGRAM INSTRUCTION  
10 WIDTH “LPT1:”,255  
REMARKS  
Required by some BASIC languages to avoid  
auto LF at column 80  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27);”[0;1!p”;  
30 LPRINT “TOP OF FORM”;  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27);”[0;3!p”;  
50 LPRINT “LINE 6”;  
Go to top of form (channel 1)  
Print the indicated words  
Go to channel 3  
Print the indicated words  
Go to channel 4  
60 LPRINT CHR$(27);”[0;4!p”;  
70 LPRINT “LINE 25”;  
80 LPRINT CHR$(27);”[0;5!p”;  
90 LPRINT “LINE 57”;  
100 LPRINT CHR$(27);”0;8!p”;  
110 LPRINT “END OF FORM”;  
120 END  
Print the indicated words  
Go to channel 5  
Print the indicated words  
Go to channel 8  
Print the indicated words  
NOTE  
Establish Top of Form locally before  
printing forms. When executing the  
program, paper slews to the top of  
the next form before beginning to  
print.  
45  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BAR CODES  
Thirteen different styles of bar codes and POSTNET are available.  
Each style (except POSTNET) can be rotated 90, 180, or 270 degrees  
and printed with or without a human-readable line (HRL). The bar  
code symbol size and density are also adjustable.  
NOTE  
Control sequences given in the following text show the proper  
syntax needed from the host. The second line has examples of  
code written in the BASIC program language.  
Entering and Exiting Bar Codes  
Before the printer can print input data as bar code symbols, the bar  
code mode must be both selected and activated. There are two ways  
for this to be accomplished depending on the setting of printer option  
1 for both 4800 and 4410 ANSI emulation.  
SETUP | FORMAT | MODIFY FORMAT | GENPRTOPTS | ANSI |  
Printer Option 1 (See Appendix G, Tables 5 and 6) is used to enable  
the SI (shift in) and SO (shift out) ASCII codes to activate and  
deactivate special mode functions. In this case, the special mode  
function is bar codes. With Option 1 enabled, code SO will turn on or  
activate the bar code mode. SI will turn bar codes off.  
ANSI 4800/4410 Strap 1 OUT  
Enter the bar code mode of printing with the following control  
sequence sent by the host. (See Appendix D for strapping options.)  
ESC [ 3 t  
LPRINT CHR$(27)*."[3t";  
Data sent after the above sequence is interpreted and printed as bar  
codes.  
Exit the bar code mode using:  
ESC [ 0 t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";  
ANSI 4800/4410 Strap 1 IN  
(See Appendix D for strapping options.)  
ESC [ 3 t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";  
Selects the bar code special mode.  
SO  
LPRINT CHR$(14);  
Activates bar codes and prints all received data as bar codes. (Only  
after it has been selected by ESC [3 t above.)  
46  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SI  
LPRINT CHR$(15);  
Deactivates bar codes and allows printing of normal text.  
ESC [ 0 t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t";  
Deselects bar codes.  
When an ESC [ 0 t is received before the SI code, bar codes are both  
deactivated and deselected.  
Setting Bar Code Parameters  
Select the style, height, spacing, orientation, and print density for the  
bar code using the following escape sequence. The second line in the  
example (written in BASIC) shows the parameters that are the default  
values for the printer.  
ESC [<p1>;<p2>;…;<p10>}  
Example  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[4;9;1;2;6;2;6;2;0;0}";  
p1: Style  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Interleaved 2 of 5  
(Reserved for future use)  
(Reserved for future use)  
(Reserved for future use)  
Code 3 of 9 (default)  
EAN-8  
EAN-13  
Code 11  
(Reserved for future use)  
Codabar a/t  
10 Codabar b/n  
11 Codabar c/*  
12 Codabar d/e  
13 UPC-A  
14 UPC-E  
15 Code 93  
16 Code 128 (A, B, C)  
17 (Reserved for future use)  
18 (Reserved for future use)  
50 POSTNET (see note)  
NOTE  
When using POSTNET, parameters <p2> through <p10> are  
invalid. If these parameters are changed, they will be  
retained in memory and will affect other styles if selected.  
See Appendix F for more information on POSTNET.  
47  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bar Code Dimensions  
NOTE  
The following dimensions are for barcodes printed at 0 and 180  
degrees rotation. Barcodes printed at 90 or 270 degrees rotation  
will be compressed by a 6:5 ratio due to the difference in size of  
the horizontal and vertical grids.  
p2  
Bar code height in 1/12-inch increments  
Minimum:  
Maximum:  
Default:  
1=l/12 inch  
120=10 inches  
9=9/12 inch (3 / 4 inch)  
Human-readable line is not included in height.  
p3  
Human-readable line  
0=Do not print human-readable line  
1=Print human-readable line (default)  
p4  
Narrow bar width, number x 1/120 inch  
Default:  
Range:  
2 (2/120 inch, approximately .017 inch)  
2, 4, 6, . . . 126  
p5*  
p6  
Wide bar width, number x 1/120 inch  
Default:  
Range:  
6 (6/120 inch, approximately . 050 inch)  
2, 4, 6, . . . 254  
Narrow space width, number x 1/120 inch  
Default:  
Range:  
2 (2/120 inch, approximately . 017 inch)  
2. 4, 6, . . .126  
p7*  
p8*  
Wide space width, number x 1/120 inch  
Default:  
Range:  
6 (6/120 Inch. approximately .050 inch)  
2, 4, 6, . . . 254  
Intercharacter space width, number x: 1/120 inch  
Default:  
Range:  
2 (2/120 inch, approximately . 017 inch)  
2, 4, 6 . . . 126  
* Parameters <p5>, <p7>, and <p8> are not programmable in some  
bar code styles since they are generated from other parameters.  
48  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
p9  
Bar code rotation and human-readable line (HRL) font style (if  
used).  
0
No rotation - use currently selected font style, cpi, and  
lpi. This is the default setting.  
1
2
3
4
No rotation - use special HRL font.  
90-degree rotation use special HRL font  
180-degree rotation use special FIRL font.  
270-degree rotation use special HRL font.  
p 10  
Horizontal print density  
0
1
60 dpi horizontal by 144 dpi vertical print density  
120 dpi horizontal by 144 dpi vertical print density  
Default for bar code styles 5, 6, 13, and 14 is 120 dpi.  
Default for all other styles is 60 dpi.  
Bar codes printed at 90 or 270 degrees rotation will print at the same  
speed (120 x 144) regardless of the selected horizontal density.  
IMPORTANT  
If no parameters have previously been entered, then the  
factory default values will be used. If previous values have  
been sent from the host, these values will prevail until  
changed by the host or the printer is initialized.  
A missing parameter will leave the corresponding value unchanged.  
A zero parameter value for p2–p8 will cause the default value to be  
selected.  
Use semicolons as place holders when changing parameters.  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[;;;;;;;;;1}" Changes only parameter 10.  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"15;;0}"  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[16}"  
Changes only parameters 1 and 3.  
Changes only the style of the bar code.  
If no changes are made to the parameters of the bar code, the printer  
will use the following factory-set values.  
49  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Bar Code Characteristics  
p1=4 Code 39  
p2=9 3/4 inch height  
p3=1 Human-readable line printed  
p4=2 Narrow bar width 1/60 inch  
p5=6 Wide bar width 1/20 inch  
p6=2 Narrow space width 1/60 inch  
p7=6 Wide space width 1/20 inch  
p8=2 Intercharacter space width 1/60 inch  
p9=0 No rotation, use currently selected font  
p10=0 Horizontal print density 60 dpi  
Human-Readable Line (HRL)  
The human-readable line is printed 0. 10 inch below the bar code  
symbol. The height of the HRL and the 0.10 inch space are not  
included in the bar code height parameter (p2).  
A diamond symbol appearing in the human-readable line indicates  
one of the following conditions:  
• Margin overrun. The data to be printed exceeds the available space  
remaining inside the programmed margins.  
• The DEL character has been received while printing in a bar code  
style that permits the use of all 128 ASCII characters.  
• An invalid character has been received. An example of this would be  
a letter "A" sent to the printer while printing a style 5 bar code.  
Style 5 (EAN-8) only accepts the digits 0-9.  
Font Styles and Enhancements  
Non-rotated bar codes can be printed with an HRL in any of the fonts  
available to the printer.  
If enhancements are desired (e.g., bold, underline, or expanded) the  
HRL must be printed using the normal text mode. Print the bar code  
symbol(s) without the HRL first. Exit the bar code mode and print the  
HRL using the normal text mode with enhancements.  
Rotated bar codes use a special font for the human-readable line.  
Spacing and Bar Code Editing Aids  
There is a 0.25-inch space called a quiet zone at the beginning and  
end of every bar code. As a result, the minimum distance between  
two horizontal bar codes is 0.50 inch.  
Most bar code styles accept commas. spaces, and horizontal tabs as  
delimiters to separate bar codes. A comma adds no additional space  
between bar codes, so the separation is the width of the quiet zone or  
0.50 inch. A space character adds 0.10 inch to the quiet zone for a  
total of 0.60 inch separation. A horizontal tab adds the appropriate  
number of empty spaces to go to the next tab.  
50  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bar Code Readability Statement  
The following information is provided to ensure that the best results  
are obtained from your printed bar codes.  
Use bar code readers designed to operate in the visible light  
frequency range. Optional infrared-readable ribbon cartridges are  
available.  
Use bar code readers designed to read medium- or low-density bar  
code symbols. Avoid readers with apertures less than 7 mils  
(.007 inch or .18 mm).  
Using bar code size parameters smaller than the default settings may  
produce unacceptable results.  
51  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bar Code Program Examples  
The following program examples are provided to help you become  
familiar with the bar code escape sequences. The programs are  
written in BASIC and printed using the LUST command. All bar  
codes are actual size.  
Test Program  
This is the minimum code needed to print a bar code. Use it to test  
the printer's ability to print bar codes when more complicated  
programs are not producing results.  
Line 10 turns on the bar code mode. line 20 contains the data to be  
printed as a bar code symbol, and line 30 turns off the bar code  
mode.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
20 LPRINT "1234567890";  
30 LPRINT CHRS(27); "[0t";  
Error Symbol  
This example shows the error symbol in the HRL and the error  
pattern in the symbol. The error pattern causes the entire symbol to  
be rejected by the bar code reader.  
The error was caused by the lowercase "a" being inserted into the  
data. The default style, Code 3 of 9. accepts only uppercase A-Z, the  
numbers 0-9, and the characters -, ., $, /, + and %.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
20 LPRINT "1a34567890";  
30 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
52  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Parameters  
This example changes the style p1, height p2, and the HRL font p9 of  
the bar code. Notice that semicolons are used as place holders for the  
parameters not being changed.  
Line 10 - changes style to Code 128, changes height to 1/4" (3/12").  
and use the special HRL font.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[16;3;;;;;;;1;}  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234567890";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
Commas and Spaces as Delimiters  
When a comma delimiter is used to separate bar codes, no additional  
space Is added to the quiet zones. Since the ending .25-inch quiet  
zone of one bar code symbol meets the beginning quiet zone of the  
next bar code, a total of .50-inch separates the two. Style 7 (line 5) is  
used for these examples since Code 11 uses both spaces and commas  
as delimiters.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[7}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234,56,7890";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
When spaces are used as delimiters, an additional 1-inch is added to  
the quiet zones. Note that multiple spaces can be used.  
10 LPRINT CHR$27); "[3t"  
20 LPRINT "1234  
56 7890";  
30 LPRINT CHR$27); "[0t"  
53  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal Spacing  
Use horizontal tabs for spacing bar code symbols across the page.  
Line 10 sets horizontal tabs at 1440 and 2880 decipoints (2 and  
4-inches). The HT codes in lines 40 and 60 cause a jump to the next  
tab.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[1440;2880;u";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
50 LPRINT "5678";  
60 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
70 LPRINT "9012";  
80 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
When no horizontal tabs are set, an HT code acts as a space, adding  
0.1 inch to the separation. Total separation is 0.6 inch when the HT  
is added to the quiet zones.  
Line 10 clears all previously set horizontal tabs for this example.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3g";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
50 LPRINT "5678";  
60 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
70 LPRINT "9012";  
80 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
54  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Option Strap 11, Group 2 IN  
Printer control strap 11 is used for positioning the paper after  
printing a bar code. Strap 11 IN sets the paper to the top of the bar  
code after printing; Strap 11 OUT leaves the paper position as is after  
printing a bar code. (See Appendix D for a complete listing of options  
available.  
The state of strap 11 can be checked and changed using the setup  
menu.  
In the following examples, lines 10 to 30 print the bar code symbol  
and line 40 adds a line of text to be printed.  
Examples 1 and 2 show the effect strap 11 has on the position of the  
text.  
In example 3, the semicolon at the end of line 30 has been deleted to  
show that Strap 11 only affects the same horizontal zone that the bar  
code occupies. The semicolon in BASIC is used to suppress a LF/CR  
after an LPRINT statement.  
IMPORTANT  
Strap 11 is only effective after exiting the bar code mode. As in  
the printout above, printing multiple bar codes without exiting  
(line 80 above) causes all the bar codes to be printed in the  
same horizontal area of the paper regardless of the condition of  
strap 13. Also, some form of printable data must be on the line  
before a paper move command (see line 40 in the examples); if  
not, the paper will not backup to the top of the bar code.  
EXAMPLE 1: Strap 11 OUT  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
20 LPRINT "1234567890";  
30 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t";  
40 LPRINT "STRAP 11 OUT"  
EXAMPLE 2: Strap 11 IN  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
20 LPRINT "1234567890";  
30 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t";  
40 LPRINT "STRAP 11 IN"  
55  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXAMPLE 3: Strap 11 OUT with no suppression of LF/CR on line 30  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
20 LPRINT "1234567890";  
30 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
40 LPRINT "STRAP 11 OUT"  
56  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vertical Bar Codes  
Line 10 sets parameter p9 for 90-degree rotation using the special  
font for the HRL.  
Line 20 turns on the bar code mode.  
Line 30 is the data to be printed as a bar code symbol.  
Line 40 turns off the bar code mode.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[;;;;;;;;2}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "12345";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
Commas and spaces used as delimiters serve the same function as in  
horizontal bar codes. However, the quiet zones rotate with the  
symbol, leaving almost no horizontal separation between bar codes  
on the same line.  
to print or  
In the following examples, line 10 is used  
printing of the HRL (p3).  
inhibit the  
COMMAS: With HRL  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[;;1}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234,5678,9012";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
57  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAS: Without HRL  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[;;0}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234,5678,9012";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
SPACES: With HRL  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[;;1}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234  
5678 9012";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
SPACES: Without HRL  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[;;0}";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "1234  
5678 9012";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t"  
58  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal Tabs  
Line 10 sets horizontal tab stops at 1080 and 2160 decipoints (1.  
5 and 3 inches).  
Lines 40 and 60 are ITT codes that cause a jump to the next tab  
stop.  
Line 90 is a line of text to show positioning on the paper. The vertical  
separation between the bar code symbol and the text "TEXT STRAP  
13 OUT" is the ending quiet zone.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[1080;2160;u";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[3t";  
30 LPRINT "12345";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
50 LPRINT "12345";  
60 LPRINT CHR$(9);  
70 LPRINT "12345";  
80 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0t";  
90 LPRINT "TEXT STRAP 13 OUT"  
59  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OVERSIZE CHARACTER FONT  
The oversize font is composed of special block-style characters that  
can be expanded 156 times the size of standard fonts. This will  
produce letters up to 15.25-inches (388mm) high by 13 inches  
(330mm) wide. Oversize characters can be rotated 90, 180, or 270  
degrees.  
Do not confuse oversize characters with expanded characters. The  
expanded character feature, (standard in your printer), expands all  
existing fonts up to 8 times the normal size. These characters are not  
rotatable.  
The oversize character feature works with the ANSI protocol.  
Entering and Exiting Oversize  
The following sequences are used to enter, rotate, and exit oversize  
printing:  
ESC [ 0 |  
ESC [ 1 |  
ESC [ 2 |  
ESC [ 3 |  
ESC [ 4 |  
Exit oversize printing.  
Select oversize font with no rotation.  
Select oversize font with 90-degree rotation.  
Select oversize font with 180-degree rotation.  
Select oversize font with 270-degree rotation.  
";  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0|  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0|";CHR$(124);  
or  
Once oversize has been turned on, it will remain on until an  
ESC [ 0 | sequence is used to turned it off. It does not turn off due to  
line terminators (CR and LF).  
60  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Size  
ESC [p1;p2 B is the sequence used to set the vertical (p1) and  
horizontal (p2) size of the oversize characters. A p1 value of 300  
would increase the vertical size of the character 300% or 3 times.  
The last two digits of each parameter are necessary to comply with  
the ANSI standard, but are ignored by the printer. Using the above  
example for p1, any three-digit number starting with 3 (300-399) will  
be interpreted as 3 times normal size. Likewise, 400-499 equals 4  
times, 1200-1299 equals a 12-times increase in size, and so on. The  
maximum size is 15600;15600 (156 times) and the minimum or  
default is 200;200 (2 times).  
Since this same sequence is used to change size in the expanded  
mode, the parameters must be cleared to normal size,  
ESC [ 100 ; 100 B, to prevent entering expanded mode when oversize  
is turned off.  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
ESC [ <p1>; <p2> B  
27 91 <p1> 59 <p2> 66  
1B 5B <p1> 3B <p2> 42  
CHR$(27);"[";<p1>;<p2>;B";  
BASIC:  
Size Parameters for Rotation  
The <p1> and <p2> size parameters are always relative to a rotation  
angle of zero degrees. That is, the characters are expanded first and  
then rotated.  
Spacing Between Characters  
For non-rotated characters and characters rotated 180 degrees, the  
horizontal spacing between characters is 1/60-inch times the <p2>  
parameter.  
For characters rotated 90 or 270 degrees, the horizontal spacing  
between characters is 3/60-inch times the p1 parameter.  
Vertical spacing is dependent on vertical paper move commands (LF,  
CR, VPR, etc.), the state of menu option GenPrtOpts/Group 2/Strap  
13, and the character size and line spacing currently in effect.  
61  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample Programs  
Example 1  
The first example shows the code used to print oversize.  
Line 10 sets the size to X3 vertical (V) and X3 horizontal (H). Line 20  
enters oversize printing with no rotation. Line 30 is the data to be  
printed. Line 40 exits oversize printing. Line 50 returns the size  
parameters to X 1 V - X 1 H.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[300;300B";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[1|";  
30 LPRINT "ABCabc";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0|";  
50 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[100;100B"  
Example 2  
The next two examples demonstrate the importance of setting the size  
parameters back to X1 V - X1 H after printing oversize. This is the  
same program used in Example 1 with an additional line added.  
Line 60 prints 1234 in the currently selected font.  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[300;300 B";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "El:";  
30 LPRINT "ABCabc"  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "CO:";  
50 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[100;100 B"  
60 LPRINT "1234"  
62  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 3: Showing the Importance of Resetting  
Scaling Factors  
If line 50, which sets the size to X1 V and X1 H. is removed, the data  
printed in line 60 is now subject to the expanded mode of printing.  
NOTE  
In BASIC, LPRINT statements automatically generate an LF/CR  
at the end of the line unless suppressed by a semicolon. Since  
line 30 does not end with a semicolon, an LF/CR occurred at  
the lpi in effect (still in oversize). This accounts for the vertical  
distance between the ABCabc line and the 1234 line.  
Notice (below) that the 1234 printed line is expanded vertically by X3  
10 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[300;300B";  
20 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[1|";  
30 LPRINT "ABCabc";  
40 LPRINT CHR$(27); "[0|"  
60 LPRINT "1234"  
63  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Control Strap GenPrtOpts/Group 2/Strap 13  
This printer control strap is used for positioning the paper after  
printing oversize characters. When this strap is set to IN, the paper is  
positioned at the top of the oversize character after printing; when set  
to OUT, the paper position remains as is after printing oversize.  
The state of the printer strap can be checked and changed using the  
configuration menu.  
In the following examples:  
Lines 10-30 print oversize characters at X3.  
Line 50 changes the oversize to X4 V by X6 H.  
Lines 70-80 print oversize and exits.  
Line 90 returns the parameters to X1 to prevent expanded  
printing.  
Lines 100-110 print normal text to show the effect that strap 13  
has on positioning.  
IMPORTANT  
Line spacing was set back to normal (6 lpi) when normal text  
was selected in line 90. When strap 13 is IN and the paper  
position returns to the top of oversize, vertical moves (CR, LF,  
VPA, VPR) must be used to move the paper to prevent  
overprinting on the oversize characters.  
64  
Chapter 2. ANSI Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 4: GenPtrOpts | Group 2 Strap 13 IN  
The oversize characters and the first line of normal printing are  
aligned at the first print line. The second line of normal printing (Text  
Text Text . . .) started printing one line below Strap 13 IN and  
overprints the oversized text.  
100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[300;300B";  
110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1|";  
120 LPRINT "ABC";  
130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[400;600B";  
140 LPRINT "ABC";  
150 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0|";  
160 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[100;100B";  
170 LPRINT "Strap 13 IN";  
180 LPRINT "Text Text Text Text Text Text Text"  
Example 5: GenPtrOpts | Group 2 Strap 13 OUT  
Paper motion is not returned after printing oversized characters.  
100 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[300;300B";  
110 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[1|";  
120 LPRINT "ABC";  
130 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[400;600B";  
140 LPRINT "ABC";  
150 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0|";  
160 LPRINT CHR$(27);"[100;100B";  
170 LPRINT "Strap 13 OUT";  
180 LPRINT "Text Text Text Text Text Text Text"  
65  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 3. PRINTRONIX P300/P600 EMULATION  
INTRODUCTION  
This printer is plug-compatible with the Printronix 300/600 family of  
line printers. It accepts and acts upon all control codes utilized by  
this family of printers in a manner that is as functionally equivalent  
as possible.  
The following is a list of the control codes (and their functions)  
utilized by the Printronix printer. Any control codes not listed will be  
discarded.  
When changing from the ANSI emulation to the P Series emulation.  
the ANSI vertical tab table does not transfer and the horizontal tab  
table set In the ANSI mode is not available. Ali menu parameters set  
before changing emulations will carry over except for these.  
CONTROL CODES  
ACK  
Line at 8 LPI (06H):  
<
>
A received ACK anywhere on the line causes  
the entire line to be printed at 8 lpi. Since this code is momentary, it  
will not affect subsequent lines. Each line must receive an <ACK>  
code for the switch to 8 lpi.  
BEL  
BS  
Bell Code (07H):  
A <BEL> code received at the interface causes the  
beeper to. sound for approximately 1 second.  
Elongated Character Line (08H):  
A <BS> code anywhere on the line  
causes that line to be printed at double height. Standard- and  
double-high characters cannot be mixed on the same line.  
CR  
Carriage Return Slew Zero or Edit Mode (ODH):  
In the edit mode,  
i.e., with the P300/600 Emulation Strap 01 OUT, a <CR> will  
left-justify the line in the buffer, but no printing will occur. The next  
line of data received can then modify the line. With the strap IN, the 0  
slew mode is invoked. In this mode, the line modification feature is  
deleted and a <CR> is treated in the same manner as in the ANSI  
protocol. The print control, DEFINE CR, with the definition set to  
CR=CR+LF converts a carriage return to a linefeed. With the  
definition set to CR=CR, the printer ignores received carriage returns.  
DC1  
Ready/Select (11H):  
A received <DC1> can be used to remotely  
select the printer in both serial and parallel interfaces. A serial  
interface protocol can be selected to transmit a <DC1> code to inform  
the host of a ready condition. See Appendix G for strap information.  
NOTE  
If a <DC1> or <DC3> control character is received with strap 8  
in GenPrtOpts set to OUT, the control is treated as a VFU  
Channel Command. See Appendix G, General Printer Options,  
Group 2.  
66  
Chapter 3. Printronix P300/P600 Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC3  
Busy/Select (13H):  
A received DC3 can be used to remotely deselect  
the printer in both serial and parallel interfaces. A serial interface  
protocol can be used to transmit a DC3 code to inform the host of a  
busy condition.  
NOTE  
If a <DC1> or <DC3> control character is received with strap 8  
in GenPrtOpts Group 2 set to OUT, the control is treated as a  
VFU Channel Command. See Appendix D, General Printer  
Options, Group 2 on page 345.  
DEL  
DLE  
Delete (7FH):  
In graphics mode, the delete character is treated as  
data. In the edit mode, a <DEL> following a <CR> erases (replace with  
a space) previously accepted (buffered, but not printed) characters.  
High Vertical Density Graphics (10H):  
A <DLE> code preceded by  
an <ENQ> code anywhere on the same line causes paper motion for  
that line to be 1/144 inch instead of the normal 1/72 inch. If not  
preceded by an <ENQ> code, the <DLE> is discarded. If there are no  
graphics commands (EOT or ENQ) in the line, the DLE code is treated  
as an EVFU channel command.  
ENQ  
EOT  
Normal Density Plot Line (05H):  
An <ENQ> anywhere in the line  
causes the line to be treated as normal-density (60 dpi) plot mode  
graphics. An <LF> code causes the line to be printed as one dot row  
and the paper is advanced. If there is a <DLE> anywhere in the line,  
the paper is advanced by 1/144 inch. Otherwise, the paper is  
advanced by 1/72 inch.  
High Density Plot Line (04H):  
An EOT is used to print at 120 dpi.  
This code anywhere in the line causes the line to be treated as  
high-density plot mode graphics. The line must be terminated with a  
CR (printer strap A29 must be OUT). The characters are treated as  
dot information and the CR at the end of the line will not cause the  
paper to advance. The code causes dots to be printed in the  
even-numbered dot column positions. A second line of the same data  
with the normal plot mode command (ENQ) is required to fill in the  
remainder of the dots and to advance the paper.  
ETX  
FF  
End of Transmission (03H):  
The ETX code is used in the serial  
interface with the ACK code as part of an interface protocol. The ETX  
is received from the host at the end of a data block. The host then  
stops sending data until an ACK is received.  
Form Feed (0CH):  
A form feed causes the line to be printed and the  
paper advanced to the top of form.  
HT  
LF  
Horizontal Tab (09H):  
An HT is replaced by a space character.  
Line Feed (0AH):  
An LF causes the line to be printed and advances  
the paper to the next line. If the line is a plot mode line, the paper is  
advanced one dot row or not at all, depending on the density of the  
plot mode. See Printronix Mode Graphic Density Table.  
RS  
Record Separator (1EH):  
The RS character is used to signal the  
beginning of an EVFU load. [Need replacement wording here for the  
margin notes in the tech review.]  
67  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SI  
Shift In (0FH):  
An SI code anywhere in the line causes the remainder  
of the line and all following lines to be printed in the standard font.  
SO  
Shift Out (0EH).  
An SO code anywhere in the line causes the  
remainder of the line of the line and all subsequent lines (until an SI  
code is received) to be printed in the alternate font. The alternate font  
is selected with printer P300/600 emulation straps S13-S16, set in  
the GenPtrOpts function of the CCU menu.  
SP  
Space (20H):  
The space code causes a blank in the character  
position represented by the code. Following a carriage return in edit  
mode, space codes do not modify the contents of the print buffer. The  
SP is used as a skip code to pass over characters in the buffer. When  
using the character graphics font the character in the 20H position is  
printed instead of a blank.  
UNDL  
Underline (5FH):  
When using the legacy parallel interface, hardware  
strap H7 IN causes a CR to be substituted for an underline character.  
(See Appendix G. Hardware Straps.) All software straps that apply to  
a CR will apply if the option is selected.  
US  
VT  
Unit Separator (1FH):  
an EVFU load sequence.  
The US character is used to signal the end of  
Vertical Tab (0BH):  
A VT causes the line to be printed and paper  
advanced until the next tab position is reached. If the VFU is  
enabled, channel 12 is accessed instead.  
68  
Chapter 3. Printronix P300/P600 Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTRONIX GRAPHICS  
The Printronix emulation graphics mode provides a horizontal dot  
placement plotting method. This method enables the printing of  
ASCH characters in their binary code form. Since each character has  
a unique pattern of 1s and 0s (dots and voids) that make up its  
binary code, the correct placement of these binary forms enables you  
to form larger images on the paper.  
For clarity in the text, a binary 1 (a printed dot) Will be shown as an  
X and a binary 0 (empty dot position) will be shown as a 0.  
In the graphics mode, only the low order six bits of a seven- or eight-  
bit character are used (bits 1-6). Looking at an ASCH code chart, the  
question mark character (?) is represented by the binary number  
1111110 (bit 1 - bit 7). Since only the first 6 bits are used, a ? would  
print six dots on the paper. An asterisk (*) is represented by 010101  
which would print 0X0X0X0 across the page horizontally.  
Using the question mark that prints all dots, a series of these  
characters produces a one dot high solid line across the paper. By  
repeating, omitting, and mixing characters across a page, images  
such as graphs, charts, and pictures can be produced.  
Dot Patterns and Densities  
The chart on the next page shows the dot patterns for each of the  
ASCII characters. Each character represents six dots (or dot  
positions)* and their spacing is dependent on the density selected.  
Graphics data printed in horizontal format is comprised of a stream  
of bytes from left to right across each dot row.  
This chart shows that byte 1 (or character 1) in row 1 will print its six  
bits from left to right in a single dot row. The next byte (byte 2) prints  
its six bits, representing a character, in the same dot row across the  
page.  
Byte!  
Byte 1  
Byte 2  
Byte n  
Row "  
1
2
3
.
.
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
. . . . . . . . . . . . …. . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . …. . . . . .  
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 …1 2 3 4 5 6  
69  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dot Patterns  
This chart shows the dot patterns for the ASCII characters needed to  
cover all dot/void combinations. Characters from 20H to 3FH provide  
the same patterns as characters 60H through 7FH. Characters from  
00H through 1FH, which are not recognized as line terminators or  
plot mode codes, are ignored.  
Character  
Value  
Dots  
Character  
Value  
Dots  
000000  
X00000  
0X0000  
XX0000  
00X000  
X0X000  
0XX000  
XXX000  
000X00  
X00X00  
0X0X00  
XX0X00  
00XX00  
X0XX00  
0XXX00  
XXXX00  
0000X0  
X000X0  
0X00X0  
XX00X0  
00X0X0  
X0X0X0  
0XX0X0  
XXX0X0  
000XX0  
X00XX0  
0X0XX0  
XX0XX0  
00XXX0  
X0XXX0  
0XXXX0  
XXXXX0  
00000X  
X0000X  
0X000X  
XX000X  
00X00X  
X0X00X  
0XX00X  
XXX00X  
000X0X  
X00X0X  
0X0X0X  
XX0X0X  
00XX0X  
X0XX0X  
0XXX0X  
XXXX0X  
0000XX  
X000XX  
0X00XX  
XX00XX  
00X0XX  
X0X0XX  
0XX0XX  
XXX0XX  
000XXX  
X00XXX  
0X0XXX  
XX0XXX  
00XXXX  
X0XXXX  
0XXXXX  
XXXXXX  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
40H  
41H  
42H  
43H  
44H  
45H  
46H  
47H  
48H  
49H  
4AH  
4BH  
4CH  
4DH  
4EH  
4FH  
50H  
51H  
52H  
53H  
54H  
55H  
56H  
57H  
58H  
59H  
5AH  
5BH  
5CH  
5DH  
5EH  
5FH  
a
b
c
d
e
f
60H  
61H  
62H  
63H  
64H  
65H  
66H  
67H  
68H  
69H  
6AH  
6BH  
6CH  
6DH  
6EH  
6FH  
70H  
71H  
72H  
73H  
74H  
75H  
76H  
77H  
78H  
79H  
7AH  
7BH  
7CH  
7DH  
7EH  
3FH  
g
h
i
J
j
K
L
k
l
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
\
|
}
]
^
~
?
_
70  
Chapter 3. Printronix P300/P600 Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each line to be printed as graphics must have one of the three  
graphic control codes (ENQ, EOT, DLE) in the line of data. The ENQ  
and EOT codes can be placed anywhere in the line of data. When  
used, the DLE code must always be placed after the ENQ code.  
The following densities are available using the formats shown:  
Density  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
72  
Line Format Required  
ENQ, data, LF terminator  
EOT, data, CR terminator  
ENQ, data, LF terminator  
ENQ, DLE, data, LF terminator  
EOT, data, CR terminator  
ENQ, DLE, data, LF terminator  
60  
120  
72  
60  
120  
144  
144  
The dot pattern for a particular character is the same regardless of  
density. The density difference is a shift to the right by 1/120 inch for  
high density.  
Normal-Density Graphics  
At 60 dpi horizontal density, one line of characters is used for each  
dot row. The normal density plot mode character (ENQ) can appear  
anywhere in the line. The line must be terminated with an LF. At the  
end of graphics printing, send an empty data line containing only an  
LF.  
High-Density Graphics  
At 120 dpi horizontal density, each dot row requires two lines of  
characters. The first line contains the high density plot mode code  
(EOT) and must be terminated with a CR.  
IMPORTANT  
The DEFINE CR setting in the printer control setup menu  
must be set to CR=CR.  
The second line contains the normal density plot mode code (ENQ)  
and must be terminated with an LF.  
At the end of graphics printing, send an empty data line containing  
only an LF for proper termination.  
P300/600 8-Bit Horizontal Graphics  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
72  
Syntax  
60  
120  
60  
<ESC>"1<count><data><LF>  
<ESC>"2<count><data><LF>  
<ESC>"1<count><data><DLE><LF>  
<ESC>"2<count><data><DLE><LF>  
72  
144  
144  
120  
71  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P300/600 ELECTRONIC VERTICAL FORMAT UNIT  
The electronic vertical format unit (EVFU) is used to download  
vertical tabs to the printer. It allows jumps to preselected lines on the  
form through vertical moves of the paper.  
The maximum form length is 22 inches (176 lines at 8 lpi).  
Using the EVFU  
Using the EVFU is a two-step process. The first step is to load the  
channel control table with codes for the form being used. One byte  
must be loaded for each line of the form. A channel code can be  
inserted in the byte to indicate a stop (or vertical tab location).  
The second step is to send a channel command to jump to a specified  
channel (location on the paper).  
On the following pages are charts and sample programs showing the  
codes for loading the EVFU table and selecting channels for paper  
moves.  
Points to Remember  
When a table is downloaded, VFU will be displayed.  
The vertical format type must be set to Emulation VFU through  
Setup | Vertical Format | Type  
menu option.  
the control panel using the  
Select |Emulation VFU  
GenPtrOpts | Group 2  
strap to enable received  
select/deselect must be set to OUT.  
The  
Printer option 3 (see Table 11 in Appendix D, Printronix 300/600  
Emulation Options) must be enabled to enable EVFU loading. If  
option 3 is not enabled when a start load RS code is received, the  
table will not be loaded and all control characters received before  
the end load US code will be interpreted as data.  
When using serial interface with the PI lead enabled, the interface  
settings menu must have the serial options set to  
bit.  
PI Lead Use 8-  
Send the EVFU table at the start of a line to prevent a loss of data.  
These charts contain the channel commands to load the EVFU table  
and for selecting a channel for vertical moves.  
72  
Chapter 3. Printronix P300/P600 Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PI Lead Codes – Use with Serial Interface  
The PI lead is not used in the parallel interface. To use the PI lead  
with the serial interface, 8-bit codes must be sent.  
Channel  
number  
Data Lines  
or Command  
Decimal  
Number  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
238  
PI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Channel  
ASCII  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1 TOF  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12 VT  
13  
14  
NUL  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
none  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
VT  
FF  
CR  
none  
none  
Start Load  
End Load  
1
1
239  
Codes Not Using the PI Lead  
Channel  
number  
Data Lines  
or Command  
Decimal  
Number  
16  
PI  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Channel  
ASCII  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1 TOF  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12 VT  
13  
14  
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
GS  
RS  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
Start Load  
End Load  
US  
73  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example EVFU Loading Program  
Using standard CENTRONICS parallel interface with 36-pin  
connector and P Series protocol.  
Using the channel code chart without the PI lead.  
This program loads the EVFU table with channel stops at lines 6,  
25, 57, and 66.  
Set the printer as follows:  
GenPtrOpts | Group 2 | Strap 8  
OUT to deactivate coded  
SELECT/DESELECT operation.  
Set up vertical format emulation (VFU)  
PROGRAM INSTRUCTION  
REMARKS  
Required by some BASIC languages to  
avoid auto LF at column 80  
1500 WIDTH "LPT1:". 255  
1510 LPRINT CHR$(30);  
1520 LPRINT CHR$(16);  
1530 FOR I-1 to 4  
1531 LPRINT CHR$(17);  
1532 NEXT 1  
1540 LPRINT CHR$(18);  
1550 FOR 1=1 to 18  
1551 LPRINT CHR$(17);  
1552 NEXT I  
1560 LPRINT CHR$(19);  
1570 FOR 1=1 to 31  
1571 LPRINT CHR$(17);  
1572 NEXT I  
Selects SL channel.  
Selects TOF. Channel 1 1530 FOR 1=1 to 4  
Selects Channel 2 for 4 filler lines  
Selects Channel 3 (for line 6 printing)  
Selects Channel 2 for 18 filler lines  
Selects Channel 4 (for line 25 printing)  
Selects Channel 2 for 31 filler lines  
Selects Channel 5 (for line 57 printing)  
Selects Channel 2 for 8 filler lines  
1580 LPRINT CHR$(20);  
1590 FOR 1=1 to 8  
1591 LPRINT CHR$(17);  
1592 NEXT I  
1600 LPRINT CHR$(21);  
1610 LPRINT CHR$(31);  
1620 END  
Selects Channel 6 (for line 66 printing)  
Selects EL Channel  
A start load RS code immediately followed by a stop load US code will  
clear the EVFU table. The BASIC code to do this follows  
10 LPRINT CHR$(30);  
20 LPRINT CHR$(31);  
74  
Chapter 3. Printronix P300/P600 Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example Form Printout  
This example uses the VFU table created in the previous example.  
NOTE  
Establish top of form locally before printing. When running  
the program, paper will slew to the top of the next form  
before printing begins.  
Sample Program to Print Form  
The following sample program uses the EVFU program from the prior  
example.  
Program Instruction  
10 WIDTH “LPT1:”;255  
Remarks  
Required by some BASIC  
languages to avoid auto LF  
Go to Top of Form (Channel  
1)  
20 LPRINT CHR$(16);  
25 LPRINT “TOP OF FORM”;  
30 LPRINT CHR$(18);  
Print the indicated words  
Go to Channel 3  
35 LPRINT “TOP MARGIN, LINE 6”;  
40 LPRINT CHR$(19);  
Print the indicated words  
Go to Channel 4  
45 LPRINT “LINE 25”;  
50 LPRINT CHR$(20);  
Print the indicated words  
Go to Channel 5  
55 LPRINT “BOTTOM MARGIN, LINE 57”; Print the indicated words  
60 LPRINT CHR$(21);  
65 LPRINT “END OF FORM”;  
70 END  
Go to Channel 6  
Print the indicated words  
75  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 4. PRINTRONIX P-SERIES EMULATION  
SPECIAL FUNCTION CONTROL CHARACTER (SFCC)  
When a printer control code consists of more than one character, it is  
Special  
as the first character of a  
called a command or escape sequence. This emulation uses a  
Function Control Character (SFCC)  
command sequence. The SFCC alerts the printer that a command  
sequence—not printable characters follows.  
In this P-Series emulation mode, you may choose 0 to 127 to be  
the SFCC via the Emulation Settings of the Set Up Menu.  
The general format for a command sequence in the P-Series  
emulation is:  
SFCC (parameter 1 ..... parameter n) (terminator)  
Command Line  
In the P-Series emulation mode, print format, font, or international  
language selection can also be controlled by a longer sequence known  
as a Command Line. Command Lines are string type commands  
placed between complete lines of text and affecting the text that  
follows. The P-Series Emulation has six Command Lines: PMODE,  
OSET, PSET, LPI, LINES, and INCHES. Each of these Command  
Lines is discussed in this chapter under the appropriate Control Code  
function.  
For example, you can set the form length in inches by using the  
following command line:  
SFCC INCHES ; n f  
where n is the whole number of inches and f is the fractional  
increment in 0.5 inch increments.  
When using the SFCC in a Command Line, it must be the first  
non-blank symbol in the line (space, hex 20, is a blank symbol).  
In addition, characters following spaces (other than a valid line  
terminator) in a Command Line are ignored so that user comments  
can be included on the Command Line. The valid line terminators are  
Form Feed (FF), Line Feed (LF), and Carriage Return (CR); however,  
not  
when used in the Command Line, these line terminators do  
any paper motion.  
cause  
76  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set and Reset Codes  
Some print attributes are set and reset (turned ON and OFF) by using  
an SFCC command sequence and the numbers one(1) or zero(0).  
These numbers may be in the form of hexadecimal code 01H and  
00H, or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0  
(hexadecimal code 31 and 30).  
77  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND INDEX  
Command  
Vertical Motion  
Format  
Page  
Form Feed  
<FF>  
81  
93  
93  
81  
94  
Forms Length Set (Inches)  
Forms Length Set (Lines)  
Line Feed  
<SFCC> INCHES  
<SFCC> LINES  
<LF>  
Line Spacing 1/6 Inch (6 lpi)  
<SFCC> 2  
<SFCC> LPI  
<SFCC> 0  
<SFCC> LPI  
<ACK>  
<SFCC> f  
<SFCC> l  
Line Spacing 1/8 Inch (8 lpi)  
Line Spacing 8 or 10.3 LPI (1 line only)  
Line Spacing 7/72 Inch  
95  
95  
96  
96  
Line Spacing n/72 Inch  
(used with SFCC 2)  
Vertical Tab  
<SFCC> A  
<VT>  
97  
Horizontal Motion  
Backspace  
<BS>  
<CR>  
80  
80  
Carriage Return  
Print Attributes  
Bold Print  
<SFCC> G  
<SFCC> H  
<SFCC> E  
<SFCC> F  
<SFCC> _  
<SFCC> -  
84  
85  
85  
86  
90  
91  
Bold Print Off  
Emphasized Print  
Emphasized Print Off  
Overscoring  
Underline  
Printer Control  
Bell  
<BEL>  
80  
92  
Emulation Reset  
<SFCC> @  
Font Control  
Download New Character Shape  
(not supported)  
Double Wide (Elongated) Characters  
(1 line only)  
<SFCC> h  
<BS>  
86  
Expanded (Double Wide) Print  
<SFCC> W 1  
85  
86  
Expanded (Double Wide) Print Reset  
<SFCC> W 0  
<DC4>  
continued  
78  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font Control (continued)  
Font Selection  
<SFCC> X  
89  
<SFCC PMODE  
Superscript/Subscript Printing  
<SFCC> S  
90  
90  
Superscript/Subscript Printing Reset  
<SFCC> T  
Plot Mode Graphics  
Plot, Even Dot (High Horizontal Density)  
Plot, Odd Dot (Normal Density)  
<EOT>  
103  
103  
<SFCC> d  
<ENQ>  
Plot, High Vertical Density (1/144)  
<DLE>  
102  
103  
Plot, Single Line (High Horizontal Density)  
<NAK>  
Character Set Control  
Character Set Select  
<SFCC> 1  
82  
84  
Character Set Select: ECMA Extended  
Character Set Select: Int’l Languages  
Character Set Select: Substitution Table  
Execute Control Codes  
(Not supported)  
<SFCC> PSET or <SFCC> R  
(Not supported)  
<SFCC> 7  
92  
92  
Print Control Codes  
<SFCC> 6  
Download a Language  
(Not supported)  
Extended Character Set  
<SO>  
87  
<SFCC> <SO>  
<SFCC> n  
<SFCC> 4  
<SI>  
Extended Character Set Cancel  
88  
<SFCC> <SI>  
<SFCC> o  
<SFCC> 5  
79  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL CODES  
Backspace  
Backspace <BS>  
: Moves the logical print position to the left one  
character space toward the first character column. When configured  
from the control panel for backspace, BS moves the character  
position one character space to the left at the current character pitch  
setting. This code is ignored if the logical print position is at the first  
character column.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
8
08H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(8);  
Indeterminate Conditions  
This code can also be configured form the control panel to print  
double-high characters instead of a backspace.  
Bell  
Bell <Bel>:  
The printer's audible alarm will sound for 1/2 second  
when the bell code is received by the printer.  
Format  
<Bel>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
7
07H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(7);  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Bell code cannot be disabled.  
Carriage Return  
Carriage Return <CR>:  
Returns the logical print position to the first  
character column. The CR code may or may not cause printing or  
paper motion, depending on the CR CODE configuration parameter  
value.  
Format  
<CR>  
Decimal:  
Hex  
BASIC:  
13  
0DH  
CHR$(13);  
:
If the CR CODE option menu is set for CR=CR, the characters  
following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line.  
If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line,  
those characters are printed in double strike print when the  
Overstrike mode is enabled from the control panel.  
The CR=CR configuration causes subsequent printable data to  
overprint previous data at half speed if Overstrike is enabled from the  
control panel (and prints somewhat faster if Overstrike is disabled),  
unless an intervening paper motion command is received.  
If the CR CODE is configured for:  
CR=CR+LF  
Control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line  
feed function.  
80  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form Feed  
Form Feed <FF>:  
Prints the data in the buffer, advances the paper  
position to the next top-of-form and moves the character position to  
the first character column. The FF code cancels all single-line only  
print attributes.  
Format  
<FF>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
12  
0CH  
CHR$(12);  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Forms length can be modified by using the control panel or forms  
length control codes.  
The Form Feed command may reacts differently if a VFU is active  
(refer to VFU section).  
Line Feed  
Line Feed <LF>:  
Prints the data in the buffer (if any) and advances  
the vertical character position one line at the current line space  
setting and moves the logical print position to the left margin.  
The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double  
high (elongated) and double wide (expanded) characters.  
In the Even Dot Graphics Plot mode (high density graphics), the LF  
code does not cause paper position motion; the data in the buffer is  
plotted and the logical print position is set at character column 1 in  
anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density  
graphic plotting. In the Odd Dot Graphics Plot mode (normal density  
graphics), the LF code plots the data in the buffer, advances the  
paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density,  
and positions the logical print position at character column 1.  
Format  
<LF>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
12  
0AH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(12);  
81  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHARACTER SETS, FONT HANDLING AND ENHANCEMENTS  
Character Set  
Select  
Selects the character set, extended character set, and the  
international language for a specific character set.  
Format  
<SFCC> l xyz  
x:  
y:  
z:  
character set  
international language for the selected character set table  
extended character set for the selected character set  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 108 x y z  
<SFCC> 6C xH yH zH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(108);”xyz”;  
Character Set Select (x)  
(x)  
Character Set  
0(30)  
1(31)  
2(32)  
3(33)  
(2A)  
Code Page 437  
Code Page 8859-1  
Invalid (Defaults to Code Page 437)  
Code Page 8574  
Unchanged  
International Language Select (y)  
x 0(30)  
1(31)  
2(32)  
3(33)  
y
CP 437  
ASCII (USA)  
French  
German  
English  
Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
CP 8859-1  
ASCII (USA)  
EBCDIC  
CP 8574  
ASCII (USA)  
French  
German  
English  
Norw/Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
Spanish  
Japanese  
Fr. Canadian  
Dutch  
0(30)  
1(31)  
2(32)  
3(33)  
4(34)  
5(35)  
6(36)  
7(37)  
8(38)  
9(39)  
10(3A)  
11(3B)  
12(3C)  
13(3D)  
14(3E)  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
Spanish  
Japanese  
Fr. Canadian  
Latin Amer  
Norwegian  
Danish II  
Spanish II  
Latin AM II  
Finnish  
Swiss  
82  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Set  
Select  
(continued)  
Extended Character Set Select (z)  
x 0(30)  
IBM PC  
CP 8501  
z
1(31)  
NA  
2(32)  
NA  
3(33)  
NA  
0(30)  
1(31)  
2(32)  
3(33)  
4(34)  
5(35)  
6(36)  
7(37)  
8(38)  
9(39)  
10(3A)  
11(3B)  
12(3C)  
1Valid only if x = 0. All other values of z are ignored including ‘*’  
Indeterminate conditions  
If the (*) character is the value selected for x, the character set does  
not change. If (*) or (X) is selected for y, the previously selected  
international language is used.  
Notes  
This command implementation is different than the target printer  
due to limitations in Font character sets. Refer to the “Emulation  
Differences” section of this document.  
83  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select International  
Character Set  
Selects the international character using the parameter (where the  
parameter is one of the values in the table below).The ultimate  
character set selected is a function of the parameter and the  
currently-active code page.  
Format  
<SFCC> P S E T ; n or <SFCC> R n  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
<SFCC> 80 83 69 84 59 n  
<SFCC> 50 53 45 54 3B nH  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”PSET;”;CHR$(n);  
International Character Set  
n
Character Set Select  
CP 8859-1  
PSET  
CP 437  
CP 8574  
ASCII (USA)  
French  
0
1
ASCII (USA)  
French  
ASCII (USA)  
EBCDIC  
2
3
German  
English  
German  
English  
4
5
6
Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
Nor./Danish  
Swedish  
Italian  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Spanish  
Japanese  
F. Canadian  
Latin Am.  
Finnish  
Swiss  
Spanish  
Japanese  
F. Canadian  
Dutch  
Finnish  
Swiss  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Selecting SFCC RX accesses the substitution table for the current  
character set.  
Notes  
This command implementation is different than the target printer  
due to limitations in Font character sets. Refer to the “Emulation  
Differences” section of this chapter.  
Bold Print ON  
Selects Bold Print mode. All characters are printed twice using direct  
overprint (striking each dot twice) until reset by the Bold Print off  
code or a printer reset. When SFCC j is used, Bold Print printing is  
selected for one line only; it is reset by the Bold Print off control code,  
emulation reset, or a paper motion command.  
Format  
<SFCC> G  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 71  
Hex  
:
<SFCC> 47  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”G”  
84  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bold Print OFF  
Deselects Bold Print mode.  
Format  
<SFCC> H  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 72  
<SFCC> 48  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”H”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
This sequence resets Bold Print printing only. Other attributes  
( double wide, etc) remain active.  
Single Line  
Double High  
Selects elongated (double high) character printing for one line only.  
Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard  
width. The elongated character control code is a line-by-line print  
attribute; when the control code is received, one entire line of  
elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset at the  
end of the line.  
Format  
<SFCC> h  
Primary command format  
<BS> Selects Double High when the Double High print option is  
selected from the control panel.  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 104 or  
8
Hex  
:
<SFCC> 68 or  
08H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”h”; or  
CHR$(8);  
Indeterminate Conditions  
When configured for double high print from the control panel menu,  
the control code BS (Hex 08) also selects elongated character printing  
for a single line.  
Emphasized Print  
ON  
Selects Emphasized Print mode. Emphasized print, also called  
"shadow" printing, consists of printing each letter twice, the second  
printing horizontally offset (1/240th inch) from the first. Emphasized  
print is turned off by the emphasized print reset control code or  
emulation reset.  
Format  
<SFCC> E  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 69  
<SFCC> 45  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”E”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing,  
and when 15-20 cpi characters are selected.  
85  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emphasized Print  
OFF  
Deselects Emphasized Character print mode.  
Format  
<SFCC> F  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 70  
<SFCC> 46  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”F”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
This sequence resets Emphasized printing only. Other attributes  
(bold, double wide, etc) remain active.  
Double Wide Print  
Double Wide Print (continuous): Selects or resets expanded (double  
wide) print.  
Format  
<SFCC> W n)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
<SFCC> 87 n  
<SFCC> 57 nH  
CHR$(<SFCC>);n  
n = 1 selects expanded print (hex 01 or hex 31)  
n = 0 resets expanded print (hex 00 or hex 30)  
When expanded print using SFCC W is received, all characters print  
double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code,  
printer reset.  
Single Line  
Double Wide Print  
Double Wide Print (single line):  
Selects expanded (double wide)  
print for one line only. This expanded print control code is a line-by-  
line print attribute. When the SFCC k control code is received, the  
current line is printed double wide and then automatically reset at  
the end of the line.  
Format  
<SFCC> k  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 107  
<SFCC> 6B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”k”;  
This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code (LF,  
VT, CR, etc.), SFCC @ (printer reset), CAN or SFCC W  
(double wide print).  
86  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Extended Character  
Set Select  
Extended Character Set Access: Accesses the extended character  
set in the range ADH to FFH hex using codes 20H to 7FH.  
Used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1. For example,  
sending code 20 hex accesses the symbol at code point A0H. If a  
printable symbol is not available at the code point, a space is printed.  
Format  
<SO> or <SFCC> <parameter>  
<SO>  
<SFCC> <SO>  
<SFCC> n  
<SFCC> 4  
Decimal:  
14  
<SFCC> 14  
<SFCC> 110  
<SFCC> 4  
Hex:  
0EH  
<SFCC> 0E  
<SFCC> 6E  
<SFCC> 34  
BASIC:  
CHR$(14);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(14);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”n”;  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”4”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
<SFCC> 4 is not canceled by the next paper motion command; 0E,  
<SFCC> 0E, <SFCC> 6E are canceled by paper motion.  
87  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Extended Character Extended Character Set Cancel:  
Cancels the extended character set  
as selected by SO, SFCC SO, SFCC n, SFCC 4, and selects the  
primary Character Set.  
Set Cancel  
Used in 7-bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1. For example,  
sending code 20 hex accesses the symbol at code point 0A0H hex. If a  
printable symbol is not available at the code point, a space is printed.  
Format  
<SI> or <SFCC> <parameter>  
<SI>  
<SFCC> <SI>  
<SFCC> o  
<SFCC> 5  
Decimal:  
15  
<SFCC> 15  
<SFCC> 111  
<SFCC> 5  
Hex:  
0FH  
<SFCC> 0FH  
<SFCC> 6FH  
<SFCC> 35H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(15);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(15);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(111);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(5);  
88  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font Select  
Font Selection:  
Selects a font (DP, NLQ, or OCR) and character pitch  
in characters per inch (cpi).  
Format  
<SFCC> X <m> <n> or  
<SFCC> P M O D E ; n  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 88 <m> <n>  
<SFCC> 80 77 79 68 69 3B <n>  
<SFCC> 58 (parm 1, parm 2)  
<SFCC> 50 4D 4F 44 45 3B <nH>  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”X”;CHR$(<m>);CHR$(<n>);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”PMODE;<n>”;  
BASIC:  
<SFCC> X <m> <n> Format  
m = font code  
n = pitch code (cpi)  
m (hex)  
FONT  
n (hex)  
0(30)  
0(30)  
DP  
1(31)  
NLQ  
2(32)  
DP  
Characters Per Inch  
10  
12  
3(33)  
DP  
4(34)  
DP  
5(35)  
OCR-A  
6(36)  
OCR-B  
10  
12  
10  
12  
10  
12  
10  
12  
10  
-
10  
-
1(31)  
2(32)  
3(33)  
13.3  
15  
13.3  
15  
13.3  
15  
13.3  
15  
13.3  
15  
-
-
-
-
4(34)  
17.1  
17.1  
17.1  
17.1  
17.1  
-
-
<SFCC> PMODE;n Format  
n ranges from 0 to 6 to select the font and pitch combination. All  
other values are invalid.  
n = pitch code (cpi)  
An asterisk (*) (hex 2A) may be substituted for m or n. Whenever the  
asterisk replaces m or n, its current value does not change. Values  
other than those shown in the table below are ignored.  
PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and selects font and  
pitch according to the following table.  
‘n’  
0
1
2
3
Font and Pitch  
Data Processing 10 CPI  
Data Processing 12 CPI  
Data Processing 15 CPI  
NLQ 10 CPI  
4
5
Data Processing 10 CPI  
OCR-A 10 CPI  
6
OCR-B 10 CPI  
Notes  
This command implementation is different than the target printer  
due to limitations in Font character sets. Refer to the “Emulation  
Differences” section of this chapter.  
89  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overscoring  
Overscoring:  
Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all  
characters.  
Format  
<SFCC> _ <n>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
<SFCC> 95 <n>  
<SFCC> 5F <nH>  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”_<n>”;  
n = 0 disables automatic overscoring (hex 00 or hex 30)  
n = 1 enables automatic overscoring (hex 01 or hex 31)  
When automatic overscore is enabled, all characters, including  
spaces, are overscored until the feature is disabled.  
Super/Subscript  
Superscript or Subscript:  
Format  
Selects superscript or subscript printing.  
<SFCC> S <n>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 83 <n>  
<SFCC> 53 <nH>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”S<n>”;  
n = 0  
n = 1  
enables superscript printing (hex 00 or hex 30)  
enables subscript printing (hex 01 or hex 31)  
Details  
When the super/subscript control code is received, all characters  
print as superscript or subscript until reset by the super/subscript  
reset control code or printer reset. Emphasized print is ignored if  
super/subscript printing is active.  
When the BS feature is enabled from the control panel menu, both  
superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the same  
character column using the Backspace (BS) control code.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Overlapping lines may occur when combining Superscript or  
Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Double High or  
with small line spacing.  
Super/Subscript  
Reset  
Superscript or Subscript Reset:  
printing.  
Deselects superscript or subscript  
Format  
<SFCC> T  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 84  
<SFCC> 54  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”T”;  
90  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Underline  
Character Underlining:  
Enables or disables automatic underlining of  
all characters.  
Format  
<SFCC> - <n>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 45 <n>  
<SFCC> 2D <nH>  
BASIC:  
<CHR$(<SFCC>);”-<n>”;  
n = 0  
n = 1  
disables automatic underlining (hex 00 or hex 30)  
enables automatic underlining (hex 01 or hex 31)  
Details  
When automatic underline is enabled, all characters, including  
spaces, are underlined until the feature is disabled.  
91  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOUSEKEEPING COMMANDS  
Print Control Codes  
Forces the hex codes 80H to 9FH to become printable symbols in the  
currently selected character set. Cancels the executable control code  
operation activated by the SFCC 7.  
Format  
<SFCC> 6  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 6  
Hex  
BASIC:  
:
<SFCC> 36  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”6”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
This feature can also be selected from the control panel.  
Execute Control  
Codes  
Forces the hex codes 80H to 9FH to execute as control codes.  
Cancels the printable control code operation activated by the SFCC 6.  
Format  
<SFCC> 7  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 7  
<SFCC> 37  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”7”;  
Indeterminate Conditions  
This feature is also selectable by control panel operations.  
Emulation Reset  
Initializes all printing parameters to values previously saved. When  
reset to the previously saved values, the current line is set to the top-  
of-form position. Font, line spacing, international language selection,  
margins, form length, skip-over perforation, and character pitch are  
reset to previously saved values. Character-by-character and line-by-  
line attributes are canceled. The vertical format unit is cleared.  
Format  
<SFCC> @  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 64  
<SFCC> 40  
Hex  
:
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”@”;  
92  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Forms Length  
In Inches  
)
Set Form Length (Inches  
Format  
<SFCC> I N C H E S ; <n> ; <f>  
Decimal: <SFCC> 73 77 67 72 69 83 59 <n> 59 <f>  
Hex  
BASIC:  
:
<SFCC> 49 4E 43 48 45 53 3B <nH> 3B <fH>  
CHR$(<SFCC>):”INCHES<n>;<f>”;  
n = a whole number from 1 to 22 specifying the number of inches on  
a page.  
f = a fractional number in 0.5 inch increments (minimum forms  
length is 0.5 inches).  
Details  
When this command is received, the current position becomes the  
first line of the form and the form length value becomes the new  
form length. Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form  
are cleared.  
NOTE  
Form length is defined in inches, therefore subsequent line  
spacing changes do not affect the results of this command.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Form length can also be set from the control panel menu. If a VFU is  
.
enabled and loaded, this command is ignored  
Set Form Length  
In Lines  
The form length is set to the number of  
lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that  
the units are in inches.  
Form length can also be set from the control panel menu.  
Format  
<SFCC> L I N E S ; <n>  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 76 73 78 69 83 59 <n>  
<SFCC> 4C 49 4E 45 53 3B <nH>  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”LINES;<n>”;  
Hex  
:
BASIC:  
n = 1 to 192 to specify the number of lines per page at the current  
spacing.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If a VFU is enabled and loaded, this command is ignored.  
93  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Line Spacing  
(1/6 Inch)  
Sets line spacing to 6 lpi or as set by  
SFCC A.  
Formats  
<SFCC> L P I ; n  
or  
<SFCC> A n  
<SFCC> 2  
followed by  
Details  
Using the SFCC LPI ; n command, the value of n can be 6 or 8 only.  
If n = 6, this command sets line spacing to 1/6 inch. Values of n  
other than 6 or 8 are ignored.  
The SFCC command stores a line spacing value in 1/72 inch to be  
activated by the SFCC 2 sequence. The default value for this stored  
value is 6 LPI (12/72).  
SFCC 2 asserts n/72-inch line spacing as set by SFCC A. If no  
distance has been set by SFCC A, the distance is 1/6 inch.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 76 80 73 59 <n>  
or  
<SFCC> 65 <n>  
<SFCC> 2  
followed by  
<SFCC> 4C 50 49 59 <nH> or  
<SFCC> 41 <nH>  
<SFCC> 2  
followed by  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”LPI;<n>”;  
or  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”A<n>”;  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”2”;  
followed by  
94  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Line Spacing  
(1/8 Inch)  
There are two formats for this  
command.  
The SFCC 0 command specifies continuous line spacing at 1/8-inch  
increments (8 lpi).  
In the SFCC LPI ; n command, the value of n can be 6 or 8 only. If n  
= 8, this command sets line spacing to 1/8 inch. Values of n other  
than 6 or 8 are ignored.  
Formats  
<SFCC> 0  
or  
<SFCC> L P I ; <n>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 0  
<SFCC> 76 80 73 59 <n>  
or  
<SFCC> 30 or  
<SFCC> 4C 50 49 3B <nH>  
BASIC:  
Details  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”0”; or  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”LPI;<n>”;  
When the 1/8-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines  
print at 8 lpi until a new line spacing is selected or power is reset.  
The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel  
line spacing setting.  
Single Line Spacing  
Selects line spacing of 8 or 10.3 lpi for the current line only.  
Formats  
<ACK>  
or  
<SFCC> f  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
6
or  
or  
or  
<SFCC> 102  
06  
<SFCC> 66  
BASIC:  
Details  
CHR$(6);  
CHR$(<SFCC>);CHR$(6);  
The default line spacing is reselected automatically after the current  
line terminates.  
If the alternate line spacing selected from the control panel is 8 lpi,  
the ACK control code sets the line spacing to 8 lpi. If 10.3 lpi was  
selected from the control panel, the ACK control code sets the line  
spacing to 10.3 lpi (7/72 inch).  
95  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Line Spacing  
7/72 Inch  
Specifies the line spacing at 7/72-inch  
(10.3 lpi) increments.  
Format  
<SFCC> 1  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 1  
<SFCC> 31  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”1”;  
Details  
When the 7/72-inch line spacing control code is received, all lines  
print at the 7/72-inch line spacing until a new line spacing is  
selected or power is reset.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Overlapping lines may occur when combining this control code with  
other print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript,  
or Subscript;  
Set Line Spacing  
n/72 Inch  
Stores a line spacing of n/72-inch  
increments.  
Format  
<SFCC> A <n>  
<SFCC> 2  
followed by  
<SFCC> 65 <n>  
Decimal:  
followed by  
followed by  
followed by  
<SFCC> 2  
Hex:  
<SFCC> 41 <nH>  
<SFCC> 2  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”A<n>”;  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”2”;  
n = 1 to 24 (all others are ignored)  
Details  
When the SFCC A control sequence is received, all line feed  
commands following an SFCC 2 sequences are at n/72-inch line  
spacing until a new line spacing is selected or power is reset.  
The SFCC 2 sequence asserts the line spacing that was stored by the  
preceding SFCC A sequence.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Small values of n may result in overlapping lines. Overlapping lines  
may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated (Double High),  
Superscript, or Subscript characters are used on the same line.  
Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities will not overlap.  
96  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Line Spacing  
n/216 Inch  
Specifies the line spacing at n/216  
inch increments.  
Format  
<SFCC> 3 <n>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
<SFCC> 3 <n>  
<SFCC> 33 <nH>  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”3<n>”  
n = 1 to 255  
When the n/216 inch line spacing control code is received, all line  
feeds following are at n/216 inch line spacing until a new line  
spacing is selected or power is reset.  
The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current  
dot row spacing. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of  
the current dot row spacing, the remainder is added to the next paper  
motion command.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Caution should be used when combining this control code with other  
print attributes such as Elongated (Double High), Superscript, or  
Subscript; overlapping lines may occur.  
Vertical Tab Vertical Tab <VT>:  
Prints the data in the buffer and  
advances the paper to the next vertical tab position.  
Format  
<VT>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
11  
0B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(11);  
Details  
If a vertical tab format is defined in the EVFU (channel 12) and the  
VFU is enabled, the paper is moved to the next vertical tab position.  
If a vertical tab format is not defined, the paper is advanced to the  
next line at the current line spacing.  
97  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLOT MODE GRAPHICS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION  
Plot Density  
Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) printed in a  
single dot row. Two types of plot density are available in this  
emulation:  
Normal density plot mode  
Double density plot mode  
Normal Density Plot Mode  
odd  
dot plot control code ENQ (05 hex) or the  
Selected using the  
“SFCC e” control sequence.  
The odd-numbered dot columns (120 DPI grid) are addressed to  
produce a horizontal density of 60 DPI.  
Double Density Plot Mode  
even  
dot plot control code EOT (04 hex), or the  
Selected using the  
“<SFCC> d” control sequence. The even dot mode must be used in  
conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ (05 hex) or  
“<SFCC> e” sequence.  
The even dots are sent first, followed by the odd dots, allowing a  
maximum of 1632 dots in a single dot row at 120 dpi (13.6 inch  
line).  
The vertical density remains the same as in normal density  
plotting.  
Plot Mode Format  
Each data byte specifies six possible dot columns.  
Using odd dot plot, bits 1 to 6 of the data byte address the odd-  
numbered dot columns; using even dot plot, bits 1 to 6 of the  
data byte address the even-numbered dot columns.  
Bit 6 and/or bit 7 of the data byte must be a 1 (true) bit in the  
Plot mode.  
Bit 8 of the data byte is ignored in Plot Mode; it can be either 1 or  
0.  
The binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known in  
order to accurately address specific dot positions.  
98  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Plot Data Line Format  
1. The plot mode control code: either 05 hex (or “SFCC e”) for normal  
density, or 04 hex (or “SFCC d”) combined with 05 hex for double  
density plotting.  
2. The data bytes to be plotted.  
3. The line terminator 0A hex or 0C hex.  
With print width set to 13.6 inches, a plot data line may contain any  
number of bytes up to a maximum of 136 for horizontal dot density of  
60 dpi or 272 bytes for a horizontal density of 120 dpi.  
A plot data line may contain any number of data bytes up to the  
maximum. If automatic line feed is disabled from the control panel  
menu, any bytes over the maximum are lost (graphic character will  
not wrap at the right margin). If the maximum is exceeded and  
automatic line feed is enabled, a line feed (LF) is forced and the  
remaining plot data are printed as text on the next line (graphic  
characters will wrap in this case).  
The plot mode command may occur anywhere in the line, but plot  
speed may decrease if it is not at the beginning of the line.  
Normal Density Plot Mode Format  
1. Send the plot command code ENQ (05 hex) or the control  
sequence “SFCC e”.  
2. Send the plot data.  
3. End with a line terminator, either a LF (0A hex) or a FF (0C hex).  
A CR (if CR = CR + LF has been configured from the control panel  
menu) may also be used instead of the LF code.  
4. A line feed (0A hex) used as the line terminator causes the  
contents of the buffer to be plotted and the paper advances a  
single dot row at the vertical density of the current mode.  
5. A form feed (0C) hex used as the line terminator causes the  
contents of the buffer to be plotted and the paper to advance to  
the top of the next form.  
99  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Double Density Plot Mode Format  
1. Send the even dot plot control code EOT (04 hex) or control  
sequence “SFCC d”, followed by a line of data.  
2. Send a line terminator, which causes the printer to plot the  
not  
contents of the buffer. The paper does  
advance in double  
density plot; the printer now waits for the second line of data.  
3. Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ (05 hex) or control  
sequence “SFCC e” and a second line of data, followed by a line  
terminator.  
A line feed (0A hex) used as the line terminator causes the  
contents of the buffer to be plotted and the paper advances a  
based on the vertical density of the current  
mode. A CR (if CR = CR + LF is configured) may also be used  
with the same result.  
single dot row,  
A form feed (0C) hex used as the line terminator causes the  
contents of the buffer to be plotted and the paper to advance  
to the top of the next form.  
100  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Plot Mode Graphic Character Chart  
Hex  
Value  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
2F  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3B  
3C  
3D  
3E  
3F  
Hex  
Hex  
Char Value  
Char  
space  
Dots  
Char  
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
Value  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4D  
4E  
4F  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
5A  
5B  
5C  
5D  
Dots  
Dots  
oooooo  
xooooo  
oxoooo  
xxoooo  
ooxooo  
xoxooo  
oxxooo  
xxxooo  
oooxoo  
xooxoo  
oxoxoo  
xxoxoo  
ooxxoo  
xoxxoo  
oxxxoo  
xxxxoo  
ooooxo  
xoooxo  
oxooxo  
xxooxo  
ooxoxo  
xoxoxo  
oxxoxo  
xxxoxo  
oooxxo  
xooxxo  
oxoxxo  
xxoxxo  
ooxxxo  
xoxxxo  
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
Del  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
6A  
6B  
6C  
6D  
6E  
6F  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
ooooox  
xoooox  
oxooox  
xxooox  
ooxoox  
xoxoox  
oxxoox  
xxxoox  
oooxox  
xooxox  
oxoxox  
xxoxox  
ooxxox  
xoxxox  
oxxxox  
xxxxox  
ooooxx  
xoooxx  
oxooxx  
xxooxx  
ooxoxx  
xoxoxx  
oxxoxx  
xxxoxx  
oooxxx  
xooxxx  
oxoxxx  
xxoxxx  
ooxxxx  
xoxxxx  
oxxxxx  
xxxxxx  
ooooox  
xoooox  
oxooox  
xxooox  
ooxoox  
xoxoox  
oxxoox  
xxxoox  
oooxox  
xooxox  
oxoxox  
xxoxox  
ooxxox  
xoxxox  
oxxxox  
xxxxox  
ooooxx  
xoooxx  
oxooxx  
xxooxx  
ooxoxx  
xoxoxx  
oxxoxx  
xxxoxx  
oooxxx  
xooxxx  
oxoxxx  
xxoxxx  
ooxxxx  
xoxxxx  
oxxxxx  
xxxxxx  
!
#
$
%
&
`
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
^
_
5E  
5F  
oxxxxo  
xxxxxo  
x = dot o = no dot  
Exiting Plot Mode Graphics  
When returning to a text line from a plot mode line, put an extra line  
feed in the data stream to maintain proper line registration  
throughout the page. This will allow the text characters to be put  
back on grid.  
101  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PLOT MODE GRAPHICS DENSITY COMMANDS  
High Horizontal  
Density Graphics  
Prints dots at the even  
numbered dot columns.  
Formats  
<EOT>  
or  
<SFCC> d  
Decimal:  
<EOT>  
<SFCC> 100  
or  
or  
Hex  
:
04  
<SFCC> 64  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”d”;  
The even dot plot code is used for programming high density graphics  
and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot code (05  
hex). Refer to the Graphics section for detailed plot mode information.  
High Vertical  
Density Graphics  
Modifies the paper motion for a  
plot mode line to 1/144 inch rather than 1/72 inch. The ENQ (plot  
mode code) should precede the DLE. See the discussion in the section  
on dot graphics for more information. When not preceded by a plot  
mode code, DLE acts as a VFU channel command.  
Format  
<DLE>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
16  
10  
BASIC:  
CHR$(10);  
Notes  
GENICOM private code (not part of the target printers control codes).  
102  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Single Line, High  
Horizontal Density  
(Genicom Private Command):  
Used in forming a line of plot mode  
graphics, this code specifies a single line of data to be plotted at a dot  
horizontal density of 120 DPI. The EOT (plot mode code) should precede  
the NAK. See the discussion in this chapter on dot graphics for more  
information.  
When not preceded by a plot mode code, NAK acts as a VFU channel  
command.  
Format  
<NAK>  
Decimal:  
21  
Hex  
:
15  
BASIC:  
CHR$(21);  
Notes  
GENICOM private code (not part of the target printer’s control codes).  
Normal Density  
Graphics  
Prints dots at the odd  
numbered dot columns.  
Format  
<ENQ>  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
5
05  
BASIC:  
CHR$(5);  
Details  
This is the normal density graphics control code. The ENQ code  
should occur before any printable data in the data stream.  
Notes  
Refer to the Graphics section for more details on Plot Mode Graphics.  
High Density  
Graphics  
For high density graphics, the  
Even Dot Plot code (04 hex) must be used in conjunction with (and  
precede) the Odd Dot Plot code in the line.  
Format  
<SFCC> e  
Decimal:  
<SFCC> 101  
Hex  
:
<SFCC> 65  
BASIC:  
CHR$(<SFCC>);”e”  
Notes  
Refer to the Graphics section for more details on Plot Mode Graphics.  
103  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIFFERENCES FROM TARGET PRINTER EMULATION  
Discarded Commands  
The following commands from the target printer are parsed by the  
current P-Series emulation and then discarded:  
Select Extended Character Set (SFCC OSET;n)  
The fonts required for this command were not available on the P-  
Series.  
Sequence discarded.  
Download a Language (SFCC V)  
The complete sequence SFCC V {QQQ} E {AAA} E {SSSSS} E (data) is  
parsed and discarded and the number of characters specified by the  
parameters as download data are also discarded.  
Download a Character Shape (SFCC c)  
The complete sequence SFCC c{PP} {SSSSSE} {A} (data) is parsed and  
discarded and the number of characters specified by the parameters  
as download data are also discarded.  
Postnet Bar codes (SFCC |p*xxxxx-yyyy-zz*)  
Sequence discarded.  
Ribbon Minder Enable/Disable (SFCC r E/SFCC r D)  
Sequence discarded.  
NOTE  
“Ribbon Minder” is a trade mark of Printronix, Inc.  
Ribbon Minder Set Job Rate (SFCC r J nnnn E)  
Sequence discarded.  
Ribbon Minder Worn Message (SFCC r A n)  
Sequence discarded.  
104  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND LINE DEBUG  
The Genicom P-Series emulation does not contain the command line  
debugger function for detecting and displaying error in Command  
Line Sequences.  
105  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FONT STYLES, PITCHES, AND CHARACTER SETS  
Font Styles  
The emulation uses the DP font instead of the three (3) High Speed  
fonts.  
Font Pitches  
Quality  
DP  
High Speed  
NLQ  
Emulation  
60 x 72  
60 x 72  
120 x 144  
120 x 144  
Target  
120 x 72  
120 x 48  
180 x 96  
120 x 144  
OCR  
Character Sets  
Set No. Emulation  
Target  
0
1
2
3
4
CP 437  
CP 8859-1  
None (discarded)  
CP 8574  
None (discarded)  
IBM PC  
Multinational  
ECMA 94  
DEC Multinational  
N/A  
Extended Character Sets  
The emulation supports code page 850 only.  
Form Length  
Maximum form length of the 5000 series is 22 inches. All commands  
which set forms length in Inches, Lines, or lines by VFU use 22  
inches instead of the target printers 24 inch limit.  
106  
Chapter 4. Printronix P Series Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Plot Mode Graphic Densities  
The target printer defaults the graphic density to certain values based  
on the font selection:  
DP:  
60 dpi horizontally, 72 dpi vertically  
90 dpi horizontally, 96 dpi vertically  
60 dpi horizontally, 48 dpi vertically  
NLQ:  
HS:  
The 5000 series printers support 60/120 dpi horizontally and  
72/144 dpi vertically.  
Enhancements  
The following enhancements were made to the emulation. These  
features do not exist as part of the target printer.  
High Vertical Density Plot Mode Graphics  
A <DLE> code in a graphics line will cause the next graphic line feed  
to be 1/144 inch instead of 1/72 inch.  
107  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 5. PROPRINTER EMULATION  
INTRODUCTION  
The IBM Proprinter III XL emulation Is selected through the control  
panel. Printer option straps Proprinter Table (Appendix D) replace the  
applicable switches used on a Proprinter.  
Although every effort has been made to make this printer functionally  
similar to the Proprinter, some differences do exist.  
DIFFERENCES FROM PROPRINTER  
Non-Proprinter fonts are available; however, proportional spacing  
line lengths may be different.  
Download fonts are not available.  
The Proprinter 20 cpi font is not available.  
Bidirectional and unidirectional printing do not apply on this  
printer.  
Double-width and double-height characters are slightly different.  
240 dpi graphics are printed on a 120 dpi grid. Adjacent dots are  
OR'ed together. The aspect ratio of this printer (height vs. width of  
a graphic image) is identical to the Proprinter.  
PROPRINTER CONTROL CODES  
BEL  
Bell:  
Sounds a momentary audible tone.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
7
07  
BASIC:  
CHR$(7);  
BS  
Backspace:  
Moves the print position one character to the left. This  
code is normally used for overstriking a character. When the print  
position is at the left margin, a received BS has no effect.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
8
08  
BASIC:  
CHR$(8);  
CAN  
Cancel:  
Causes all printable data received since the last line  
terminator to be deleted. Print modes enabled since the last  
terminator (other than double-width printing initiated by the SO  
code) stay in effect. Example: If underlining was enabled during the  
line, it will still be active for the next line received. The cancel control  
code does not change the current print position.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
24  
18  
BASIC:  
CHR$(24);  
108  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CR  
Carriage Return:  
CR moves the current print position to the left  
margin. If auto LF on CR is set, either by Emulation Settings menu  
option or by command (ESC 5), then a line feed will also be executed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
13  
0D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(13);  
DC1  
DC2  
Device Code 1:  
Select printer (parallel interface only). DC1 sets the  
printer online after being deselected by an ESC Q.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
17  
11  
BASIC:  
CHR$(17);  
Device Code 2:  
Sets 10 cpi printing. DC2 sets the printer to 10 cpi (5  
cpi if double-wide is enabled). It cancels condensed printing mode  
and 12 cpi printing.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
18  
12  
BASIC:  
CHR$(18);  
DC3  
Device Code 3:  
Deselect printer. When using a serial interface, DC3  
(XOFF) is sent to the host to indicate the printer is not ready to  
accept data. When using a parallel interface, a received DC3 is  
treated as a NUL.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
19  
13  
BASIC:  
CHR$(19);  
DC4  
ESC  
FF  
Device Code 4:  
Cancel double-wide printing by line. DC4 cancels  
one-line double-wide print set by an SO code. It does not cancel  
continuous double-wide printing set by ESC W 1.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
20  
14  
BASIC:  
CHR$(20);  
Escape:  
Introduces an escape sequence. ESC tells the printer that  
the following characters are to be interpreted as a printer command,  
not printable data. See the section on Proprinter escape sequences.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27  
1B  
CHR$(27);  
Form Feed:  
Advances the paper to the next top of form with the print  
position at the left. If a top margin is set, paper advances to the first  
print line below the margin.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
12  
0C  
CHR$(12);  
109  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HT  
Horizontal Tab:  
Advances the print position to the next horizontal  
tab stop. If there are no tab stops between the print position and the  
right margin, the HT is ignored. Tab stops are set by the command  
ESC D. Default tabs are set every eight columns, beginning at  
column 9.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
9
09  
BASIC:  
CHR$(9);  
LF  
Line Feed:  
Advances the paper one line by the current setting for line  
space. If the LF causes paper to exceed the form length, a form feed  
occurs. Acts as a line terminator.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
10  
0A  
CHR$(10);  
NUL  
Null:  
NUL is ignored by the printer when received by itself. If received  
as part of a graphics data sequence, it is interpreted as a graphics  
space. Null is used by some escape sequences to end a series of  
parameters. When used as a parameter of a sequence looking for an  
even or odd value, it is considered even. Example: ESC S NULL  
causes superscripting to occur.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
0
00  
BASIC:  
CHR$(O);  
SI  
Shift In:  
SI causes condensed printing. It sets the printer to 17.1 cpi  
(8.55 cpi if double-wide printing is enabled). Condensed printing  
remains in effect for subsequent lines until cancelled.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
15  
0F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(15);  
SO  
VT  
Shift Out:  
SO causes double-wide printing for the current line only.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
14  
0E  
CHR$(14);  
Vertical Tab:  
VT advances the paper to the next vertical tab setting  
and returns the print position to the left margin. A maximum of 64  
vertical tabs is allowed per form. The vertical tabs are set using ESC  
B. The paper is advanced one line if no tab is set beyond the current  
line.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
11  
0B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(11);  
110  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND DIRECTORY  
Sequence  
ESC A n  
Meaning  
Page  
114  
115  
115  
115  
115  
115  
115  
115  
116  
116  
114  
120  
120  
116  
116  
117  
117  
117  
117  
117  
117  
118  
118  
120  
121  
113  
113  
113  
114  
114  
114  
114  
114  
112  
112  
112  
112  
112  
113  
Set text line spacing to n/72 inch  
Set vertical tabs by line numbers  
Set form length in lines  
ESC B n1…n64 0  
ESC C n  
ESC C 0 m  
ESC D n1…n28 0  
ESC E  
Set form length in inches  
Set horizontal tab stops in columns  
Start emphasized printing  
Cancel emphasized printing  
Select double-strike printing  
Cancel double-strike printing  
Select print mode. 0 - DP. 2 NLQ  
Graphics variable line spacing n/216 inch  
Normal density graphics (60 DPI)  
Dual density graphics low speed (120 DPI)  
Skip perforation ON  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I n  
ESC J n  
ESC K n1 n2 v1…vn  
ESC L n1 n2 v1…vn  
ESC N n  
ESC O  
Skip perforation OFF  
ESC P n  
Proportional space mode  
Deselect printer  
ESC Q n  
ESC R  
Set all tabs to power on settings  
Super/Sub script on  
ESC S n  
ESC T  
Super/Sub script off  
ESC U n  
Unidirectional print on/off  
Double-wide print on/off  
Set horizontal margins  
ESC W n  
ESC X n m  
ESC Y n1 n2 v1…vn  
ESC Z n1 n2 v1…vn  
ESC 0  
Dual density graphics (full speed)  
Quad density graphics (reduced speed)  
Set 1/8 line spacing  
ESC 1  
Set 7/72 line spacing  
ESC 2  
Start text line spacing  
ESC 3 n  
Set graphics line spacing (n/216)  
Set top of form  
ESC 4  
ESC 5 n  
Automatic line feed on/off  
Select character set 2  
ESC 6  
ESC 7  
Select character set 1  
ESC _ n  
Continuous overscore on/off  
Continuous underline on/off  
12 CPI printing  
ESC - n  
ESC :  
ESC ^  
Print single character from chart  
Print continuously from chart  
Select Code Page  
ESC n1 n2  
ESC [T n1 n2 m1.. m5  
111  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESCAPE SEQUENCES  
ESC - n  
Underscore:  
When underscoring is enabled, all printable characters  
and all space characters. including leading space characters. are  
underlined. Leading white space preceding a horizontal tab stop is  
not underlined. Not recommended for use with line draw characters.  
n = 1, underscoring is enabled  
n = 0, underscoring is disabled  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 45 <n>  
1B 2D <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(45);CHR$(<n>);  
ESC _ n  
Overscore:  
When overscoring is enabled. all printable characters and  
all space characters, including leading space characters, are  
overscored. Leading white space preceding a horizontal tab stop is  
not overscored. Not recommended for use with line draw characters.  
n – 1 enabled  
n – 0 disabled  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 95 <n>  
1B 5F <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"_<n>";  
ESC \ n1 n2  
Print Continuously from All Character Chart.  
Allows printing all  
the 256 characters and symbols (even those normally used as control  
codes) in the all character chart. The total number of characters to be  
printed from the all character chart is specified by n1 and n2  
according to the formula: n1 + (256 * n2).  
Example: To print 400 characters from the chart send  
CHR$(27);"\";CHR$(144);CHR$(1);  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 92 <n1> <n2>  
1B 5C <n1> <n2>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"\<n1><n2>";  
ESC ^  
ESC :  
Print Single Character from All Character Chart:  
The next  
character received is printed from the all character chart.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 94  
1B 5E  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"^";  
Set 12 cpi Printing:  
Sets the printer to 12 cpi (6 cpi if double-wide is  
enabled). DC2 resets to 10 cpi.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 58  
1B 3A  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);":";  
112  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC [T n1 n2 ml  
m2 m3 m4 m5  
Select Code Page:  
Selects international character sets. The  
default is IBM PC Multilingual Set 2.  
n1: Always 5 (The number of m parameters used.)  
n2: Always 0  
ml, m2, and m5 are always zero.  
m3 - See chart below.  
m4 - See chart below.  
m3 m4 International Character Set  
7E 21 DEC Multinational  
7F 21 Roman 8  
8F 21 ISO 8859-1 Latin Alphabet #1  
93 21 ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic  
B5 01 IBM PC Set 2 USA (Microsoft Code Page 437)  
52 03 IBM PC Multilingual Set 2 (MS Code Page 850)  
54 03 Microsoft Code Page 852 (Slavic)  
57 03 Microsoft Code Page 855 (Cyrillic)  
5F 03 Microsoft Code Page 863 (French Canadian)  
(The examples below show the m3 and m4 values for selecting Roman  
8.)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 84 5 0 0 0 127 33 0  
1B 5B 54 05 00 00 00 7F 21 00  
CHR$(27);"rr;CHR$(5);CHR$(O);CHRS(O);CHR$(O);  
CHR$(127);CHR$(33);CHR$(0);  
ESC 0  
ESC 1  
Set 8 Lines per Inch:  
Sets the line spacing to 1/8 of an inch (8 lpi).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 48  
1B 30  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"0";  
Set 7/72 Lines per Inch Spacing:  
Sets the line spacing to 7/72 of  
an inch (10. 3 lpi)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 49  
1B 31  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"l";  
ESC 2  
Start Text Line Spacing:  
Activates the line spacing stored by the  
last ESC A, or sets 6 lpi if no ESC A command has been received.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 50  
1B 32  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27):"2";  
113  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC 3 n  
Set Graphics Line Spacing:  
Sets the line spacing to n units of 1/216  
inch. This allows for line spacing in .0046 inch increments to 1.18  
inches (255/216). The value of n/216 is rounded up to the next  
1/144 inch.  
n = 1 through 255  
Example:  
ESC 3 27  
Sets the line spacing to 1/8 inch, or  
27/216.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 51 <n>  
1B 33 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"3<n>";  
ESC 4  
Set Top of Form:  
Sets current paper position as top of form.  
27 52  
1B 34  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"4";  
ESC 5 n  
Automatic Line Feed:  
Printer automatically does a line feed after  
receiving a carriage return.  
n = 0, disabled  
n = 1, enabled  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 53 <n>  
1B 35 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"5<n>";  
ESC 6  
Select Character Set 2:  
All characters (printable and control codes)  
received after this command are selected from character set 2. A  
reset, initialization, or ESC 7 resets to character set 1.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 54  
1B 36  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"6";  
ESC 7  
Select Character Set 1:  
All characters (printable and control codes)  
received after this command are selected from character set 1. Also,  
see ESC 6 above.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 55  
1B 37  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27):"7";  
ESC A n  
Stores n/72-inch Line Spacing:  
The text line spacing is stored,  
although not set for use, to the value n in units of 1/72 inch. An ESC  
2 must be sent to start this line spacing. Valid parameter values are  
1 through 85.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 65 <n>  
1B 41 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"A<n>";  
114  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC B n1 ... n64 0 Set Vertical Tab Stops:  
This sequence sets up to 64 vertical tabs by  
line number. The tabs must be in ascending order and the sequence  
must end with a NUL. ESC B NUL clears all tab stops. These tabs are  
stored as absolute values, so they are not affected by changes in lpi  
settings. This command resets any previously set tab stops.  
Variable n represents values 1 through 254.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 66 <nl>...<n64> 0  
1B 42 <n1>...<n64> 00  
CHR$(27);"B<nl>...<n64>";CHR$(0);  
ESC C n  
Set Form Length in Lines:  
The value of n sets the form length in  
lines using the current line spacing setting. The maximum length is  
22 inches (176 lines for 8 lpi, etc.). Top of form is set to the current  
form position. Once set, changing the line spacing has no effect on  
form length.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 67 <n>  
1B 43 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"C<n>";  
ESC C 0 n  
Set Form Length in Inches:  
The value of n sets the form length from  
1 to 22 inches. Top of form is set at the current vertical position.  
Once set, changing the line spacing has no effect on form length.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 67 0 <n>  
1B 43 00 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(0);"<n>";  
ESC D n1...n28 0  
Set Horizontal Tab Stops:  
Sets horizontal tab stops at the positions  
specified "n" expressed in columns at the current cpi. Once set,  
changing the cpi has no effect on the tab positions. ESC D NUL clears  
all tab stops. Tab stops must be specified in ascending order. If more  
than 28 parameters are specified, the command is terminated.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 68 <n1>...<n28> 0  
1B 44 <n1>...<n28> 0  
CHR$(27);"D<n1>…<n28>";CHR$(0);  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
Start Emphasized Print  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 69  
1B 45  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27):"E";  
Stop Emphasized Print  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 70  
1B 46  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"F"';  
Start Double-Strike Print  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 71  
1B 47  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"G";  
115  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC H  
Stop Double-Strike Print  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 72  
1B 48  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"H";  
ESC I n  
Select Print Mode  
n = 0 selects Draft Resident, USA  
n = 1 selects Draft 12 CPI (Fast) Resident, USA  
n = 2 selects NLQ Resident, USA  
n = 3 selects NLQ H (Courier) Resident, USA  
n = 4 selects Draft Download. Multi/USA  
n = 5 selects Draft 12 CPI (Fast) Download, Multi/USA  
n = 6 selects NLQ Download, Multi/USA  
n = 7 selects NLQ H (Courier) Download, USA  
n = 8 selects Draft Download. USA  
n = 9 selects Draft 12 CPI (Fast) Download, USA  
n = 10 selects NLQ Download, USA  
n = 11 selects Alternate NLQ II Resident (Italic). USA  
n = 12 selects Draft Download, Multi/USA  
n = 13 selects 12 CPI Fast) Download, Multi/USA  
n = 14 selects NLQ Download, Multi/USA  
n = 15 selects Alternate NLQ 11 (Italic), Download, USA  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 73 <n>  
1B 49 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"I<n>";  
ESC J n  
Variable Line Feed:  
This command advances the paper a distance  
specified by the value of n in units of 1/216 inch. The value "n" can  
be a value from 0 to 255. The variable line feed is not stored, so there  
is no effect on line spacing values.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 74 <n>  
1B 4A <n>  
CHR$(27);"J<n>";  
ESC N n  
Set Skip Perforation:  
Sets the perforation skip distance to n lines.  
ESC N is reset when the form length is changed. Valid parameter  
values are 1 - 255. The printer converts the number of lines (n) to  
inches using the current line spacing and saves the skip distance in  
inches. The skip perforation distance does not change when the line  
spacing is changed. Also, in this chapter, see ESC 0.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 78 <n>  
1B 4E <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"N<n>";  
ESC 0  
Cancel Skip Perforation:  
Resets the skip perforation value to zero  
lines.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 79  
1B 4F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"O";  
116  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC P n  
Select Proportional Spacing  
If n = odd number, proportional print enabled.  
If n = even number, proportional print disabled.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 80 <n>  
1B 50  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"P<n>";  
ESC Q n  
Deselects IBM Proprinter (parallel interface only):  
Stops printer  
from accepting data from the host. The host must reset the printer or  
select it using DC1. This sequence is intended for diagnostic  
purposes only. The variable (n) is 22.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 81 22  
1B 51 16  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"Q";CHR$(22);  
ESC R  
Set All Tabs to Power On Settings:  
Sets horizontal tabs every eight  
positions starting at column 9 and clears all vertical tabs.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 82  
1B 52  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"R";  
ESC S n  
Set Superscript/Subscript On:  
If n is 1, then subscript (1/2 inch  
below the line) is selected; if it is 0, then superscript (1/2 inch above  
the line) is selected. Since these two attributes are mutually  
exclusive, an ESC S command overrides any previous ESC S setting.  
Also, see ESC T below.  
n = 1 subscript  
n = 0 superscript  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 83 <n>  
1B 53 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"S<n>";  
ESC T  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript:  
Returns to previous baseline  
position. Also. in this chapter see ESC S.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 89  
1B 54  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"T";  
ESC U n  
Set Unidirectional Printing  
n = 0 unidirectional printing is turned off  
n = 1 unidirectional printing is turned on  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 85 <n>  
1B 55 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"U<n>";  
117  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC W n  
Set Double-Wide Print On/Off:  
When enabled, printable characters  
are printed twice their current width. This sequence has precedence  
over the SO control code.  
n = 1: doublewide is enabled  
n = 0: doublewide is disabled  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 87 <n>  
1B 57 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"W<n>";  
ESC X n m  
Set Horizontal Margins:  
This sequence sets the left (n) and right (m)  
margins. The interval is based on the current cpi setting. Variable (m)  
must be greater than W. and the sequence must include both  
variables.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 88 <n> <m>  
1B 5B <n> <m>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"X<n><m>";  
118  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PROPRINTER DOT GRAPHICS  
Dot graphics allows you to print individual dots at any position on  
the page. The Proprinter doesn't adjust the line feed increment  
automatically on entering graphics. If you want contiguous vertical  
graphics, then you must set the line feed increment to 8/72 inch  
before starting graphics and then reset it when you are finished.  
An IBM graphics control sequence starts with an escape combination  
that sets the graphics density (ESC K, L, Y, or Z), followed by a 2-byte  
header that shows the number of subsequent bytes that are to be  
interpreted as graphics data. The format of the sequence is:  
ESC (density) <n1> <n2> (data) .. (data)  
Since this control sequence has no terminator, you need to specify  
exactly in the header the number of bytes that you want to be  
interpreted as graphics. If there are fewer graphics data bytes than  
specified in the header, then the printer treats subsequent text and  
control codes as graphics. In that case, carriage returns and line  
feeds are often ingested as graphics data.  
On the other hand, if there are more graphics data bytes than  
specified in the header, then the printer interprets excess bytes as  
text or control codes. This can also produce indeterminate results.  
The two bytes (n1, n2) specify the total number of image bytes that  
follow; n2 is the most significant byte.  
The total number of image data bytes - n1 + (n2 * 256)  
EXAMPLE: to print 5 inches of graphics at ESC K density, which is  
60 dpi, then:  
Total bytes = 5 inches x 60 dpi = 300  
n1 = total bytes modulo 256, in other words,  
n1 = total bytes – (n2 * 256)  
n1 = 300 - (1 * 256)  
n1 = 44  
n2 = integer (total bytes/256)  
n2 = integer (300/256) = 1  
The sequence sent to the printer (shown in BASIC) would look like:  
CHR$(27);CHR$"K';CHR$(44);CHR$(1);CHR$(v1);... CHR$(v3OO);  
where v1 through v3OO are image data bytes.  
Each image data byte represents a vertical column of eight dots. The  
most significant bit of the byte controls the top dot of a column, and  
the least significant bit controls the bottom dot of that column. The  
first byte of data (v1) is the first column, (v2) is the second column,  
and so on. The illustration below shows byte values of various dot  
combinations.  
119  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Weight  
Wire  
Graphics Dot Pattern  
128  
1
! ! !  
! ! !  
64  
32  
16  
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
4
!
!
2
1
! ! !  
0
0
0
112 136 132 130 65 49 65 130 132 136 112  
0
0
Programming Example  
The following BASIC program will produce the graphic shown above.  
100  
110  
115  
120  
140  
150  
160  
170  
180  
190  
200  
210  
220  
230  
WIDTH "LPT1:",255  
FOR N = 1 TO 4  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(80);CHR$(0);  
FOR K = 1 TO 5  
LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(112);  
LPRINT CHR$(136);CHR$(132);CHR$(130);  
LPRINT CHR$(65);CHR$(49);CHR$(65);  
LPRINT CHR$(130);CHR$(132);CHR$(136);  
LPRINT CHR$(112);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);  
NEXT K  
LPRINT  
NEXT N  
LPRINT "DONE"  
END  
ESC K nl n2 v1…vn Normal Density Graphics:  
This sequence sets a density of 60 dpi  
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 75 <nl> <n2> <v1>. . . <vn>  
1B 4B <n1> <n2> <v1> . . . <vn>  
CHR$(27);"K<nl><n2><v1>…<vn>";  
ESC L n1 n2 v1…vn Low Speed Double-Density Graphics:  
This sequence sets a density  
of 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 76 <n1> <n2> <v1>...<vn>  
1B 4C <n1> <n2> <v1> ... <vn>  
CHR$(27);"L<nl><n2><vl>…<vn>";  
ESC Y n1 n2 v1…vn High-Speed Double-Density Graphics:  
This sets a density of 120 dpi  
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. If horizontally adjacent dots are  
specified, then the second dot is not printed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 89 <n1> <n2> <v1>...<vn>  
1B 59 <n1> <n2> <v1>…<vn>  
CHR$(27);"Y<nl><n2><vl>…<vn>";  
120  
Chapter 5. Proprinter Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC Z n1 n2 v1…vn Quadruple-Density Graphics (Reduced Speed):  
Sets a density of  
240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. If horizontally adjacent  
dots are specified, then the second dot is not printed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 90 <n1> <n2> <v1>...<vn>  
1B 5A <n1> <n2> <v1>…<vn>  
CHR$(27);"Z<nl><n2><vl>…<vn>";  
121  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 6. EPSON FX286-E EMULATION  
INTRODUCTION  
The FX288-e emulation causes the 5000 printers to emulate a 9-wire  
dot matrix printer.  
Conventions Used in this Chapter  
In contrast to ANSI, where an argument is expressed as an ASCII  
decimal integer, Escape control sequences take binary arguments.  
For example, the control sequence to set form length in lines is:  
ESC C n  
The sequence to set a 66-line form, expressed in BASIC, would be:  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(66);  
which could alternately be expressed as:  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"CB";  
In contrast, when arguments 1 and 0 are used to turn something on  
and off, you can send the argument in either binary or ASCII. For  
example, you can turn underline on by sending:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(45);CHR$(1);  
or you can send  
CHR$(27);CHR$(45);"1";  
The physical spaces in the escape sequences shown in this  
publication are only for clarification purposes and are not used in the  
actual string.  
If a space is actually needed in the sequence, it will be shown as SP.  
122  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Mode Combinations  
The chart below shows those print modes that can be used together  
and those that cannot. When an FX-286e command is received to  
turn on two print modes that are incompatible, one of them will take  
precedence over the other one. This Is indicated in the chart below by  
intersection of  
showing the letter of the higher precedence mode at the  
the two modes. For example, when combining the double-high and  
compressed modes (an impossible combination), the double-high  
mode, represented by the letter "D" at the intersection of the two  
modes, will take precedence and become the active print mode.  
PRINT MODE  
(N) Normal  
C
Q
C
I
(C) Compressed  
(E) Emphasized  
(Q) NLQ  
C
Q
D P  
(S) Super/Subscript  
(W) Double Wide  
(U) Underline  
(O) Double-Strike  
(D) Double-High  
(P) Proportional  
(I) Italics  
S
Q
I
D
D
P
D
I
123  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FUNCTIONAL DIFFERENCES  
The following is a list of functional differences between this printer’s  
emulation and the FX-286e printer.  
The maximum line length is 13.6 inches (136 columns at 10cpi,  
816 graphics columns per line at 60 dpi).  
Special enhanced print modes are not available when the “paper  
low” condition is reached.  
The number of characters that can be discarded by the CAN  
command is different due to a different buffer size.  
The delete code is discarded.  
The Auto Feed XT function (pin 14 on the parallel interface  
connector) is not implemented.  
Double-wide and double-high print characters appear to have  
wider dots due to offset printing.  
Adjacent dots can be printed when ESC Y or ESC Z graphics are  
selected. This provides a sharper image of higher density.  
All 12 dot rows will print when using 12-high characters in a  
superscript or subscript.  
Superscript characters are not underlined in a different dot row.  
Even though the escape sequence and data to print nine-bit  
graphics are accepted, the data byte containing the ninth bit is  
discarded and only the top eight bits of data are printed.  
The printer has more than 80 character sets that may be selected  
from the CCU menu.  
Horizontal densities available are 60, 120, and 240 dpi. When 72  
dpi is received, it is converted to 60 dpi. When densities of 80, 90,  
or 144 are received, they are converted to 120 dpi.  
The widths of the proportional characters are slightly different.  
The Courier NLQ font is used for Roman.  
The Gothic font is used for Sans Serif.  
The italic font prints only in NLQ mode.  
The character graphics font prints only in draft mode.  
124  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADDITIONAL ESCAPE SEQUENCES  
The following escape sequences are supported by this emulation, but  
are not part of the FX-286e command set:  
ESC ( t  
Assign a code page to one of four variables  
(0, 1, 2, or 3)  
ESC ( T  
ESC j n  
ESC 1  
Assign a code page to variable "1"  
Reverse n/216 paper move  
Select 7/72-inch line spacing.  
UNSUPPORTED ESCAPE SEQUENCES  
The following escape sequences from the FX-286e command set are  
not supported by this emulation and are therefore discarded:  
ESC EM  
ESC %  
ESC &  
ESC 8  
ESC 9  
ESC :  
Sheet feeder  
User-defined character set  
User-defined characters  
Paper out sensor on  
Paper out sensor off  
Copy ROM to RAM  
NLQ justification  
ESC a  
125  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FX-286E CONTROL CODES  
BEL  
Bell (07H):  
Sounds the beeper.  
BS  
Backspace (08H):  
Flushes all print data and then moves the print  
position one character width to the left based on the current  
character spacing. If this code is received immediately after graphic  
printing, the print position of subsequent data is moved back to the  
point at which graphic printing started.  
CAN  
CR  
Cancel (18H):  
Causes all printable data received since the last line  
terminator or escape sequence, whichever occurred later, to be  
deleted. Data on previous lines that has been auto-wrapped will not  
be deleted. This code is a line terminator. The current print position  
will be retained. Also, cancels the double width print mode initiated  
by the SO control code.  
Carriage Return (0DH):  
Flushes all print data and positions the  
print position at the left margin for subsequent printable data to be  
printed. This code Is a line terminator and will terminate the double  
width print mode initiated by a received SO code.  
DC1  
DC2  
Device Control 1 (11H):  
Causes printing to resume after the printer  
has been deselected by a DC3 code. It will not resume printing if  
printer was halted by pressing the On Line key on the control panel.  
Device Control 2 (12H):  
Cancel condensed mode. This ends the  
current print buffer and causes its contents to print. The condensed  
print mode is then canceled and printing resumes at 10 cpi (5 cpi  
double-wide) or 12 cpi (6 cpi double-wide) depending on which one  
was previously selected.  
DC3  
DC4  
Device Control 3 (13H)  
Serial Interface:  
Deselect printer. The printer can be selected again  
by a DC1 command or by the online key.  
Parallel Interface:  
Treated the same as the NUL control code.  
Device Control 4 (14H):  
Cancels double width printing initiated by a  
SO control code or ESC SO escape sequence and returns to the  
previously selected print compression (pica, compressed, or elite). It  
does not cancel double width printing selected by ESC W or ESC 1.  
DEL  
ESC  
Delete (7FH):  
The delete character is discarded unless it is made  
printable via the ESC 6 code expansion sequence.  
Escape (1BH):  
Introduces an escape sequence. It implies that  
subsequent code(s) will be interpreted by the printer as a printer  
command. not printable data.  
FF  
Form Feed (0CH):  
Moves the print position to the top of the next  
form at the left margin. This code is a line terminator and will  
terminate the double-width printing mode initiated by a received SO  
code. All print data is flushed before the form feed occurs.  
126  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HT  
Horizontal Tab (09H):  
If there are tabs set, this code ends the  
current print buffer and causes its contents to be printed. The  
horizontal print position moves right to the next horizontal tab stop  
position. Any tab that causes the current print position to exceed the  
right print limit, or right margin, will cause a line wrap to occur  
(CR,LF). Tab positions are absolute. If the character spacing changes,  
tab positions remain in the same absolute horizontal positions. If  
there is no tab set between the current print position and the print  
limit, the tab is ignored and the current print buffer is not affected.  
LF  
Line Feed (0AH):  
Flushes all print data and then advances the paper  
up one line as determined by the current line spacing. Me print  
position Is moved to the left margin. This code is a line terminator  
and will terminate the double-width printing mode initiated by a  
received SO code. If paper positioning causes the next line to exceed  
the form length, an automatic form feed will occur.  
NUL  
SI  
Null (00H):  
Causes no action when received alone. It is used by some  
sequences to terminate the parameter list.  
Shift In (0FH):  
Select condensed print mode. Ends the current print  
buffer and causes its contents to be printed. This code then enables  
the condensed printing mode. Characters are condensed to 17.1 cpi  
for the pica pitch (10 cpi) and 20 cpi for the elite pitch (12 cpi).  
Double-wide printing [invoked by SO, ESC I (n), or ESC W  
commands], together with 17.1 cpi, produces printing at  
approximately 8.6 cpi. With double-wide and 20 cpi, the resulting  
print will be approximately 10 cpi. The condensed print mode can be  
selected, but not activated, while the proportional print mode is  
active.  
SO  
Shift Out (0EH):  
Select double-wide printing by line. Ends the  
current print buffer and causes its contents to be printed. This code  
then starts double-wide printing for subsequent characters until a  
line terminator, DC4, ESC I (n), or ESC W NUL command is received.  
Characters are elongated to twice their current width, that is,  
expanded to take up two character positions each. The tab positions  
are not changed. If the double-wide print mode is already active by an  
ESC W or ESC I (n) sequence. the SO code is ignored and the escape  
sequence takes control.  
127  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VT  
Vertical Tab (0BH):  
Ends the current print buffer and causes its  
contents to be printed. A CR function is always performed upon  
receipt of a VT code. The VT code then advances the paper vertically  
to the next vertical tab position in the channel selected by the ESC /  
sequence. If no channel has been selected, channel zero is used.  
Following power-up or initialization, the eight vertical tab channels  
are in an initialized state (no tabs have been inserted into a specific  
channel nor has the tab erase command been received). If a VT code  
Is received at this time, a vertical move equal to the current line  
spacing is performed. If the command to erase tabs is received (ESC  
B NUL or ESC bn NUL), received VT codes will produce no vertical  
motion but will cause a CR to occur.  
A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions are allowed for each of the  
eight channels. If there are tabs in the currently selected table, but  
no tabs set beyond the current line. a vertical tab will cause paper to  
advance to the top margin of the next form.  
When a vertical tab would cause the printer to exceed the current  
form length (minus any perforation skip distance) the vertical tab will  
act as a form feed. Vertical tabs are converted to absolute positions  
when set. Future changes in line spacing will not change the position  
of the vertical tabs.  
128  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FX-286E ESCAPE SEQUENCE DIRECTORY  
Escape Sequence  
ESC SO  
ESC SI  
ESC SP n  
ESC I n  
ESC #  
ESC $ nl n2  
ESC - n  
ESC / n  
Esc | n  
ESC 0  
ESC 1  
ESC 2  
ESC 3 n  
ESC 4  
ESC 5  
ESC 6  
ESC 7  
ESC <  
ESC -  
ESC >  
Definition  
Select double-wide print mode  
Select condensed print mode  
Set intercharacter space  
Page  
142  
135  
135  
145  
149  
139  
141  
136  
133  
134  
134  
134  
134  
143  
143  
143  
143  
139  
141  
149  
149  
134  
136  
132  
132  
136  
141  
141  
141  
141  
145  
138  
152  
152  
135  
132  
Master print mode select  
Cancel MSB (most significant bit control)  
Set absolute print position  
Turn underlining ON/OFF  
Set vertical tab stops  
Set left margin  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing  
Select 7/72-inch line spacing  
Select 1/6-inch line spacing  
Select n/216-inch line spacing  
Select italic print mode  
Cancel italic print mode  
Printable code area expansion  
Cancel printable code area expansion  
Select unidirectional mode (1 line)  
Set most significant bit (MSB) to zero  
Set most significant bit (MSB) to one  
Initialize printer  
Select n/72-inch line spacing  
Set vertical tab stops  
Set page length in lines  
Set page length in inches  
Set horizontal tab stops  
Select emphasized mode  
Cancel emphasized mode  
Select double-strike mode  
Cancel double-strike mode  
Printable code area expansion  
Single variable line feed  
Normal density graphics  
Low speed double density graphics  
Select elite pitch  
ESC @  
ESC A n  
ESC B n1...n16 NUL  
ESC C n  
ESC C NUL n  
ESC D nl n2 NUL  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I n  
ESC J n  
ESC K n1 n2 v1...vn  
ESC L n1 n2 v1...vn  
ESC M  
ESC N n  
Set skip over perforation (Epson set bottom  
margin)  
ESC O  
Cancel skip over perforation (Epson cancel  
bottom margin)  
132  
ESC P  
ESC Q n  
ESC R n  
ESC S n  
ESC T  
ESC U n  
ESC Y n1 n2 v1...vn  
ESC Z n1 n2 v1...vn  
ESC \ n1 n2  
Select pica pitch  
Set right margin  
135  
133  
146  
142  
142  
139  
152  
152  
140  
137  
Select the international character set  
Select superscript/subscript printing  
Cancel superscript/subscript printing  
Turn unidirectional printing mode ON/OFF  
High speed double density graphics  
Quadruple density graphics  
Set relative print position  
ESC b c n1 n2 ... n8 NUL Set vertical tabs in channels 0-7  
129  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Escape Sequence  
ESC k n  
ESC p n  
ESC s n  
ESC t n  
ESC w n  
ESC x n  
ESC ( t 3 0 m1 m2 m3  
Definition  
Page  
144  
135  
140  
147  
143  
144  
147  
Select font style  
Turn proportional mode ON/OFF  
Turn half-speed print mode ON/OFF  
Select a code page  
Turn double-high printing ON/OFF  
Select NLQ or Draft printing  
Assign a code page to one of four variables (0, 1,  
2, or 3)  
ESC ( T n1 n2 m1...m5  
ESC * m nl n2 vl...vn  
ESC ? s n  
Assign a code page to variable "l"  
Select graphics mode (Epson set bit image)  
Reassign graphics mode  
148  
153  
153  
141  
ESC – m nl n2  
Select 9-pin graphics  
130  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FX-286E ESCAPE SEQUENCE GROUPINGS  
The FX-286e escape sequences have been separated according to  
functionality. Special areas of interest such as character spacing,  
print modes. and graphics have separate sections.  
The sequences are separated as follows:  
Margins  
Line Spacing  
Character Spacing  
Tabs (Horizontal and Vertical)  
Paper Movement  
Print Position  
Print Modes  
Special Character Printing  
Miscellaneous Commands  
Dot Graphics  
131  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MARGINS  
ESC C n  
Set Page Length in Lines:  
Sets the forms length to n lines. The  
value for form length is stored in inches and will not change when  
line spacing Is changed. This sequence resets the top of form value to  
the current line position and resets the perforation skip mode. Form  
lengths of zero or greater than 22 inches are ignored and leave the  
existing form unchanged. The parameter limits are 1-255.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 67 n  
1B 43 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(n);  
ESC C NUL n  
Set Page Length in Inches:  
Sets the forms length from 1 to 22  
inches depending on the value for the parameter n. This sequence  
resets the top of form value to the current line position and resets the  
perforation skip mode. Form lengths of zero or greater than 22  
inches will be ignored and leave the existing form unchanged. The  
parameter limits are 1-255.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 67 0 n  
1B 43 00 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"C";CHR$(0);CHR$(n);  
ESC N n  
Set Skip Over Perforation:  
Sets a bottom margin region to avoid  
printing on the perforation when using continuous forms. The  
parameter n determines the number of print lines to be included in  
the skip area. This is converted to an absolute distance in inches  
based on the current line spacing value. Subsequent changes to the  
line spacing will not automatically change this setting. When form  
length is changed (by ESC C NUL n or ESC C n), the skip perforation  
is cleared. If the skip value exceeds the form's length, it is ignored. A  
parameter value of zero leaves the previous setting unchanged.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 78 n  
1B 4E nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"N";CHR$(n);  
ESC 0  
Cancel Skip Over Perforation:  
Resets the skip perforation value to  
zero.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 79  
1B 4F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"O";  
132  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC | n  
Set Left Margin:  
Sets the left margin to n columns in the current  
cpi. When proportional mode is in effect, the settings are treated as  
though they were set for pica (10 cpi horizontal). Before the new  
margin is set, all print data is flushed. The minimum space allowed  
between the left and right margin is the distance equal to the width of  
one double-wide pica character. This command clears any existing  
horizontal tabs and installs the defaults (every eight columns).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 108 n  
1B 6C nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"I";CHR$(n);  
ESC Q n  
Set Right Margin:  
Sets the right margin to n columns in the current  
pitch. When proportional mode is selected, the settings are the same  
as they would be for pica pitch (10cpi horizontal). The minimum  
space between the left and right margin is the width of two pica  
characters. Note that before the right margin is set, this command  
sequence causes all print data to be flushed. Column numbering  
begins at zero. If the right margin value is invalid (within the width of  
two pica characters of the left margin or exceeds the maximum  
columns), the current margin is unchanged. This command clears  
any existing horizontal tabs and installs the defaults (every 8  
columns based on the left margin).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 81 n  
1B 51 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"Q";CHR$(n);  
133  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LINE SPACING  
ESC 0  
Select 1/8-inch line spacing (8 lpi):  
Sets the line spacing to  
1/8-inch or 8 lpi.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 48  
1B 30  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"0";  
ESC 1  
Select 7/72-Inch Line Spacing:  
Sets the line spacing to 7/72 of an  
inch.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 49  
1B 31  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"1";  
ESC 2  
Select 1/6-Inch Line Spacing (6 lpi):  
Sets the line spacing to  
1/6-inch.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 50  
1B 32  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"2";  
ESC 3 n  
Select n/216-Inch Line Spacing:  
Sets the line spacing to n/216 of  
an inch. This permits line spacing from 0 inches (0/216) to 1.18  
inches (255/216). This command is recommended with n=24 to set  
the proper line spacing when printing graphics.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 51 n  
1B 33 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"3";CHR$(n);  
ESC A n  
Select n/72-Inch Line Spacing:  
Selects and activates n/72-inch  
line spacing.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 65 n  
1B 41 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"A";CHR$(n);  
134  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHARACTER SPACING  
ESC SI  
Select Condensed Print Mode:  
Performs the same function as the SI  
control code.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 15  
1B 0F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(15);  
ESC M  
ESC P  
Select Elite Pitch:  
This sets the pitch to 12 cpi.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 77  
1B 4D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”M”;  
Select Pica Pitch:  
This sets the pitch to 10 cpi.  
27 80  
1B 50  
CHR$(27);”P”;  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
ESC p n  
Turn Proportional Mode On/Off:  
Turns the proportional print mode  
on or off according to the value of n.  
n
Effect  
l
0
Unidirectional printing on  
Unidirectional printing off  
This command overrides the condensed print mode.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 74 n  
1B 4A nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"J";CHR$(n);  
ESC SP n  
Set Intercharacter Spacing:  
Sets the amount of space added to each  
character in increments of 1/120-inch. This space is added to the  
space already allocated in the character’s design. Parameter limits  
are 0-63 (decimal).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 32 n  
1B 20 n  
CHR$(27);CHR$(32);CHR$(n);  
135  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABS  
ESC B n1…n16 NUL Set Vertical Tab Stops:  
Sets up to 16 vertical tabs in channel at the  
indicated line numbers in the current line spacing. The list of tab  
stops must be terminated by the NUL code. Any line that is not  
referenced in the list is cleared by this command. Therefor, the  
command sequence ESC B NUL will clear all vertical tab stops. The  
parameters n1, n2, . . . must be in ascending order and the limits of  
the parameters are 1-255 (decimal).  
Vertical tabs are converted to absolute positions as they are set.  
Future changes in line spacing will not change the position of the  
tabs.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 66 (n1) … (n16) 0  
1B 42 (n1H) . . . (n16H) 00  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(66);CHR$(n1);… CHR$(n16);CHR$(0);  
ESC D n1…n32 NUL Set Horizontal Tab Stops:  
Sets up to 32 horizontal tab stops at the  
indicated column numbers. The list of tab stops must be terminated  
by a NUL code. Any column that is not referenced in the list is  
cleared by this command. Therefor, the command ESC D NUL will  
clear all horizontal tabs. The parameters must be in ascending order.  
If a tab parameters occurs which is out of sequence, the command is  
assumed to be terminated; all subsequent data is ignored until a NUL  
code is encountered.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 68 n1 … n32 0  
1B 44 n1H … n32H 00  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”D”;CHR$(n1);…;CHR$(n32);CHR$(0);  
ESC / n  
Set Vertical Tab Stops:  
Selects the vertical tab channel. All  
subsequent vertical tab commands (VT) will use this selected  
channel.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 47 n  
1B 2F nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”/”;CHR$(n);  
136  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC b c n1 n2…n8 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels 0 Through 7:  
Sets vertical tab stops  
in any one of 8 vertical tab channels numbered 0 through 7. This  
allows you to set up to 8 different groups of vertical tabs. The list of  
tab stops must be terminated by the NUL code. Any line that is not  
referenced in the list is cleared by this command. Therefor, the  
command sequence ESC b (c) NUL will clear all vertical tab stops  
within the channel (c). The parameters (n1), (n2), etc., must be in  
ascending order and the limits of the parameter values are 1-255  
(decimal).  
NUL  
Vertical tabs are converted to absolute positions as they are set.  
There is no automatic linkage between the value of line spacing and  
vertical tab positions: subsequent changes in the value for line  
spacing will not cause the tab positions to change.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 98 c n1 n2 … n8 0  
1B 62 cH n1H n2H … n8H 00  
CHR$(27);”b”;CHR$((c));CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);…;  
CHR$(0);  
137  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAPER MOVEMENT  
ESC J n  
Single Variable Line Feed:  
This sequence causes the contents of the  
print buffer to print. The print position is then moved down the page  
by the distance specified by the parameter in 1/216-inch increments.  
This sequence does not affect spacing of subsequent line actions. The  
parameter values allow a vertical movement from 0 to 1.18 inches  
(255/216). If n is not an exact multiple of 3/216=1/72-inch, then the  
movement is approximate. The parameter n=24 can be used to get  
the exact line spacing for the eight-bit graphics mode.  
Zero is a valid parameter value that produces no vertical motion.  
n
Spacing  
7 dots  
21  
24  
27  
36  
8 dots  
8 lpi  
6 lpi (12 dots  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 74 n  
1B 4A nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”J”;CHR$(n);  
138  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINT POSITION  
ESC <  
Select Unidirectional Mode (1 Line):  
Forces unidirectional print,  
from right to left, in the line in which this command is embedded.  
Unidirectional printing begins with the first character following  
receipt of this command and is canceled by a carriage return.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 60  
1B 3C  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"<";  
ESC U n  
Turn Unidirectional Printing ON/OFF:  
Causes the printer to print  
in only one direction [prints with the shuttle moving from right to left)  
or in both directions according to the value of parameter n as follows:  
n
l
0
Effect  
Unidirectional printing on  
Unidirectional printing off  
When turning unidirectional printing off, the command should be the  
first character in the line to be printed bidirectionally.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 85 n  
1B 55 nH  
CHR$(27);"U";CHR$(n);  
ESC $ n1 n2  
Set Absolute Print Position:  
Specifies the distance from the current  
left margin where subsequent characters are to be printed. If the  
position specified is beyond the right margin, this command  
sequence is ignored and the previous settings remain in effect.  
Argument units are 1/60 Inch, expressed as n1 + (n2 x 256).  
Example:  
To establish a position 6.3 inches from the left margin:  
6.3 x 60 = 378 (total number of 1/60-tnch increments)  
378/256 =1 with a remainder of 122  
n1 = 122  
n2 = 1  
Expressed in BASIC this is:  
CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(122);CHR$(1);  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 36 (n1) (n2)  
1B 24 (n1H) (n2H)  
BASIC  
CHR$(27);"$";CHR$(nl);CHR$(n2);  
139  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC \ n1 n2  
Set Relative Print Position:  
Sets the position where printing will  
occur next relative to the current print position. Parameters n1 and  
n2 are in 1/120-inch increments and are expressed as n1 + (n2 x  
256). Parameter limits for n1 and n2 are 0-255.  
Example 1:  
If you want to move 4 inches to the right, then:  
4 x 120 = 480 (total number of 1/120-inch increments  
480/256 = 1 with a remainder of 224  
n1 = 224  
n2= 1  
Expressed In BASIC, this is:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(92);CHR$(224);CHR$(1);  
Example 2:  
If you want to move 4 inches to the left, then:  
65,536 - 480 = 65,056  
65,056/256 = 254 with a remainder of 32  
n1 - 32  
n2 – 254  
Expressed in BASIC, this is:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(92);CHR$(32);CHR$(254);  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 92 (n1) (n2)  
1B 5C (n1H) (n2H)  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(92);CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);  
ESC s n  
Turn Half-Speed Print Mode ON/OFF:  
Turns the half-speed print  
mode on or off according to the value of the parameter n below. Half  
speed printing is accomplished by only printing when the shuttle is  
moving from right to left.  
n=1  
n=0  
half-speed on  
half-speed off  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 115 n  
1B 73 nH  
BASIC CHR$(27);"s";CHR$(n);  
140  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINT MODES  
ESC - n  
Turn Underlining ON/OFF:  
Enables or disables automatic  
underlining depending on the parameter n as follows:  
n=1 enable underline  
n=0 disable underline  
The underline will be positioned on dot row 9 of draft characters and  
row 18 of NLQ characters. Block characters (ASCII 176-223, 244, and  
245) will not be underlined.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 45 (n)  
1B 2D (nH)  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(45);CHR$(n);  
ESC E  
Select Emphasized Mode:  
This causes subsequent printing to be  
emphasized. The print speed is half of the normal speed because the  
characters are printed twice. The second pass is offset about  
1/120-inch for draft fonts and 1/240-inch for NLQ fonts.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 69  
1B 45  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"E";  
ESC F  
ESC G  
Cancel Emphasized Print Mode:  
mode turned on by ESC E.  
Cancels the emphasized printing  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 70  
1B 46  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"F";  
Select Double-Strike Mode:  
Causes the contents of the print buffer  
to be printed and starts double-stroke printing when not in the NLQ  
mode. Each line of text is printed twice (direct overprint of each dot).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 71  
1B 47  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"G";  
ESC H  
Cancel Double-Strike Mode:  
Cancels the double-strike printing  
mode turned on by ESC G.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 72  
1B 48  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"H";  
141  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC S n  
Select Superscript/Subscript Printing:  
This sequence ends the  
current print buffer and causes its contents to be printed. In each  
mode, the character is shortened to half height and then positioned  
in the upper (superscripts or lower (subscript) half of the print line.  
These print modes are mutually exclusively. Selects superscript or  
subscript printing according to the value of n as follows:  
n=1  
n=0  
enable subscript  
enable superscript  
NOTE  
The superscript or subscript mode is not allowed when double-  
high print is selected. Either can be selected during double-  
high printing, but they will not take effect until the double-  
high mode is canceled.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 83 (n)  
1B 53 (nH)  
CHR$(27);"S";CHR$(n);  
ESC T  
Cancel Superscript/Subscript Printing:  
Cancels the superscript or  
subscript printing mode. Characters are printed at their normal size  
and previous baseline positions.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 84  
1B 54  
CHR$(27);"T";  
ESC SO  
Select Double-Wide Printing (1 Line):  
Performs the same function  
as the SO control code.  
Decimal 27 14  
Hex 1B 0E  
BASIC CHR$(27);CHR$(14);  
ESC W n  
Turn Double-Wide Printing Mode ON/OFF:  
Turns double-wide  
printing on or off according to the parameter n as follows:  
n=1  
n=0  
double-wide on  
double-wide off  
NOTE  
If double-wide had been turned on previously by the SO control  
code, this mode is canceled and the ESC W sequence has  
control.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 87 <n>  
1B 57 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"W<n>";  
142  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC w n  
Turn Double-High Printing ON/OFF:  
Turns double-high printing on  
or off according to the value of parameter n as follows:  
n=1  
n=0  
double-high on  
double-high off  
NOTE  
Superscript subscript. and condensed modes are not valid in the  
double-high mode.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 119 n  
1B 77 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"w";CHR$(n);  
ESC 4  
Select Italic Print Mode:  
Causes characters to be printed from the  
italic set. In the lower section of the character table (range 0-127  
decimal), all printable characters will print in the italics mode. In the  
upper section of the character table (range 128-255). the characters  
to be printed win be determined by the table selected (either by the  
ESC t (n) sequence or emulation strap 2. If italics has been selected  
for the upper section, they Will be duplicates of the 7-bit italic  
characters in the lower table (0-127). If, however, an 8-bit code page  
is selected, the characters will be 128-255 from the specified code  
page printed in italics.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 52  
1B 34  
CHR$(27);"4";  
ESC 5  
ESC 6  
Cancel Italic Mode:  
by the ESC 4 code.  
This command cancels the italic print mode set  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 53  
1B 35  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"5";  
Printable Code Area Expansion:  
This command enables the printing  
of codes 128-159 decimal as characters. If the upper section of the  
character table (range 128-255) has italics selected (ESC t or  
emulation option 2), the codes 128 through 159 win print from the  
international substitution characters. If, however, an 8-bit code page  
has been selected for the upper section of the table, characters will  
print from the selected code page.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 54  
1B 36  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"6";  
ESC 7  
Cancel Printable Code Page Expansion:  
Causes codes 128-159 to  
be executed as control codes, thereby canceling any previous ESC 6  
command.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 55  
1B 37  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"7";  
143  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC ! n  
Master Print Mode Select:  
Selects any valid combination of the  
printing modes listed below. The parameter n is equal to the sum of  
the decimal values associated with each mode. Note that pica and  
elite are mutually exclusive and proportional overrides condensed.  
Also, pica and elite proportional are the same. (See "Print Mode  
Combinations," page 7-2.)  
n
0
Effect  
Pica  
1
Elite  
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
Proportional  
Condensed  
Emphasized  
Double-Strike  
Double-Width  
Italic  
Underline  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 33  
1B 21  
CHR$(27);"1";CHR$(n);  
ESC k n  
Select Font Style:  
Selects the Roman (Courier) typeface if n is 0 and  
Sans Serif (Gothic) if n is 1. This command will not activate the  
selection. but sets the style to be activated by the ESC x (n) sequence.  
Refer to the "Functional Differences" section on page 7-4 for a  
description of typefaces used.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 107  
1B 6B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"k";CHR$(n);  
ESC x n  
Select NLQ or Draft Printing:  
Selects NLQ or draft printing. When  
selecting NLQ, the style will be the one that was last selected by the  
ESC k (n) sequence.  
n=1  
n=0  
NLQ  
draft  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 120  
1B 78 -  
CHR$(27);"x";CHR$(n);  
144  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL CHARACTER PRINTING  
ESC I n  
Printable Code Area Expansion:  
If n is binary or ASCII one, some  
ASCII codes between 0-31, and some or all codes between 128-159  
inclusive, become printable as characters. If ESC 6 has been sent  
prior to this command, then all of the characters between 128 and  
159 inclusive are printable. These characters come from the  
international character substitution set.  
Not all control codes between 0 and 31 inclusive can be made  
printable because if the ESC code became printable. For example, no  
more escape commands could be received. If the parameter n is  
binary or ASCII zero, these codes return to the non-printable state.  
Following is a chart showing an executed code between 0 and 31 and  
between 128 and 159 inclusive. If a control code can never be made  
into a printable character, the standard symbol for the code is  
printed instead of its ASCII number. To the right of these codes is the  
name of the character that is printed. Note that this chart assumes  
that an ESC 6 command has already been received and that the  
italics mode has been selected (via ESC t or emulation option 2) for  
the upper section of the table (range 128-255). Otherwise,  
control codes such as FF, CR etc. would be executed in the region  
128-159 inclusive instead of printing an international character. This  
sequence causes some ASCII codes between 0-31, and some or all  
codes between 128-159 inclusive, to become printable as characters  
when n is 1. When n is 0, these ASCII codes are non-printing  
characters.  
EXECUTED ASCII CODE  
Range 1  
Decimal  
Range 2  
Hex  
Decimal  
Hex  
Character Printed  
grave a (à)  
0
1
00  
01  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
8A  
8B  
8C  
8D  
8E  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
grave e (è)  
2
02  
grave u (ù)  
3
03  
grave o (ò)  
4
04  
grave i (ì)  
5
05  
angstrom (°)  
U.K. pound symbol (£)  
Inverted ! (¡)  
Inverted ? (¿)  
tilde N (Ñ)  
6
06  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
VT  
FF  
CR  
SO  
SI  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
tilde n (ñ)  
VT  
int'l monetary sym ( )  
pesetas  
FF  
CR  
SO  
SI  
angstrom A (Å)  
angstrom a (å)  
cedilla c (ç)  
16  
17  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
10  
section mark (§)  
eszet  
11  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
AE diphthong (Æ)  
ae diphthong (æ)  
slashed O (Ø)  
145  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXECUTED ASCII CODE  
Range 2  
Range 1  
Decimal  
Hex  
Decimal  
Hex  
Character Printed  
slashed o (ø)  
umlaut accent (¨)  
umlaut A (Ä)  
umlaut O (Ö)  
umlaut U (Ü)  
umlaut a (ä)  
umlaut o (ö)  
umlaut u (ü)  
acute E (É)  
21  
22  
15  
16  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
9A  
9B  
9C  
9D  
9E  
9F  
23  
17  
CAN  
25  
CAN  
19  
26  
1A  
ESC  
28  
ESC  
1C  
1D  
1E  
29  
30  
acute e (é)  
31  
1F  
yen sign (¥)  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 73 n  
1B 49 nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"I";CHR$(n);  
ESC R n  
Selects the International Character Set:  
Selects the international  
character substitution set for the ASCH codes between 35 and 126  
decimal inclusive. The following parameters define which substitution  
set is selected.  
n
0
Country  
USA  
1
France  
2
3
Germany  
UK  
4
5
Denmark I  
Sweden  
6
Italy  
7
Spain I  
8
Japan  
9
Norway  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Denmark  
Spain II  
Latin America  
Netherlands  
Anglo-Universal  
Spanish America  
Portugal  
Africa  
Switzerland  
Turkey  
Greece  
Yugoslavia  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 82 n  
1B 52 nH  
BASIC CHR$(27);"R";CHR$(n);  
146  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC t n  
Select a Code Page:  
Selects one of four variables that contains a  
specific code page selection. The four variables are loaded via the  
ESC ( t and the ESC [T sequences. The four variables are identified as  
0,1,2. and 3 (either binary or ASCII values). This command overrides  
the condition set by the CCU menu . Note that italics print can be  
selected by using the ESC 4 command even if the eight bit code page  
table has been selected.  
The four selection variables have the following defaults:  
n
0
1
2
3
Effect  
No code page (italics 0-128 in upper table  
USA code page 437  
No code page (italics 0-128 in upper table  
USA code page 437  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 116 <n>  
1 B 74 <n>  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"t<n>";  
ESC ( t, n1 n2  
m1 m2 m3  
Assign a Code Page to One of Four Variables (0, 1, 2, or 3):  
Assigns a specific code page to one of the four selection variables  
used by the ESC t sequence (either the binary or ASCII value can be  
used for ml). Listed below are the values for m2 and m3 required to  
assign specific code pages to the select variable ml.  
Note that this sequence is similar to the ESC ( T sequence except that  
fewer code page choices are available. Also when using this  
command, assignments can be made to any of the four different  
select variables used by the ESC t sequence.  
Hex Values  
Character Table  
m2  
x00  
x01  
x03  
x05  
x06  
x07  
x08  
x09  
x0A  
x0B  
x0D  
x0E  
x0F  
x10  
x01  
x2C  
x1D  
m3  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x00  
x10  
x00  
x0F  
Italic (0-127)  
PC 437 (USA)  
PC 850 (Multilingual)  
PC 853 (Turkish)  
PC 855 (Cyrillic)  
PC 860 (Portuguese)  
PC 863 (Canada-French)  
PC 865 (Norway)  
PC 852 (East Europe)  
PC 867 (Turkish)  
PC 864 (Arabic)  
PC 866 (Russian)  
PC 869 (Greek)  
USSR GOST (Russian)  
PC 437 (Greek  
858  
8859-15  
Some code pages might not be available in all font sets. If the  
sequence specifies a code page that is not currently installed, the  
sequence is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 40 116 3 0 m1 m2 m3  
1B 28 74 3 0 m1H m2H m3H  
CHR$(27);"[t";CHR$(3);CHR$(0);CHR$(m1)  
CHR$(m2);CHR$(m3);  
147  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC ( T nl n2  
m1...m5  
Assign a Code Page to Variable 1:  
Assigns a code page to (n2)(m1)  
the 1 variable used by the ESC t sequence. Note that this sequence is  
very similar to the ESC ( t sequence except that variable 1 is the only  
variable that can accept a code page assignment. Also, more code  
page choices are available by using this sequence rather than the  
ESC ( t sequence.  
If a code page is selected that is not supported by the current font set  
or an invalid parameter is received, the sequence will be discarded  
and the multilingual code page will remain unchanged. Some code  
pages might not be available in a specific set of firmware. If the  
sequence specifies a code page that is not currently installed, the  
sequence is ignored.  
Parameters n1, n2, and ml through m3 are discarded by the  
emulation; however, they must appear in the sequence and represent  
some value (or zero).  
The following table lists the parameters required to select the  
different code pages.  
m4 m3  
Code Page  
No change from current setting  
Code page 437 (USA)  
Code page 850 (multilingual)  
Code page 852  
Code page 853 (Cyrillic)  
Code page 857  
Code page 860  
00  
01  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
03  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
21  
17  
03  
00  
B5  
52  
54  
55  
59  
5C  
61  
62  
63  
65  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7F  
80  
81  
82  
8F  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
1B  
5A  
Code page 865 (Norway)  
Code page 866 (Russian)  
Code page 867  
Code page 869  
USSR GOST (Russian)  
Code page 437 (Greek)  
DEC multinational (LA-210)  
Roman 8  
Mazowia (Polish)  
Turkey  
Greece  
ISO 8859-1 Western Europe  
ISO 8859-2 Eastern Europe  
ISO 8859-3 Southern Europe  
ISO 8859-4 Northern Europe  
ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic  
ISO 8859-6 Arabic  
ISO 8859-7 Greek  
ISO 8859-8 Hebrew  
ISO 8859-9 Southern Europe 2  
ISO 8859-15  
Code Page 858  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 84 n1 n2 m1 ... m5  
1B 5B 54 n1H n2H m1H ... m5H  
CHR$(27);"[T";CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);  
CHR$(m1); . . .;CHR$(m5)  
148  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS  
ESC #  
Cancel MSB (Most Significant Bit) Control:  
Cancels the most  
significant bit control set by either ESC = or ESC >.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 35  
1B 23  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"#";  
ESC =  
Set Most Significant Bit (MSB) to Zero:  
Sets the most significant bit  
of all incoming data to zero. This command has no effect on graphics  
or user-defined characters.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 61  
1B 3D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"=";  
ESC >  
ESC @  
Set Most Significant Bit (MSB) to One:  
Sets the most significant bit  
of all incoming data to one. This command has no effect on graphics  
or user-defined characters.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 62  
1B 3E  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);">";  
Initialize Printer:  
Flushes all data in the print buffer preceding the  
command and then initializes the printer. Does not change straps,  
pitch, or print quality.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 64  
1B 40  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"@";  
149  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FX-286E DOT GRAPHICS  
Dot graphics allows you to print individual dots at any position on  
the page, and thus to print pictures as well as text. While in graphics  
mode, emphasized, double-strike. expanded, underlined, subscript  
and superscript remain as set, but are inactive.  
The FX-286e printer doesn't adjust the line feed increment  
automatically on entering graphics. If contiguous vertical graphics is  
desired, then set the line feed increment to 8/72 inch before starting  
graphics and then reset it when finished. See Line Spacing  
Commands on page 134.  
An FX-286e graphics control sequence starts with an escape  
combination that sets the graphics density (ESC K, L, Y, or Z).  
followed by a 2-byte header that shows the number of subsequent  
bytes that are to be interpreted as graphics data. The format of the  
sequence is:  
ESC (density) (n1) W) (data) ... (data)  
Since this control sequence has no terminator, you need to specify  
exactly in the header the number of bytes that you want to be  
interpreted as graphics. If there are fewer graphics data bytes than  
specified in the header, then the printer treats subsequent text and  
control codes as graphics. In that case, carriage returns and line  
feeds are often ingested as graphics data.  
On the other hand, if there are more graphics data bytes than  
specified in the header, then the printer interprets excess bytes as  
text or control codes. Mils can also produce very interesting results.  
Specifying Graphics Line Length  
The two bytes (n1, n2) specify the total number of image bytes that  
follow; n2 is the most significant byte.  
total number of image data bytes = n1 + (n2 x 256)  
Example:  
To print 5 inches of graphics at ESC K density, which is 60  
dpi, then:  
total number of bytes = 5 inches x 60 dpi - 300  
300/256 = 1 with a remainder of 44  
n1 = 44  
n2 = 1  
The sequence sent to the printer (shown in BASIC) would look like:  
CHR$(27);CHR$"K";CHR$(44);CHR$(1);CHR$(v1);. . . CHR$(v300);  
where v1 through v3OO are image data bytes.  
150  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Data Bytes  
The FX-286e printer supports both 8-pin and 9-pin vertical formats.  
Since this emulation supports only 8-pin graphics, 9-pin graphics  
will not be explained or illustrated here. When 9-pin graphics are  
sent to this printer. the byte containing the 9th bit is discarded.  
Each image data byte represents a vertical column of eight dots. The  
most significant of the eight bits controls the top pin of a column and  
the least significant bit controls the bottom pin of that column The  
first byte of data (v1) Is the first column (v2) is the second column,  
and so on. The illustration below shows byte values of various dot  
combinations.  
Weight  
Wire  
Graphics Dot Pattern  
128  
1
! ! !  
! ! !  
64  
32  
16  
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
4
!
!
2
1
! ! !  
0
0
0
112 136 132 130 65 49 65 130 132 136 112  
0
0
Image Byte Values  
Graphics Programming Example  
100 WIDTH "LPT1:",255  
110 FOR N - 1 TO 4  
115 LPRINT CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(80);CHR$(0);  
120 FOR K - 1 TO 5  
140 LPRINT CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(0);CHR$(112);  
150 LPRINT CHR$(136);CHR$(132);CHR$(130);  
160 LPRINT CHR$(65);CHR$(49);CHR$(65);  
170 LPRINT CHR$(130).CHR$(132);CHR$(136);  
180 LPRINT CHR$(112);CHR$(0):CHR$(0);  
190 NEXT K  
200 PRINT  
210 NEXT N  
220 LPRINT "DONE"  
230 END  
Printed Results of Sample Program  
151  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FX-286E DOT GRAPHICS CONTROL SEQUENCES  
ESC K n1 n2 v1...vn Normal Density Graphics:  
Sets a density of 60 dpi horizontally and  
72 dpi vertically.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 75 n1 n2 v1...vn  
1B 4B n1H n2H v1H...vnH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);CHR$(v1);...;  
CHR$(vn);  
ESC L n1 n2 v1...vn Low-Speed Double-Density Graphics:  
Sets a density of 120 dpi  
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. If horizontally-adjacent dots are  
sent, they will be printed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 76 n1 n2 v1. vn  
1B 4C v1H ... vnH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"L";CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);CHR$(v1);...;  
CHR$(vn);  
ESC Y n1 n2 v1...vn High-Speed Double-Density Graphics:  
Sets a density of 120 dpi  
horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. If horizontally adjacent dots are  
sent, they will be printed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 89 n1 n2 v1 ... vn  
1B 59 n1H n2H v1H ... vnH  
CHR$(27);"Y";CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);CHR$(v1);...;  
CHR$(vn);  
ESC Z n1 n2 v1...vn Quadruple-Density Graphics (Reduced Speed):  
Sets a density of  
240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. If horizontally adjacent  
dots are sent. they will be printed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 90 n1 n2 v1 ... vn  
1B 5A n1H n2H v1H v2H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"Z";CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);CHR$(v1) ... (v2)  
152  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESC * m n1 n2  
v1...vn  
Select Graphics Mode:  
Selects graphics mode m (see table below) for  
n1 + (n2 x 256) columns. The variables n1 and n2 represent the  
number of data bytes to be sent that will be interpreted as graphics.  
If the number of graphics columns to be printed causes printing to  
exceed the right margin, all data beyond that margin will be ignored.  
m
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Graphics Mode  
Single-density  
Double-density  
High-speed double-density  
Quadruple-density  
CRT I  
Plotter (1:1)  
CRT II  
Double-density plotter  
DPI  
60  
120  
120  
240  
120  
60  
120  
120  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 42 n1 n2 v1...vn  
1B 2A n1H n2H v1H...vnH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"*";CHR$(m);CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);  
CHR$(v1);...;CHR$(vn);  
ESC ? s n  
Reassign Graphics Mode:  
Reassigns the dot density to the graphics  
mode specified by ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y, or ESC Z.  
s=K, L, Y, or Z  
n=dot density (see values below)  
Horizontal  
dpi  
Vertical  
dpi  
72  
n
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
60  
120  
120  
240  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
80 (120)  
72 (60)  
90 (120)  
144 (120)  
NOTE  
The emulation converts the values corresponding to n4 through n7  
to the ones shown in parenthesis.  
Example:  
Normally, when the printer receives the ESC L command, the dot  
density is 120 dpi x 72 dpi vertical. By using this command, you can  
reassign that density to 60 dpi horizontal x 72 dpi vertical by sending  
the following:  
CHR$(27);"?";"I";CHR$(0);  
153  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After the command is sent, the ESC L command then causes the  
horizontal density to be 60 dpi instead of 120 dpi.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 63 n  
1B 3F nH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"?";CHR$(s);CHR$(n);  
ESC ^ m n1 n2  
Select 9-Pin Graphics:  
Turns on the 9-bit graphics mode for  
n1+(n2 x 256) columns. The variable m determines the density as  
follows:  
NOTE  
This emulation does not support the 9-bit operation. The  
byte containing the 9th bit is discarded and only the top  
eight bits are used.  
m=1 double density  
m=0 single density  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 94 m n1 n2  
1B 5E m n1 n2  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"^";CHR$(m);CHR$(nl);CHR$(n2);  
154  
Chapter 6. Epson FX286-E Emulation  
GEK-00029A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 7. DEC LG / COMPAQ LG PLUS  
EMULATION  
CONTROL CODE DEFINITIONS  
The control codes are single character action codes in the range  
0 - 31 decimal in the ASCII code chart. The following are those codes,  
which are relevant to this emulation.  
BEL  
BS  
Bell:  
The printer's audible alarm will sound for 1/2 second when the  
bell code is received by the printer.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
7
07H  
CHR$(7);  
Backspace (08H):  
The backspace code will set the active print position  
one character position to the left at the current CPI, unless the new  
location precedes the left margin. In this case, the active position will  
be set to the left margin.  
Indeterminate conditions:  
If the right margin has been exceeded  
the backspace is ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
8
08H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(8);  
HT  
Horizontal Tab:  
HT will set the active print position to the next  
horizontal tab position.  
Indeterminate conditions:  
If there are tab(s) set but no tab(s) are  
set between the active print position and the right margin, the active  
print position will advance to the right margin.  
If there are no tabs set, the active print position will advance to the  
right margin.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
9
09H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(9);  
NOTE  
The emulation initially sets a horizontal tab stop every eight  
characters.  
LF  
Line Feed (0AH):  
Line terminator. LF will advance the active print  
position to the next line. If the enabled via the menu, the printer will  
execute a carriage return prior to executing the LF.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
10  
0AH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(10);  
155  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VT  
Vertical Tab:  
Line terminator. The active print position will be set to  
the next vertical tab stop.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If there are no vertical tabs set, the active position will be advanced to  
the bottom margin. If there are no more tabs set between the current  
position and the bottom margin the active position will be set to the  
top margin on the next form.  
NOTE  
The emulation initially sets a vertical tab stop for every line on  
the page.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
11  
0BH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(11);  
FF  
Form Feed:  
Line terminator. The active print position will be set to  
the top margin of the next form If the appropriate printer control  
switch is set, the printer will execute a carriage return immediately  
prior to executing the form feed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
12  
0CH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(12);  
CR  
Carriage Return:  
Line terminator. CR will return the active print  
position to the left margin. If the enabled by menu selection, the printer  
will execute a line feed immediately after executing the CR.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
13  
0DH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(13);  
SO  
SI  
Shift Out:  
Shift Out locks character set G1 into GL.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
14  
0EH  
CHR$(14);  
Shift In:  
Shift In locks character set G0 into GL.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
15  
0FH  
CHR$(15);  
DC1  
Device Control 1:  
Serial interface only: If READY/BUSY controlled by  
DC1/DC3 has been enabled via the printer configuration menu, the  
printer will transmit DC1 when its receive buffer reaches the low trip  
point.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
DC1 applies to the serial interface only. It is ignored if DC1/DC3  
READY/BUSY is not enabled.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
17  
11H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(17)  
156  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DC3  
Device Control 3:  
DC3 applies to the serial interface only. If  
READY/BUSY by DC1/DC3 has been enabled via the printer  
configuration menu, the printer will transmit a DC3 when its receive  
buffer reaches the high trip point.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
DC3 is ignored if DC1/DC3 READY/BUSY is not enabled.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
19  
13H  
CHR$(19);  
CAN  
Cancel:  
CAN immediately ends an escape or control sequence. The  
printer interprets the characters following CAN as normal text. CAN  
also cancels a Device Control String when received within the command  
string of that DCS.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
24  
18H  
BASIC:  
CHR$(24);  
SUB  
ESC  
Substitute:  
Sub immediately ends an escape or control sequence.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Sub prints as a space character for sixel graphics data.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
26  
1AH  
CHR$(26);  
Escape:  
ESC introduces an escape or control sequence.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If ESC is received in the middle of a sequence, the sequence is  
immediately ended and a new sequence is started. ESC also  
immediately ends a Device Control String.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27  
1BH  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);  
157  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMANDS  
The control sequence introducer (CSI) signals the beginning of an  
ANSI control sequence that may accept parameters. In the 7-bit  
environment, ESC [ is used. In the 8-bit environment, either ESC [or  
the single code 9B may be used. 8-bit control is menu selectable.  
When the printer recognizes that the escape sequence is invalid or is  
not implemented, it will discard the characters received up to that  
point. Subsequent printable codes will be printed.  
In the 7-bit environment, an escape sequence is defined as a group of  
two or more characters, beginning with the ASCII code 1B  
(hexadecimal), which invokes a given printer function.  
In the 8-bit environment, an escape sequence is defined as a single  
character code which has its most significant bit set, or a group of  
two or more characters beginning with the ASCII code 9B  
(hexadecimal). When the parallel interface is used, the 8-bit  
environment is always available. For the serial interface, single  
character 8-bit controls are available if the interface has been set for  
eight data bits via the printer menu. For either interface, single  
character 8-bit controls must be enabled by menu selection.  
Unless stated otherwise, any sequence received with illegal parameter(s)  
will be ignored, however, their use is discouraged as this may cause  
incompatibilities with future products.  
IND  
Index:  
IND moves the active position down to the same position on the  
next line.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the new position is below the bottom margin, the active position  
moves to the top of the next page.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 68 or 132  
1B 44 or 84  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(68) or CHR$(132);  
NEL  
Next Line:  
NEL moves the active position to the left margin on the next  
line.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the new position is below the bottom margin, the active position  
moves to the top of the next page.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 69 or 133  
1B 45 or 85  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(69) or CHR$(133);  
158  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HTS  
Horizontal Tab Set:  
A horizontal tab will be set at the current print  
position.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the maximum number of stops (32) is already set when a new one  
is programmed, the new one will be inserted and the rightmost tab  
stop removed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 72 or 136  
1B 48 or 88  
CHR$(27);CHR$(72); or CHR$(136);  
VTS  
Vertical Tab Set:  
A vertical tab will be set at the current vertical  
position.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If there is an attempt to set more than the maximum number of tab  
stops allowed, only the stops nearest the top of sheet are retained.  
Stops that have been set for forms longer in length than the currently  
programmed form are not usable. Resetting the forms length to  
include those stops will cause the stops to again become active.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 74 or 138  
1B 4A or 8A  
CHR$(27);CHR$(74);  
PLD  
Partial Line Down:  
The active vertical position will move downward by  
one half of the current line feed distance to create an appearance of  
subscripting. The ESC K sequence is also used to effect recovery to the  
original active vertical position following an ESC L (partial line up  
sequence) code sequence.  
Indeterminate conditions  
If the command exceeds the bottom of form position, the command  
will be ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 76 or 139  
1B 4B or 8B  
CHR$(27);"K";  
PLU  
Partial Line Up (1B 4C or 8CH):  
The active vertical position will move  
upward by one half of the current line feed distance to create an  
appearance of superscripting. (See ESC K above). The ESC L sequence  
is also used to effect recovery to the original active vertical position  
following the ESC K (partial line down sequence) code sequence.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the command exceeds the top of form position, the command will  
be ignored.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 77 or 140  
1B 4C or 8C  
CHR$(27);CHR$(77); or CHR$(140);  
159  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RI  
Reverse Index:  
Moves the active line position up to the same position  
on the preceding line. The Reverse Index command causes the active  
position to stop at the top of the margin.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 78 or 141  
1B 4D or 8D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(78); or CHR$(141);  
SS2  
SS3  
DCS  
Single Shift 2:  
one character.  
Temporarily moves character set G2 into GL to print  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 69 or 142  
1B 4E or 8E  
CHR$(27);"N"  
Single Shift 3  
: Temporarily moves character set G3 into GL to print  
one character.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 70  
1B 4F or 8F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"O"; or CHR$(143);  
Device Control String  
: Introduces a device control string.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
A DCS control character received in an escape sequence, control  
sequence, or control string aborts the sequence and begins a new  
device control string.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 80 or 144  
1B 50 or 90  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"P"; or CHR$(144);  
CSI  
Control String Introducer  
: Introduces a sequence of one or more  
bytes that constitute a control function.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91 or 155  
1B 5B or 9B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(91); or CHR$(155);  
Indeterminate Conditions  
A CSI control character received in an escape, control sequence, or  
control string aborts the sequence and begins a new device control  
string.  
ST  
String Terminator  
: Indicates the end of a device control string (DCS).  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 92 or 156  
1B 5C or 9C  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(92); or CHR$(156);  
160  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OSC  
Operating System Command  
: OSC introduces an Operating System  
Command String. OSC control strings are ignored  
Indeterminate Conditions  
The start of this control string is recognized but all of the data that  
follows is ignored until this sequence is either aborted or terminated  
by an ST sequence.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 93 or 157  
1B 5D or 9D  
CHR$(27);CHR$(93); or CHR$(157);  
PM  
Privacy Message  
: Introduces a Privacy Message control String. PM  
control strings are ignored.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
The start of this control string is recognized but all of the data that  
follows is ignored until this sequence is either aborted or terminated  
by an ST sequence.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 94 or 158  
1B 5E or 9E  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(94); or CHR$158);  
APC  
Application Program Command  
: APC introduces an Application  
Program Command String. APC control strings are ignored  
Indeterminate Conditions  
The start of this control string is recognized but all of the data that  
follows is ignored until this sequence is either aborted or terminated  
by an ST sequence.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 95 or 159  
1B 5F or 9F  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);CHR$(9F); or CHR$(159);  
DECIPEM  
IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode  
: Selects the Proprinter emulation.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
155 63 53 56 104  
9B 3F 35 38 68  
CHR$(155);"?";"5";"8";"h";  
161  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SGR (n1)(n2)... m  
Select Graphics Rendition  
: This sequence will select the Font (mode  
and character style) by using one or more of the following parameters:  
0
1
Normal Printing Mode (Default)  
Bold Print Mode  
4
Underline Mode  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
21  
22  
24  
53  
55  
Default (Data Processing)  
Correspondence  
OCR-A  
OCR-B  
Data Processing  
High speed draft  
Data Processing  
Correspondence  
Data Processing  
Near Letter Quality  
Double Underline Mode (uses normal underline mode)  
Cancel Bold Mode  
Cancel Underline Mode  
Overscore mode  
Cancel overscore  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
155 n1 n2 ... m  
9B n1H h2H ... 6D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(155);CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);...;"m";  
DECRLGS  
Request Logo Status  
: This command applies to the serial interface  
only. It requests a status report of the logos available for printing.  
The logo string contains a list of all the valid logos loaded in the  
printer and their comment strings. Each logo number and comment  
start on a new line, separated by commas.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
155 23 112  
9B 27 70  
CHR$(155);CHR$(23);CHR$(112);  
Reply:  
DCS &w (logo #) (string) ST  
90 26 77 (logo #) (string) 9C  
NOTE  
This command works only when the printer is connected to the  
host through the serial interface.  
162  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECRFS  
Request Font Status  
: Requests a status report of the fonts available  
for printing, the memory available for loading forms and logos, or both.  
The Ps parameters are defined as:  
0
1
2
Send both reports (default)  
Send status of ROM fonts  
Send amount of RAM available for forms and logos.  
Discussion:  
The reply to a DECRFS with a Ps parameter of 1 will not  
contain an ID string in this implementation. The nnn within the reply  
to a DECRFS with a Ps parameter of 2 represents decimal number  
indicating the number of bytes of RAM available for storing forms and  
logos.  
Replies:  
Reply with Ps = 1:  
Reply with Ps = 2:  
Reply with Ps = 0:  
<DCS>1”{ <ST>  
90 31 22 7B 9C  
<DCS>2”(nnn) <ST>  
90 32 22 (nnn) 9C  
<DCS>1”{ <ST><DCS>2”(nnn) <ST>  
90 31 22 7B 9C 90 32 22 (nnn) 9C  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
155 Ps 59 Ps 34 123  
9B PsH 3B PsH 22 7B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(155);CHR$(Ps);CHR$(59);CHR$(Ps);CHR$(34);  
CHR$(123);  
NOTE  
This command works only when the printer is connected to the  
host through the serial interface.  
163  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECDLG  
Delete Logo Sequence:  
Delete logo from printer  
memory. P1 defines the logos to be deleted.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
When P1 = 0, P2 through Pn make up the ID of the logos to be  
deleted.  
When P1 = 3, All stored logos are deleted.  
Deleting a logo within a form is not allowed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
155 P1 59 P2 59 ... Pn 59 38 124  
9B P1H 3B P2H 3B ... PnH 3B 26 7C  
CHR$(155);CHR$(P1);CHR$(59);CHR$(P2);CHR$(59);  
...;CHR$(Pn);CHR$(59);"&|";  
DECILG  
Select Logo Sequence:  
Prints the selected logo contained in printer  
defines the ID of the selected logo.  
Pn  
memory.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If no logo exists for the ID specified, the sequence is ignored.  
At the end of a select logo sequence, the cursor remains in the  
starting position.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
155 Pn 38 125  
9B PnH 26 7D  
CHR$(155);CHR$(Pn);"&}";  
164  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECLFM  
Loading Forms Sequence:  
Allows forms to be loaded and stored into  
printer memory.  
General Command Syntax  
DCS P1;P2&p record ST  
P1  
(must be 0)  
specifies the form file format.  
P1 = 0 LG-series printer logo file format.  
P1 0 Sequence is ignored.  
P2  
defines the replacement action.  
P2 = 0 Replace the named form.  
P2 = 3 Replace all forms.  
Record  
The record includes the form header that defines form parameters  
and size, and the form data string.  
ID Length =  
Two digit number (01 through 99) that defines  
the length of the form ID.  
Form ID  
=String of one to 99 printable characters that identify  
the form.  
CNTL Encoding Character  
= Indicates the start of control-  
character encoding. The character is always in the range of 20  
through 7E hex, and is followed by a two-digit hexadecimal  
number equivalent to the ASCII value of the control character to  
be encoded. When a control character is required within the  
form data, the control character must be entered in its  
hexadecimal format and preceded by the CNTL encoding  
character.  
Form Data Switch Character  
= Designates the insertion of the  
form’s fill-in data. The character is always in the range from 20  
through 7E hex. The form-data switch character must be  
different from the control-character encoding character. The  
form data switch character is not printable within the form and  
should not be used in any control sequence in the form.  
Form Length  
= A five-digit number, 00001 through 65,535,  
that defines the length of the string that follows. The string  
count includes all characters other than uncoded control  
characters 0 through 1F hex.  
Form Data String  
= Form data is a string of text and command  
sequences with encoded control characters. Terminate the  
ST (ESC \ or decimal 156)  
string with a  
command.  
165  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECFLM  
(continued)  
Sample DECFLM Sequence  
04Memo%@00234  
ESC P 0 ; 3 & p  
ESC \  
record  
P1  
P2  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
144  
P1  
59 38 112  
P2 record  
26 70  
156  
9C  
90  
3B  
BASIC:  
CHR$(144);CHR$(P1);CHR$(59);CHR$(P2);"&p";  
record;CHR$(156);  
NOTE  
The forms remain selectable until new forms are loaded using  
the replace all command, another form with the same number  
is loaded, or if the printer power is turned off.  
DECDFM  
Delete Forms Sequence:  
Deletes forms from printer memory.  
General Command Syntax  
Ps forms id  
DCS  
& q  
ST  
Ps = 0 Delete form that matches the forms id string.  
Ps = 3 Delete all stored forms.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
The FORM ID string identifies the forms to be deleted. If more than  
one Form ID is listed, separate them with semicolons. Form Ids with  
more than ten characters are ignored.  
If you try to delete a form while it is printing, the printer will ignore  
the delete command.  
Ps  
38 113 FORMS ID 156  
90 PsH 26 71 FORMS ID 9C  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
144  
BASIC:  
CHR$(144);CHR$(ps);”Sq”;forms id;CHR$(156);  
166  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECIFM  
Start Forms Sequence:  
Selects any form loaded in the printer’s RAM.  
When a form is selected, the printer enters Form Mode and variable ‘fill-  
in’ data is merged and printed with the form data.  
General Command Syntax  
P1  
FORM NAME  
DCS  
& r  
ST  
Indeterminate Conditions  
P1 is the select form switch character. The select form switch  
character always ranges from 20 hex through 7E hex and designates  
the printer to switch back to form data. When the printer encounters  
a FF character in the form data portion of a multiple page form, it  
advances to the next page and continues merging with the fill-in data  
that follows. If there is more than one set of fill-in data, the same  
form constant data is merged with the new fill-in data to create  
additional forms.  
FORM NAME  
The  
is the first ten characters of the loaded form’s ID  
(or the full form ID if it is ten characters or less in length). If no such  
form exists, the fill-in data is printed as text data.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
144 P1 38 114 FORM NAME 156  
P1H  
FORM NAME  
90  
26 72  
9C  
BASIC:  
CHR$(144);P1;”&r”;”FORM NAME”;CHR$(156);  
NOTE  
The text and command strings corresponding to the last field  
of a multi-page form page must terminate with a switch  
character. The last field in the last page of a form must  
terminate with the Stop Form sequence and not with the  
switch character. To exit the FORM Mode, enter a Terminate  
sequence.  
167  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIXEL Sixel Graphics:  
This sequence provides a group of 6 bit bytes to  
be used as vertical graphics data. A bit value of 1 means print a pixel,  
while a bit value of 0 means leave a blank. The Device Control String  
(DCS) envelope contains the graphics introducer and all graphics data.  
This envelope is initiated using the DCS control character and is  
terminated with the String Terminator (ST) control character. The Sixel  
protocol components are made up of the String Introducer, Protocol  
Selector, Picture Data, and String Terminator. The Protocol Selector  
consists of a string of 0, 1 or more numeric parameters separated by  
the semicolon character (3BH).  
The overall command format is the following:  
Ps1 Ps2 Ps3  
Psn Sixel data  
ST  
DCS  
;
;
q
The Protocol Selector is that portion of the form:  
Ps1 Ps2 Pn3  
Pn  
;
Hex:  
Ps1  
;
q.  
Ps1  
Ps2  
Pn3  
Pn  
q <sixel data> 9C  
90  
3B  
3B  
selects the horizontal grid size and aspect ratio, this will  
implicitly define the vertical grid size. The following table defines the  
parameter selections.  
Horizontal  
DPI  
100  
100  
200  
200  
100  
100  
67  
Vertical  
DPI  
50  
Aspect  
Ratio  
Ps1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
200:100  
200:100  
400:100  
300:100  
250:100  
200:100  
150:100  
120:100  
110:100  
100:100  
50  
50  
65  
40  
50  
45  
55  
45  
67  
50  
50  
8
9
50  
Ps2  
Ps3  
is the background select parameter. It is not used by this printer.  
selects the horizontal grid size in decipoints. This parameter,  
used with the aspect ratio, defines grid size. The following table  
identifies the horizontal grid size used for each parameter value.  
Horizontal  
Ps3  
0
1
DPI  
No Change  
240  
2
240  
3
240  
4
180  
5
140  
6
7
120  
120  
8
90  
9
90  
10  
11-19  
70  
60  
168  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECLLG  
Loading Logo Sequence:  
A graphic image is downloaded and stored  
in printer memory.  
General Command Syntax  
P1 P2  
record  
ST  
DCS  
& t  
P1  
P2  
specifies the logo file format. (must be 0)  
P1 = 0 LG-series printer logo file format.  
lists the logos to be deleted.  
P2 = 0 Delete all logos.  
P2 = n Delete any logo with the same Logo ID (n).  
Record  
The record includes the logo header and the graphic row records  
used to print the image.  
ID Length  
= One digit number (1 through 4) that defines the  
length of the logo ID.  
Logo ID  
= String of one to four numerals that identify the  
logo.  
Comment Length  
= One digit number (0 through 7) that  
defines the length of the comment field.  
Logo Length  
= A five digit number (00001 through 65535)  
that defines the length of the logo record.  
Row Records  
= R;S;N1;N2;…\  
R = Height of the segment in mils.  
S = Row starting color. ( 0=white, 1=black)  
N1: N2 = Length of segment in mils.  
\ = Row terminator.  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Logos can be loaded at any time except during another download  
operation and during a form printing operation. When loaded, they  
are available until they are replaced, deleted, or the printer power is  
turned off.  
The start row color, defined within the Row Record, will switch with  
each subsequent segment printed.  
P1  
P2  
record  
26 74  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
144  
P1H  
59  
3B  
38 116  
P2H  
156  
record  
90  
9C  
P1  
P2  
recor  
BASIC:  
CHR$(144); ;CHR$(59); ;”&t”;” d”;CHR$(156);  
NOTE  
The logo length includes all characters other than C0 control  
characters (0 through 1F hex).  
169  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECAUPSS  
Assign User Preference Supplemental Set:  
Assigns several of the  
ISO and special character sets to the User Preference Supplemental  
Set. The following table lists the UPS Character Sets.  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
D … D  
DCS  
! u  
ST  
UPS Character Sets  
Character Set  
Ps D…D  
DEC Supplemental  
0
1
1
0
1
1
%5  
A
H
>
F
b
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental  
ISO Latin-Hebrew Supplemental  
DEC Technical  
ISO Latin-Greek Supplemental  
ISO Latin-9 Supplemental  
Ps  
D … D  
D…D  
Decimal:  
144  
Ps  
! u  
21 75  
ST  
9C  
Hex  
:
90  
BASIC:  
CHR$(144);Ps;”!u”;”D…D”;CHR$(156);  
NOTE  
If values for Ps and D…D are selected other than those in the  
table above, this command will be ignored.  
DECBARC  
Start Bar Coding:  
Generates bar codes using data that follows the  
sequence. Bar code parameters are defined by the last DECSBCA  
sequence. The printer continues to encode bar codes until it receives  
the Stop Bar Code sequence.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC % SP 0  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Bar codes that extend beyond the margins are truncated.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 37 32 48  
1B 25 20 30  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”% 0“;  
170  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECTFM  
Terminate Forms Sequence:  
Terminates the printing of a form.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC # SP 1”  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If no form is selected, this sequence is ignored. Many special  
conditions might affect the printer output see the note below for  
further information.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 19 32 49  
1B 23 20 31  
CHR$(27);”# 1”;  
Notes  
The following commands are not to be included in the form data or  
fill-in data:  
Load a form or logo  
Delete a form or logo  
Invoke a Digital sequence  
Invoke an ESC sequence. This will exit you from the Form Mode.  
The following conditions will affect the output or performance:  
Encoded escape cannot start in the form and continue in the fill-  
in data, nor can the reverse occur.  
Changes mode to the font, cursor position, density, or mode are  
not restored after you terminate a Form Sequence.  
Block characters used in a form must begin and end on the same  
page.  
Since mode settings, fonts, and spacing parameters can be  
changed between the time the form is loaded and the item is  
selected, the environment of the form (PUM or SSU) should be  
established in the form data.  
If ESC, CAN, or SUB is embedded in the form string, it will  
terminate form loading and the form will be discarded. Encoding  
DCS, RIS, CAN, or SUB in a form string will also stop form  
loading.  
If the form length in the header does not agree with the length of  
the form string received, the form is discarded. If the form is not  
terminated by a Form Feed, and does not contain at least one  
form-switch character, a form-switch character and a Form Feed  
will be added at the end of the form.  
In general, the number of switch characters in the form data  
should be one more than the number of switch characters in the  
fill-in data.  
When using bar codes, note the following:  
When using bar codes as part of the form data, make sure that  
the control character encoding character in the bar code differs  
from the control character encoding character in the Loading  
Form sequence.  
171  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When using bar codes as part of the fill-in data, make sure that  
the control character encoding character of the bar code differs  
from the switch character in the Select Form sequence.  
Bar codes must start and end on the same page of a form.  
172  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECBLOCKC  
Start Block Character Mode:  
Generates the block characters from  
the characters that follow the sequence.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC % SP 1  
Indeterminate Conditions  
The block characters inherit the last set of parameters defined. If no  
prior sequence exists, the block characters are printed with:  
0 degree rotation  
The U.S. ASCII character set  
With a horizontal and vertical magnification factor of 2  
With a white background  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 37 32 49  
1B 25 20 31  
CHR$(27);”% 1”;  
SOCS (Epson)  
Select Other Coding System:  
Selects the Epson FX emulation.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC % SP 2  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 37 32 48  
1B 25 20 32  
CHR$(27);”% 2”;  
S7C1R  
Select 7-Bit Code:  
In a 7-bit environment, this sequence allows  
receipt of 7-bit control strings only.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC SP 6  
Indeterminate Conditions  
For all subsequent characters, the printer processes received 2-  
character sequences as defined in the C0 control chart. If 8-bit C1  
control characters are received, it drops the eighth bit and processes  
the character as a C0 character.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 32 54  
1B 20 36  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);” 6”;  
173  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S8C1R  
Select 8-Bit Code:  
In an 8-bit environment, this sequence allows  
receipt of 8-bit control strings.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC SP 7  
Indeterminate Conditions  
For all subsequent characters, the printer processes received 2-  
character sequences as defined in the C0 control chart and 8-bit  
control characters as defined in the C1 control chart.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 32 55  
1B 20 37  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);” 7”;  
SOCS (Proprinter)  
Select Other Coding System:  
Selects the Proprinter emulation.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC % =  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 37 61  
1B 25 3D  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”%=”;  
ROCS  
Stop Bar Coding (Return from Other Coding System):  
Stops bar  
code printing. Once bar coding is stopped, the font selection and  
associated attributes are restored to the conditions prevailing prior to  
bar code printing.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC % @  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 37 64  
1B 25 40  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”%@”;  
CUU  
Cursor Up:  
Causes the active print position to move to the  
corresponding column at the preceding vertical position set by the Pn  
value. Pn is the number of lines that the active line moves up at the  
current active column. Default value Pn = 1.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn A  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If you try to move the active position above the top line, the active  
position stops at the top line.  
Pn  
65  
PnH  
41  
Decimal:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
Hex  
:
Pn  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;”A”;  
174  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GSM  
Graphic Size Modification:  
This sequence will change the height  
and/or width of graphic characters. The first and second parameters  
are the percentages by which the height and width respectively will  
be multiplied. The default value for both p1 and p2 is 100 percent.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn1;Pn2  
ESC [  
SP B  
Pn1  
Pn1  
CHR$(27);”[“;  
Pn2  
Pn2  
Decimal:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
59  
3B  
32 50  
20 42  
Hex  
:
Pn1  
Pn2  
;” B”;  
BASIC:  
;”;”;  
NOTE  
Pn1 is a decimal value that specifies the height of the font as a  
percentage of the height set by the GSS sequence. Pn2 is a  
decimal value that specifies the width as a percentage of the  
width set by the GSS sequence. Fonts can be modified by two or  
three times their default height and two times their default  
width.  
GSS  
Graphic Size Selection:  
Sets the height and width of all characters  
that start after the control sequence.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn SP C  
Pn  
Pn  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
32 77  
20 43  
Pn  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;” C”;  
BASIC:  
NOTE  
Pn is a decimal value that species the height of the font in  
units determined by the Select Size Unit (SUU) sequence. The  
width of the font is implicitly defined by the height. The  
default value for Pn is 100. The GSS sequence remains in effect  
until the printer receives another GSS sequence or a Graphic  
Size Modification (GSM) sequence.  
S7C1T  
Select 7-Bit C1 Transmission:  
This sequence causes the printer to  
use 7-bit encoding for all C1 control characters transmitted. All C1  
characters are then represented as two-character ESC sequences.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC SP F  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 32 70  
1B 20 46  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);” F”;  
175  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S8C1T  
Select 8-Bit C1 Transmission:  
This sequence causes the printer to  
use 8-bit encoding for all C1 control characters transmitted. All C1  
characters are then represented as one-character CSI sequences.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC SP G  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 32 71  
1B 20 47  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);” G”;  
SPI  
Spacing Pitch Increment:  
This sequence will set the spacing  
between lines (p1) and the horizontal character pitch (p2). p1 and p2  
are given in decipoints or pixels dependent on the units selected by  
the Select Size Unit (SSU) sequence.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn1;Pn2 SP G  
Indeterminate Conditions  
A vertical spacing value, which exceeds the current form length, will  
be ignored. If the parameter value is omitted, the current setting will  
not be changed.  
5000 Specific  
The LPI parameter may range from 1 to 17280 decipoints (24 inches)  
but must be less than or equal to the printable area of the form. The  
printable area is defined as the area between the top and bottom  
margins. The range of values for CPI is dependent on the font  
selected. The actual achieved spacing, on the average, will match the  
requested spacing. Values outside of the permissible range for a font  
are ignored. An omitted or zero parameter leaves the current setting  
unchanged.  
Pn1  
Pn1  
Pn2  
Pn2  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
59  
3B  
32 71  
20 47  
Pn1  
;”;”;  
Pn2  
;” G”;  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“;  
176  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSU  
Select Size Unit:  
When PUM is set, Select Size Unit selects either  
decipoints or pixels as the spacing unit, depending on the parameter  
settings defined below.  
If the printer receives an SSU while PUM is reset, the selected unit  
will take effect when PUM is set and will then remain in effect until  
the printer receives another SSU or a reset sequence. Default value at  
power-up or reset is decipoints. The printer will ignore all Ps values  
other than 2 or 7.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Ps SP I  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
32 73  
20 49  
Ps  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;” I”;  
Ps Spacing Unit  
2
7
Decipoint (1/720 inch)  
Pixel (1/600 inch)  
SHS  
Select Horizontal Spacing:  
Ps selects the horizontal pitch.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Ps SP K  
Ps Horizontal Pitch  
0
1
2
3
10 characters per inch  
12 characters per inch  
15 characters per inch  
6 characters per inch  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
32 75  
20 4B  
Ps  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;” K”;  
BASIC:  
SVS  
Select Vertical Spacing:  
Ps selects the vertical spacing between  
lines that is used by all fonts.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Ps SP L  
Ps  
0
1
2
3
4
5
9
1
Vertical Pitch  
6 lines per inch  
4 lines per inch  
3 lines per inch  
12 lines per inch  
8 lines per inch  
5 lines per 30 inches  
2 lines per inch  
10 lines per inch  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
32 76  
20 4C  
Ps  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;” L”;  
177  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HPA  
Horizontal Position Absolute:  
The active print position will be  
moved to the location specified by p1.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn `  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the new horizontal position is greater than the carriage width, then  
the horizontal position of the control sequence will be ignored and the  
current horizontal position will not change. If the parameter is  
omitted or zero, left edge will be assumed.  
Pn  
Pn  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
96  
60  
Pn  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;”`”;  
BASIC:  
NOTE  
If the new position exceeds the right margin but is less than  
the physical width, move to the right margin.  
HPR  
Horizontal Position Relative:  
This sequence will move the active  
print position to the right, relative to the current position. Parameter  
p1 specifies the number of units to move. HPR cannot be used to  
move beyond the right margin.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn a  
Indeterminate Conditions  
Parameters greater than the physical print width will cause a default  
to the right margin, unless the "auto-wrap" printer control switch is  
set. If set, the active print position will move to the left margin. If the  
parameter is omitted or zero, one decipoints will be assumed.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 Pn 73  
1B 5B Pn 61  
CHR$(27);”[“;Pn;”a”;  
178  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RIS  
Reset to Initial State:  
Resets the value or state of several operating  
features. This sequence resets the printer to a set of operating values  
and conditions similar to the factory default settings (see table  
below).  
General Command Syntax  
ESC c  
Decimal:  
27 75  
Hex  
BASIC:  
:
1B 63  
CHR$(27);”c”;  
NOTE  
This sequence and the DECSTR reset sequence have the same  
function.  
Selectable Parameter  
Printing Status  
Horizontal Pitch  
Vertical Pitch  
Font  
Forms Length  
Active position  
Top Margin  
Bottom Margin  
Left Margin  
Right Margin  
Underlining  
Bolding  
Reset Condition  
On-line  
10 characters per inch  
6 lines per inch  
Data Processing  
66 lines (11 inches)  
Column 1 on the current line  
Line 1  
Line 66  
Column 1  
Column 136  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Italics  
Disabled  
Double Underline  
Overline  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Expansion  
No character expansion  
US ASCII  
Digital Supplemental  
US ASCII  
GL Character Set  
GR Character Set  
G0  
G1  
G2  
G3  
VT100 Graphic Character Set  
Digital Supplemental  
US ASCII  
Autowrap  
Disabled  
Line Feed/New Line  
Mode  
Reset  
Horizontal Tabs  
Unsolicited Reports  
Super/Subscripts  
Carriage Return/New  
line  
Every 8 columns (9,17 …)  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Reset  
Vertical Tabs  
Every line (1-66)  
179  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DA  
Product Identification:  
Shows the product identification. When the  
host sends a device attributes sequence, the printer responds with a  
sequence that identifies the printer. The response is ESC[?45c.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ c  
or  
ESC [ 0 c  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 59 75 or 27 59 48 75  
1B 5B 63 or 1B 5B 30 63  
CHR$(27);”[0c”;  
VPA  
Vertical Position Absolute:  
The current vertical position will be set  
to the value specified. The horizontal position will not change. VPA  
may be used to print within the top and bottom margins.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn  
ESC [  
d
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the new vertical position is greater than the forms length, then the  
sequence will be ignored. If p1 is omitted or zero, Pn is interpreted as  
the default value of 1.  
Pn  
Pn  
Decimal:  
27 59  
1B 5B  
76  
64  
Hex  
:
Pn  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;”d”;  
VPR  
Vertical Position Relative:  
The current vertical position will be  
advanced by the distance specified by the command parameter. If  
the move would be beyond the bottom line, the active position stops  
at the bottom line.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn  
ESC [  
e
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the parameter is omitted or zero, Pn is interpreted as the default  
value of 1.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 59 Pn 77  
Pn  
1B 5B  
65  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“;Pn;”e”;  
180  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TBC  
Tab Clear:  
This sequence will clear horizontal or vertical tab (or tabs)  
based on the parameter. If no parameter is present, the default will  
be to clear the horizontal tab at the current position, if one exists.  
The valid parameters are as follows:  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
ESC [  
g
Ps  
Tab Clear Action  
0
Clear horizontal tab at current  
position (Default)  
1
Clear vertical tab at current position  
2 or 3 Clear all horizontal tabs  
Clear all vertical tabs  
4
Indeterminate conditions  
Other Values are reserved.  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
27 91  
1B 5B  
79  
67  
Hex  
:
Ps  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"["; ;"g";  
SM  
Set Mode:  
This sequence will set the mode(s) indicated by one or  
more parameters. Parameter values are either ANSI or Digital  
private. Digital private parameters are preceded by the question mark  
character.  
ANSI Defined Parameter Values  
Ps  
11  
20  
Mode Mnemonic  
Mode Function  
Position Unit Mode  
Linefeed New Line Mode  
PUM  
LNM  
DEC Private Parameter Values  
Ps  
?7  
?29  
?40  
Mode Mnemonic  
DECAWM  
DECPSM  
Mode Function  
Autowrap Mode  
Pitch Select Mode  
Carriage Return/New Line  
Mode  
DECCRNLM  
The meanings for these follows:  
PUM  
LNM  
Position Unit Mode:  
Selects a unit of measurement used with the  
escape sequences that control spacing parameters. When Position  
Unit Mode is enabled, it selects either decipoints or pixels, depending  
on the setting of the Select Size Unit sequence. When Position Unit  
Mode is disabled, it selects a spacing unit equal to one character  
position. The power-up default is PUM reset.  
Linefeed New Line Mode:  
In the set state, LNM will cause a received  
linefeed character to imply a new line, or carriage return. In the reset  
state, a linefeed will provide vertical motion only, with no change in  
the print position. The Default State of LNM is established by menu  
selection.  
181  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECAWM  
Autowrap Mode:  
Determines what happens when text exceeds the  
right margin. When autowrap is enabled and text exceeds the right  
margin, the active print position moves to the left margin on the next  
line. When autowrap is disabled and text exceeds the right margin,  
data will be lost.  
DECPSM  
Pitch Select Mode:  
Controls the Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP)  
sequence. When Pitch Select Mode is enabled, the current font  
determines the pitch. When disabled, the printer uses the horizontal  
pitch selected by the DECSHORP sequence.  
DECCRNLM  
Carriage Return / New Line Mode:  
Defines the response to the  
Carriage Return character. When Carriage Return New Line Mode is  
enabled, a received Carriage Return will return the active position to  
the left margin on the next line. When disabled, a Carriage Return will  
return the active position to the left margin on the current line.  
VFU  
Load Vertical Format Unit:  
This sequence will download the VFU  
from the host. All data following this load sequence is placed into the  
VFU memory until terminated with the End Load sequence. Any  
command entered during the load is ignored except the End Load  
sequence. All data must be in the VFU load format. If an error is  
detected during the load, the load is aborted. If a load exceeds the  
form length, the load is aborted. Cancelled loads default to the  
current form length setting.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ < 1 h  
The VFU load format consists of two bytes for each line on the page.  
First Byte  
Bits  
Values  
7
Not  
Used  
6
Always  
1
5
Channel  
6
4
Channel  
5
3
Channel  
4
2
Channel  
3
1
Channel  
2
0
Channel  
1
Second byte  
Bits  
Values  
7
Not  
Used  
6
Always  
1
5
Channel  
12  
4
3
2
Channel  
9
1
Channel  
8
0
Channel  
7
Channel  
11  
Channel  
10  
Channel 1:  
Channel 12  
Identifies the Top Of Form.  
Identifies the Bottom Of Form.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 91 60 49 80  
1B 5B 3C 31 68  
CHR$(27);"[<1h";  
182  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VFU  
VFU  
End Load Vertical Format Unit (End Load):  
the Vertical Format Unit load.  
This sequence will end  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ < 1 l  
<- Note lower case L as the last character.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 59 60 49 84  
1B 5B 3C 31 6C  
CHR$(27);"[<1l";  
Channel Command:  
This sequence will control paper motion. P1  
consists of three digits nnn. When the first n equals 9, reverse paper  
motion occurs. If the first n equals any value other than 0 or 9, the  
entire sequence is ignored.  
General Command Syntax  
P1  
ESC [  
& Y  
The table of values of nnn follows:  
P1  
Move Forward to  
P1  
Move Backward to  
nnn  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
Channel  
nnn  
900  
901  
902  
903  
904  
905  
906  
907  
908  
909  
910  
911  
Channel  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
10  
11  
12  
P1  
P1  
Decimal:  
27 59  
1B 5B  
38 121  
26 79  
Hex  
:
P1  
CHR$(27);"["; ;"&Y";  
BASIC:  
Notes  
Selecting any other channel than those defined in the above table will  
result in default to channel 12 (BOF).  
If a channel is not defined and channel 12 is undefined, the move will  
be to the next line.  
If the VFU table is not loaded and channel commands are sent to it, a  
line feed occurs.  
183  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HPB  
VPB  
RM  
Horizontal Position Backward:  
The current horizontal position will  
be changed, moving the active position in the backward direction by  
the specified amount. The movement is not permitted to cross the left  
margin of the current form.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn j  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the parameter is omitted, or zero, Pn is interpreted as the default  
value of 1.  
If a parameter should request a positioning change into the left  
margin region, the current position will be set to the left margin.  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 71 Pn 82  
1B 5B Pn 6A  
CHR$(27);"[";Pn;"j";  
Vertical Position Backward:  
The current vertical position will be  
changed, moving the active position in the reverse direction by the  
specified amount. The movement is not permitted to cross the top  
margin of the current form.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn  
ESC [  
k
Indeterminate Conditions  
If the parameter is omitted, Pn is interpreted as the default value of  
1.  
If a parameter should request a positioning change into the top  
margin region, the current position will be set to the top margin.  
Pn  
Pn  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
83  
6B  
Hex  
:
Pn  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"["; ;"k";  
Reset Mode:  
Resets the mode indicated by one or more parameters.  
The parameters and meanings are the same as used by SM (Set  
Mode).  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
ESC [  
l
<- last character is a lower case L  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
85  
6C  
Hex  
:
Ps  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"["; ;"l"  
184  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DSR  
Device Status Requests:  
The host sends the Device Status Request  
listed below to request a printer status report.  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
ESC [  
n
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
86  
6E  
Hex  
:
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[";Ps;"n";  
DSR Sequences to Request Status  
Request Sequence  
<ESC>[0n or <ESC>[5n  
<ESC>[6n  
Printer Response  
Sends an extended status report  
Sends a cursor position report  
The host sends the Device Status Request listed below to enable or  
disable unsolicited status reports.  
DSR Sequences to Enable or Disable Unsolicited Reports  
Request Sequence  
<ESC>[?1n  
Printer Response  
Disables all unsolicited reports  
Enable brief unsolicited status  
reports and sends an extended status  
report.  
<ESC>[?2n  
Enable extended, unsolicited status  
reports and sends an extended status  
report.  
<ESC>[?3n  
Responses:  
Cursor Position Report  
<ESC>[Pn1;Pn2R  
Pn1 is the active line  
Pn2 is the active column  
Brief Unsolicited Messages Enabled  
<ESC>[Pn1n  
Pn1 = 0 After an error condition has been corrected or  
no error exists.  
Pn1 = 3 If an error is detected.  
Extended Unsolicited Messages Enabled  
<ESC>[?20n  
<ESC>[?Pn1;Pn2n  
following table)  
No error exists.  
A error is detected. (See  
185  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Status Error Codes  
Pn2 Fault  
Pn1 Fault  
Printer Fault  
Code  
27  
25  
Code  
206  
0
Paper Out  
Paper Jam  
26  
38  
36  
26  
0
Cover Open  
Ribbon Jam  
Striker Bar Open  
All Others  
229  
220  
212  
Notes  
This option will work only if the printer’s serial interface is active, and  
the RTS option on the host is set to true.  
The units reported by the Cursor Position Report can be character  
positions, decipoints, or pixels dependent on the settings of PUM and  
SSU.  
Emulation strap S1 enable/disables unsolicited error reports.  
Emulation strap S2 selects brief or extended status reports.  
186  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSTR  
Soft Terminal Reset:  
Resets the value or state of several operating  
features. After receiving a DECSTR, the printer positions itself at the  
next Top Of Form then resets the value or state of several operating  
features.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ ! p  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 71 17 84  
1B 5B 21 70  
CHR$(27);"[";"!p";  
NOTE  
This sequence and the RIS reset sequence have the same  
function.  
Selectable Parameter  
Printing Status  
Horizontal Pitch  
Vertical Pitch  
Font  
Forms Length  
Active position  
Top Margin  
Reset Condition  
On-line  
10 characters per inch  
6 lines per inch  
Data Processing  
66 lines (11 inches)  
Column 1 on the current line  
Line 1  
Bottom Margin  
Left Margin  
Line 66  
Column 1  
Right Margin  
Underlining  
Bolding  
Column 136  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Italics  
Disabled  
Double Underline  
Overline  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Expansion  
No character expansion  
US ASCII  
Digital Supplemental  
US ASCII  
GL Character Set  
GR Character Set  
G0  
G1  
G2  
G3  
VT100 Graphic Character Set  
Digital Supplemental  
US ASCII  
Autowrap  
Disabled  
Line Feed/New Line Mode  
Horizontal Tabs  
Unsolicited Reports  
Super/Subscripts  
Carriage Return/New line  
Vertical Tabs  
Reset  
Every 8 columns (9,17 …)  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Reset  
Every line (1-66)  
187  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSBCA  
Select Bar Code Attributes:  
This sequence will select a bar code  
type and orientation.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ P1;P2;P2; ... ;P9 s  
P1: Bar Code Style  
The allowed values for P1 are shown in the following table.  
P1  
0/missing  
Bar Code Style  
Code 3 of 9 (default)  
Interleave 2 of 5  
Code 3 of 9  
1
2
3
4
Extended Code 3 of 9 (not implemented)  
EAN-8  
5
EAN-13  
6
Code 11  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Codabar (a/t)  
Codabar (b/n)  
Codabar (c/*)  
Codabar (d/e)  
UPC-A  
UPC-E  
Postnet  
Code 128  
Code 128-UCC  
P2: Width for Narrow Bars and Spaces  
Sets width for the narrow bars and spaces in units specified by SSU.  
Default = 10 pixels = 12 decipoints  
P3: Width for Quiet Zone  
Not implemented.  
P4: Width for Wide Bars and Spaces  
Sets width for the wide bars and spaces in units specified by SSU.  
Default = 30 pixels = 36 decipoints  
P5: Intercharacter Gap  
Sets the intercharacter gap in units specified by SSU.  
Default = 10 pixels = 12 decipoints  
P6: Bar code Height  
Bar code height in 1/12th-inch increments  
1
120  
9
minimum bar code height = 1/12 inch)  
maximum bar code height = 10 inches  
default bar code height = 0.75 inch  
P7: Encoding Character  
Not implemented.  
188  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P8: Bar code Rotation  
0
1
2
3
4
no rotation (default)  
no rotation  
270 degrees rotation  
90 degrees rotation  
180 degrees rotation  
P9: Human Readable Input (HRI) Font  
0
1
2
No human readable characters printed;  
No human readable characters printed;  
Special bar code HRI font;  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 71 P1 ; P2 ; ... ; P9 ' q  
1B 5B P1 3B P2 3B … P9 27 71  
CHR$(27);"[";P1;";";P2;";"; ... ;P9;"'q";  
DECSTBM  
Set Top and Bottom Margins:  
Sets the top and bottom margins, and  
the page home line. Pn1 sets the top margin and the page home line.  
Pn2 sets the bottom margin. The top margin defines the first  
printable line on a page. The bottom margin defines the last printable  
line. The page home line is the position of the first printable line on  
the page after a form feed.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 r  
Decimal:  
27 71 Pn1 ; Pn2 86  
Hex  
BASIC:  
:
1B 5B Pn1 3B Pn2 72  
CHR$(27);"[";Pn1;";";Pn2;"r";  
Indeterminate Conditions  
If Pn1 is 0 or omitted, the top margin is unchanged.  
If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the bottom margin is unchanged.  
If Pn2 is greater than the form length, the bottom margin is set at the  
bottom of form.  
If the active position is less than the new top margin, the active  
position is set to the new top margin. If the active line is greater than  
the new bottom margin, the next printable character causes a form  
feed.  
If the sequence sets the top margin below the bottom margin, the  
command is ignored.  
If the form length is changed, the printer sets the top margin to line 1  
and the bottom margin to the form length.  
189  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSLRM  
Set Left and Right Margins:  
Sets the left and right margins. Pn1  
sets the left margin and the line home position. Pn2 sets the right  
margin. If the first parameter is greater than the second parameter,  
the sequence will be ignored. The unit of measurement can be  
character cells, decipoints, or pixels. The maximum allowable value  
of the Pn1 parameter is always one less than the Pn2 parameter.  
The left margin defines the first printable position on a line. The right  
margin defines the last printable position on a line.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn1 ; Pn2  
ESC [  
s
Indeterminate Conditions  
If Pn1 is 0 or omitted, the left margin is unchanged.  
If Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the right margin is unchanged.  
If Pn2 is greater then the printable width, the right margin is set to  
the right limit.  
If the sequence sets the left margin to the right of the right margin,  
the command is ignored.  
If the active position is less than the new left margin, the active  
position is set to the left margin.  
Pn1  
Pn1  
Pn2  
Pn2  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
59  
3B  
115  
73  
Hex  
:
Pn1  
CHR$(27);"["; ;";";  
Pn2  
;"s";  
BASIC:  
DECSLPP  
Set Lines per Physical Page:  
Defines form length. DECSLPP sets the  
top margin to 1 and the bottom margin to the form length. Pn sets  
the form length in the units defined by the PUM and SSU sequences.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn  
ESC [  
t
Indeterminate Conditions  
If Pn1 is 0 or omitted, the form length is set to 11 inches.  
Pn  
Pn  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
88  
74  
Hex  
:
Pn  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"["; ;"t";  
190  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSHTS  
Set Horizontal Tab Stops:  
This sequence will set multiple horizontal  
DECSHTS  
tab stops.  
allows up to 16 tab stops to be set at once. Up  
to 32 horizontal tabs can be stored. If more than 32 tabs are specified  
by the escape sequence, the leftmost 32 will be retained. The Pn  
values can be in any order in the escape sequence. The value units  
are in decipoints, pixels, or character cells depending on the selection  
of PUM and SSU.  
General Command Syntax  
P1 ; P2 ; ... ; P32  
ESC [  
u
Pn1 Pn2  
Pn16  
75  
Pn2 Pn16  
;";"; ... ; ;"u";  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
BASIC:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
;
; ... ;  
Pn16  
;";";  
u
Pn1  
3B …  
Pn1  
CHR$(27);"[";  
NOTE  
The tabs are set and sorted into the current settings. If the  
current settings are 1", 2", and 3", a command to set a tab at  
1.5" would now have four tab sets.  
DECSVTS  
Set Vertical Tab Stops:  
This sequence will set multiple vertical tab  
stops. DECSVTS allows up to 16 tab stops to be set at once. Up to  
67 vertical tabs can be stored. The default is set to stop at every line.  
The Pn values can be in any order in the escape sequence. The value  
units are in decipoints, pixels, or lines depending on the selection of  
PUM and SSU.  
General Command Syntax  
Pn1 Pn2  
Pn16  
ESC [  
;
; ... ;  
v
Pn1 Pn2  
Pn16  
76  
Pn2 Pn16  
;";"; ... ; ;"v";  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
;
; ... ;  
Pn16  
;";";  
v
Pn1  
Hex  
:
3B …  
Pn1  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);"[";  
NOTE  
The tabs are set and sorted into the current settings. If the  
current settings are 1", 2", and 3", a command to set a tab at  
1.5" would now have four tab sets.  
191  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSHORP  
Set Horizontal Pitch:  
This sequence will set the number of  
characters printed per horizontal inch on a line. In addition to  
changing character size, this sequence will reset the left and right  
margins and will retain the current horizontal tab settings. Ps selects  
the horizontal pitch as defined in the following chart.  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
ESC [  
w
Select Horizontal Pitch  
Ps  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Horizontal Pitch  
10 characters per inch  
10 characters per inch  
12 characters per inch  
13.3 characters per inch  
16.7 characters per inch  
5 characters per inch  
6 characters per inch  
6.6 characters per inch  
8.25 characters per inch  
15 characters per inch  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
91  
77  
Hex  
:
Ps  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;”w”;  
BASIC:  
DECVERP  
Set Vertical Pitch:  
This sequence will set the number of lines per  
inch on the page. Ps selects the vertical pitch as defined in the  
following chart.  
General Command Syntax  
Ps  
ESC [  
z
Select Vertical Pitch  
Ps  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
10  
11  
Vertical Pitch  
6 lines per inch  
6 lines per inch  
8 lines per inch  
12 lines per inch  
2 lines per inch  
3 lines per inch  
4 lines per inch  
6 lines per inch  
6 lines per inch  
Indeterminate Conditions  
No parameter will result in a default of 6 LPI. Values not listed are  
ignored.  
Ps  
Ps  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
94  
7A  
Ps  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“; ;”z”;  
192  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSGD  
Set Graphics Density:  
DECSGD sets the density for graphics. Psh  
designates the horizontal dot density and Psv designates the vertical  
dot density.  
General Command Syntax  
Psh Psv  
ESC [  
;
& {  
Horizontal  
Psh Density  
Psv  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Vertical Density  
No change  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
No change  
50 Dots per Inch  
60 Dots per Inch  
70 Dots per Inch  
80 Dots per Inch  
90 Dots per Inch  
100 Dots per  
Inch  
30 Dots per Inch  
40 Dots per Inch  
50 Dots per Inch  
60 Dots per Inch  
66 Dots per Inch  
75 Dots per Inch  
7
110 Dots per  
Inch  
7
86 Dots per Inch  
8
120 Dots per  
Inch  
8
100 Dots per  
Inch  
9
130 Dots per  
Inch  
9
120 Dots per  
Inch  
10  
11  
12  
140 Dots per  
Inch  
150 Dots per  
Inch  
200 Dots per  
Inch  
10  
11  
150 Dots per  
Inch  
200 Dots per  
Inch  
Psh  
Psh  
Psv  
Psv  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
59  
3B  
38 95  
26 7B  
Hex  
:
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);”[“;Psh;”;”;Psv;”&{“;  
193  
GEK-00029A  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECVEC  
Drawing Vectors:  
This sequence draws horizontal or vertical lines  
with length and width. Margins do not affect line drawing so you can  
draw lines to the physical limits of the page. Use the following Pn  
parameters to select the length, width, and direction of the line. An  
incorrect Pn value will cancel the entire sequence.  
General Command Syntax  
ESC [ Pn1 ; Pn2 ; … ; Pn5 ; ! |  
P1: Define Line  
0 = Draw a horizontal line to the right.  
1 = Draw a vertical line down.  
P2: Select the X Start Position  
This parameter selects the horizontal start position on the page in  
decipoints.  
P3: Select the Y Start Position  
This parameter selects the vertical start position on the page in  
decipoints.  
P4: Select the Line Length  
Select the line length in the X direction for an X line. For a Y line, it  
specifies the Y direction length. A 0 value defaults to 1 decipoint.  
P5: Select the Line Width  
Select the line width for both X and Y lines. A 0 value defaults to 1  
decipoint.  
Pn1  
Pn1  
CHR$(27);”[“;  
Pn2  
Pn2  
Pn1  
;”;”;  
Pn5  
59 … 59  
3B … 3B  
Decimal:  
27 71  
1B 5B  
59  
3B  
59 33 96  
Pn5  
Hex  
:
3B 21 7C  
Pn5  
;”;”;”!|”;  
Pn2  
BASIC:  
;”;”; … ;  
194  
Chapter 7. Dec LG/Compaq LG Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 8. PPL3 PLUS EMULATION  
INTRODUCTION  
General Considerations  
This chapter describes the GENICOM 5000 implementation of the  
DEC PPL3 printer protocol. The focus is on the following:  
Control Codes  
Special Characters  
Commands  
Page Coordinate System  
Sixel Graphics  
While PPL3 emulation is backward compatible with PPL1 and PPL2  
commands, it is not recommended that the user mix commands from  
different levels of the PPL emulation.  
Coded Characters  
Character processing within the PPL3 emulation is broken down into  
several categories of characters.  
C0 Control Set:  
00H-1FH (0-31 decimal).  
GL Graphics Characters:  
94 graphic characters in the range of  
21H-7EH (33-126 decimal) referred to as the left-hand graphics  
set.  
C1 Control Set:  
80H-9FH (128-159 decimal).  
GR Graphics Characters:  
94 graphic characters in the range of  
10H-FEH referred to as the right-hand graphics set.  
Special Characters:  
This are outside of the other ranges  
described and consist of the characters represented by the  
hexadecimal values 20, 7F, A0, and FF.  
195  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7-Bit Versus 8-Bit Environments  
In some environments, only 7 bits are used to encode characters. In  
these environments, the standard 7-bit character set applies. This set  
includes only the C0 and GL character sets and the special  
characters represented by hexadecimal values 20 and 7F.  
7-Bit Character Set (8-Bit Left Half)  
196  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In an 8-bit environment, the low order 7 bits determine whether a  
character is printable or is a control character. The standard 8-bit  
code table consists of the entries above as well as the 8-bit right-half  
table that follows.  
Standard 8-Bit Code Table (Right Half)  
197  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Characters  
The GL characters in a 7-bit environment and GL and GR in an 8-bit  
environment are interpreted as printable if they are not embedded in  
a control function. It takes selection of both a font and a graphic  
character set to specify a character to be printed. The font is made up  
of a type style, a size, and a design (regular, bold, italics).  
Choosing a graphics character set involves the following steps:  
Designate the graphics character set as one of the logical sets G0,  
G1, G2, or G3.  
Assign (map) one of the sets above into the graphic left (GL) or  
graphics right (GR) logical set.  
Designating and Invoking Character Sets  
198  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL CODES  
Introduction  
Generally, control codes are not printed and cause the printer to  
perform a control function. Within PPL III, there is an exception when  
Control Representation Mode (CRM) is set.  
C0 Control Characters  
C0 control characters are in the range of 00H to 1FH. With the  
exception of Escape (ESC), Cancel (CAN), and Substitute (SUB), C0  
control characters do not affect escape sequences, control sequences,  
or control strings.  
Only the control characters listed below are implemented. All others  
are ignored.  
BEL  
BS  
Bell (07H):  
BEL causes the printer to sound a bell or buzzer.  
Backspace (08H):  
BS moves the active horizontal position back one  
Horizontal Advance Increment (HAI). See the section later in this  
chapter on the Page Coordinate System. BS is active within the page  
boundaries, i.e., there is no effect if the current Active Position is  
outside of the left or right margin settings.  
CAN  
CR  
Cancel (18H):  
CAN is ignored unless received in an escape sequence,  
control sequence, or control string. In these instances, CAN causes  
the sequence or string being processed to abort.  
Carriage Return (0DH):  
CR sets the active horizontal position to the  
Line Home Position, even when the active horizontal position is to the  
left of the Line Home Position. If Carriage Return/New Line Mode  
(DECCRNLM) is set, the printer also moves down one Vertical  
Advance Increment (VAI). If PLD or subscript counts are non-  
negative, then a CR executed beyond the bottom margin causes a  
form feed.  
See the section later in this chapter on the Page Coordinate System.  
ESC  
FF  
Escape (1BH):  
ESC introduces an escape sequence. An ESC control  
character received in an escape sequence, control sequence, or  
control string aborts that sequence and begins a new escape  
sequence.  
Form Feed (0CH):  
FF indicates the end of the current page and the  
beginning of a new page. Subsequent output will appear on the new  
page. FF sets the active vertical position to the Page Home Line. FF  
does not modify the active horizontal position. See the section on the  
Page Coordinate System for further information on the interaction  
with coordinate system bounds.  
199  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HT  
LF  
Horizontal Tab (09H):  
HT moves the active position to the next  
horizontal tab stop on the same line. If no tab stop exists to the right  
of the active horizontal and within the right margin, HT moves to the  
right margin and sets the Right Margin Flag.  
If no tabs are set and bar code is not active, HT moves the active  
horizontal position to the right margin.  
Line Feed (0AH):  
LF moves the active vertical position down one  
Vertical Advance Increment (VAI). If Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM)  
is set, the active horizontal position moves to the Line Home Position.  
See the section on the Page Coordinate System later in this chapter.  
SI  
Shift In (0FH):  
SI, also named Locking Shift Zero (LS0), maps  
character set G0 as the GL character set.  
SO  
SUB  
Shift Out (0EH):  
SO, also named Locking Shift One (LS1), maps  
character set G1 as the GL character set.  
Substitute (1AH):  
This sequence aborts the sequence in progress.  
SUB in a control string generally aborts the string in progress. (Need  
a reference to a local equivalent of table 2-2 in the spec.)  
SUB in printable text causes the error character to be printed. The  
The error character for most  
error character is taken from the GL font.  
fonts is a distinctive reverse question mark. In some instances a  
normal ? character is printed.  
VT  
Vertical Tab (0BH):  
VT moves the active position to the next vertical  
tab stop on the current page. If no tab exists between the active  
position and the bottom margin, VT moves the active position to the  
bottom margin. Be aware that this command interacts with  
coordinate system bounds. If no vertical tabs have been set, then VT  
moves the active position to the bottom margin.  
200  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C1 Control Characters  
All C1 control characters abort any escape sequence, control  
sequence, or control string in progress. See the section on Special  
Parsing Requirements earlier in the chapter.  
C1 control characters can be represented by a 7-bit equivalent escape  
sequence. See the following table.  
8-Bit  
Column/Row  
Mnemonic  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
IND  
7-Bit Equivalent Sequence  
8/0  
8/1  
8/2  
8/3  
8/4  
8/5  
8/6  
8/7  
ESC @  
ESC A  
ESC B  
ESC C  
ESC D  
ESC E  
ESC F  
ESC G  
ESC H  
ESC I  
1B 40  
1B 41  
1B 42  
1B 43  
1B 44  
1B 45  
1B 47  
1B 47  
1B 48  
1B 49  
1B 4A  
1B 4B  
1B 4C  
1B 4D  
1B 4E  
1B 4F  
1B 50  
1B 51  
1B 52  
1B 53  
1B 54  
1B 55  
1B 56  
1B 57  
1B 58  
1B 59  
1B 5A  
1B 5B  
1B 5C  
1B 5D  
1B 5E  
1B 5F  
NEL  
SSA  
ESA  
HTS  
HTJ  
VTS  
PLD  
PLU  
RI  
SS2  
SS3  
DCS  
PU1  
PU2  
STS  
CCH  
MW  
SPA  
EPA  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
CSI  
ST  
OSC  
8/8  
8/9  
8/10  
8/11  
8/12  
8/13  
8/14  
8/15  
9/0  
9/1  
9/2  
9/3  
9/4  
ESC J  
ESC K  
ESC L  
ESC M  
ESC N  
ESC O  
ESC P  
ESC Q  
ESC R  
ESC S  
ESC T  
ESC U  
ESC V  
ESC W  
ESC X  
ESC Y  
ESC Z  
ESC [  
9/5  
9/6  
9/7  
9/8  
9/9  
9/10  
9/11  
9/12  
9/13  
9/14  
9/15  
ESC \  
ESC ]  
ESC ^  
ESC _  
PM  
APC  
CSI  
Control Sequence Introducer (CSI):  
CSI introduces a control  
sequence. A CSI control character received in an escape sequence,  
control sequence, or control string aborts that sequence and begins a  
new control sequence. For those familiar with escape sequence  
programming, CSI is the ESC [ sequence.  
DCS  
Printer Control String (90H):  
DCS introduces a printer control  
string. A DCS control character received in an escape sequence,  
control sequence, or control string aborts that sequence and begins a  
new printer control string.  
EPA  
ESA  
End of Protected Area (97H):  
EPA aborts any escape sequence,  
control sequence, or control string in progress. It is ignored  
otherwise.  
End of Selected Area (87H):  
ESA aborts any escape sequence,  
control sequence, or control string in progress. It is ignored  
otherwise.  
201  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HTS  
Horizontal Tab Set (88H):  
HTS sets a horizontal tab stop at the  
active horizontal position. No change occurs if the active horizontal  
position is in the tab table. If the table is full, the highest tab stop is  
lost. When the new tab would be the highest and the table is already  
full, the new tab is lost.  
IND  
NEL  
Index (84H):  
IND moves the active vertical position down one Vertical  
Advance Increment. It behaves the same as Line Feed. See the  
section later in the chapter on the Page Coordinate System.  
Next Line (85H):  
NEL sets the active horizontal position to the Line  
Home Position and moves the active vertical position down one  
Vertical Advance Increment. See Page Coordinate System later in the  
chapter.  
PLD  
PLU  
RI  
Partial Line Down (8BH):  
PLD moved the active vertical position  
downward by the Subscript Vertical Distance. This is discussed  
further in the section on Page Coordinate System later in the chapter.  
Partial Line Up (8CH):  
PLU moves the active vertical position upward  
by the Superscript Vertical Distance. This is discussed further in the  
section on Page Coordinate System later in the chapter.  
Reverse Index (8DH):  
RI moves the active vertical position up one  
Vertical Advance Increment (VAI). The maximum allowable movement  
is to the top margin. This is discussed further in the section on Page  
Coordinate System later in the chapter.  
SS2  
SS3  
Single Shift 2 (8EH):  
to print one character.  
SS2 temporarily maps character set G2 into GL  
Single Shift 3 (8FH):  
SS3 temporarily maps character set G3 into GL  
to print one character.  
ST  
String Terminator (9CH):  
ST indicates the end of a control string.  
Vertical Tab Set (8AH):  
VTS sets a vertical tab stop. If the First  
VTS  
Character Flag is set, the tab stop is set at the active vertical  
position. If the First Character Flag is not set, VTS sets the active  
vertical position minus the Above Baseline Offset. No change occurs if  
that position is already a vertical tab stop.  
If the vertical tab table is full and the new tab position is less than  
the highest entry in the table, the new tab stop is inserted and the  
highest entry is lost. If the new tab stop would be the highest, then  
the new tab stop is lost.  
RESERVED  
The hex values 80H to 83H and 98H through 9AH are reserved for  
future use. If encountered they abort any escape sequence, control  
sequence, or control string in progress. They are ignored otherwise.  
202  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL CHARACTER PROCESSING  
As mentioned in the introduction, four characters are considered  
special characters. The processing for these characters is described  
below.  
Hex 20  
If a 94-character graphic character set has been mapped into the GL  
region, 20H always prints as a space character (SP). The justification  
feature can modify how space characters are treated (See the JFY  
command).  
If a 96-character graphic character set has been mapped into the GL  
region, then 20H causes the specified character from that set to be  
printed. If 20H is undefined in that character set, the error character  
is printed.  
Hex 7F  
If a 94-character graphic character set has been mapped into the GL  
region, 7FH is always ignored.  
If a 96-character graphic character set has been mapped into the GL  
region, 7FH causes the specified character from that set to be  
printed. If 7FH is undefined in that character set, the error character  
is printed.  
Hex A0  
Hex FF  
If a 94-character graphic character set is selected into GR, A0H  
causes the error character to print.  
If a 96-character graphic character set resides in GR, A0H prints the  
specified character from that set. If A0H is undefined in that set, the  
error character is printed.  
If a 94-character graphic character set has been mapped into the GR  
region, FFH is always ignored.  
If a 96-character graphic character set has been mapped to GR, FFH  
prints the specified character from that set. If FFH is undefined in  
that set, the error character is printed.  
203  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special Character Parsing  
Undefined  
Control  
String  
See 1  
Received  
Character  
ESC  
CAN  
SUB  
ESC, CSI,  
DCS Intro  
See 1  
See 2  
See 3  
Sixel  
See 1  
See 2  
Treat as  
3FH  
DECATFF  
See 1  
See 2  
DECDTFF  
See 1  
See 2  
DECAUPSS  
See 1  
DECLFF  
See 1  
See 2  
Treat as  
3FH  
See 2  
See 3  
See 2  
See 3  
See 3  
See 3  
BEL, SI, SO  
Other C0  
21H – 7EH  
80H – 9FH  
A1H – FEH  
20H  
A0H  
7FH  
FFH  
See 4  
See 4  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
See 8  
See 8  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 4  
Ignore  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
See 8  
See 8  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 5  
See 6  
See 7  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
See 4  
See 4  
Ignore  
See 6  
See 7  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Ignore  
Action taken:  
1
2
3
4
Character aborts the command, then introduces a new command  
Character aborts the command, then CAN is processed  
Character aborts the command, then SUB is processed  
Character is processed as if received before the command, then  
command processing resumes  
5
6
Character is processed as a printable character  
Character aborts the command, then the control character is  
processed  
7
8
Eighth bit of character is ignored, then processed as a GL printable  
character  
Character processed as 20H (space)  
204  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ESCAPE SEQUENCE / CONTROL FUNCTION SYNTAX  
Within PPL III, the overall description given to control codes, escape  
sequences and control strings is "commands." For consistence with  
the rest of this manual, separateness will be maintained.  
Escape Sequence Syntax  
Escape sequences have the following general format:  
<ESC><I><F>  
Final Character  
Intermediate Characters  
Escape Sequence Introducer  
Example: ESC ( B  
CSI:  
escape sequence  
The ESC control character (1BH) is the  
introducer  
.
I: Intermediate characters  
received after and ESC and should be in  
the range of 20H to 2FH. No more than 3 intermediate characters are  
permitted within PPL III. If four or more intermediate characters are  
received before the final character, the event is noted and the entire  
sequence is ignored.  
F: final character  
A
is in the range of 30H to 7EH. It indicates the  
end of an escape sequence. The intermediate characters (if any) and  
the final character, taken together, define the function of the  
sequence.  
Control Sequence Syntax  
Control sequences differ from escape sequences in that they have  
parameters that modify the function of the control sequence. The  
general format for a control  
<CSI><P><I><F>  
Final Character  
Intermediate Characters  
Parameters  
Control Sequence Introducer  
CSI:  
The control sequence introducer has a hex value of 9B. This is  
equivalent to a 7-bit escape sequence of ESC [ or 1BH 5BH. Both  
encodings are recognized as a CSI.  
Parameters:  
Parameter characters are in the range of 30H to 3FH. A  
parameter modifies the action of the control sequence. Generally,  
parameters are ASCII digits and act as a numerical index in the  
sequence. Within PPL III, the occurrence of the "?" character (3FH) or  
205  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the ">" character (3E) at the beginning of a parameter string indicates  
the presence of Digital private parameters.  
If the ":" (3AH), "<" (3C), or the "=" (3D) characters are received during  
the processing of a parameter string, or if the ">" or "?" characters are  
received after the first character of a parameter string, the string will  
be ignored.  
I: Intermediate characters  
received after and ESC and should be in  
the range of 20H to 2FH. No more than 1 intermediate character is  
permitted. If more than one intermediate character is received before  
the final character, the event is noted and the entire sequence is  
ignored.  
F: final character  
A
is in the range of 40H to 7EH. It indicates the  
end of an escape sequence. The intermediate characters (if any) and  
the final character, taken together, define the function of the  
sequence.  
Parameter Values Within Control Sequences  
Parameter values are either numeric values or selection indices.  
Numeric values typically specify a distance or a quantity pertaining to  
a control function. Selective parameters are interpreted as specifying  
a choice from an available list for a parameter. Parameter values  
must be unsigned digits. Leading zeroes are permitted, but ignored.  
If no value is received for a parameter, a value of zero is assumed.  
The maximum value for a parameter is the greatest value needed by  
any supported control sequence. In a PPL III compliant printer, the  
maximum value is the maximum paper size expressed in centipoints  
(1/7200-inch). For example, if a printer supports 21-inch paper, the  
maximum parameter size would be 21x7200=151,200 centipoints.  
If multiple parameters appear in a control sequence, they must be  
separated by semi-colons (";"). A maximum of 16 parameters is  
allowed. If more are received, only the first 16 are evaluated.  
Additional parameters are ignored, but do not cause the sequence to  
be invalid.  
206  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND DIRECTORY  
Command  
Description  
Page  
209  
209  
210  
210  
210  
212  
211  
212  
213  
214  
214  
215  
215  
215  
216  
216  
216  
217  
217  
218  
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
225  
226  
227  
228  
ASCEF  
Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities  
Cursor Position Report  
CPR  
CRM  
Control Representation Mode  
Cursor Up  
CUU  
DA  
Printer Attributes (host request for report)  
Secondary Printer Attributes (host request for report)  
Printer Attributes Report (generic response)  
Printer Attributes Report (alias response)  
Assign User Preference Supplemental Set  
Auto Wrap Mode  
DA2  
DAR  
DAR  
DECAUPSS  
DECAWM  
DECCAHT  
DECCAVT  
DECCRNLM  
DECHTS  
DECIPEM  
DECNS  
Clear All Horizontal Tabs  
Clear All Vertical Tabs  
Carriage Return / New Line Mode  
Horizontal Tab Set  
Invokes IBM Proprinter Emulation  
New Sheet  
DECPSM  
DECPSP  
DECRFS  
DECRVEC  
DECSHORP  
DECSHTS  
DECSLPP  
DECSLRM  
DECSTBM  
DECSTR  
DECSVTS  
DECVEC  
DECVERP  
Pitch Select Mode  
Proportional Spacing Mode  
Request Font Status (requests a font report)  
Draw Relative Vector  
Set Horizontal Pitch  
Set Horizontal Tab Stops (max of 16)  
Set Lines per Physical Page  
Set Left and Right Margins  
Set Top and Bottom Margins  
Soft Terminal Reset  
Set Vertical Tab Stops (max of 16)  
Draw Vector  
Set Vertical Pitch  
DECVTS  
DSR  
Vertical Tab Set  
Printer Status Report (Response to host or print  
manager)  
229  
230  
DSR  
Printer Status Request (Request from host or print  
manager)  
229  
GSM  
GSS  
HPA  
HPB  
HPR  
Graphic Size Modification  
Graphic Size Selection  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
Horizontal Position Absolute  
Horizontal Position Backwards  
Horizontal Position Relative  
LNM  
Line Feed / New Line Mode  
A family of sequences that map graphics character  
sets G0-G3 into GL and GR. These include:  
236  
236  
Locking Single Shifts  
207  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command  
Description  
Page  
SS2, SS3, SO, SI, LS0 to LS3 and LS1R to LS3R  
PUM  
Positioning Unit Mode  
237  
RIS  
SCS  
Reset to Initial State  
Select Coding System (invoke another resident  
emulation)  
237  
238  
SGR  
SGR  
SHS  
SPI  
Select Graphics Rendition (attribute selection)  
Select Graphics Rendition (font selection)  
Set Horizontal Spacing  
240  
243  
244  
246  
247  
248  
249  
249  
250  
250  
Set Pitch Increment  
SSU  
SVS  
TBC  
VPA  
VPB  
VPR  
Select Size Unit  
Set Vertical Spacing  
Tab Clear  
Vertical Position Absolute  
Vertical Position Backwards  
Vertical Position Relative  
Sixel Graphics  
Commands  
DECGCR  
DECGNL  
DECGRA  
DECGRI  
Graphics Carriage Return  
Graphics Next Line  
258  
258  
259  
260  
Set Graphics Attributes  
Graphics Repeat Introducer  
208  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
COMMAND DICTIONARY  
ASCEF  
Announce Subset of Code Extension Facilities:  
This indicates  
which subset of code extension facilities or what level of ISO 4873 is  
used for subsequent exchanges of information. These three control  
functions are macros that incorporate the effects of Select Character  
Set (SCS) and Locking Shift (LS) commands.  
Source:  
Destination:  
Application  
Printer  
Description  
Level 1 and level 2 result in the following settings:  
ASCII is assigned to G0 and mapped into GL.  
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental is assigned to G1 and mapped into GR.  
Level 3 results in the following settings:  
ASCII is assigned to G0 and mapped into GL.  
Format  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
ESC SP L  
27 32 76  
1B 20 4C  
ISO 4873, level 1  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);" L";  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
ESC SP M  
27 32 77  
1B 20 4D  
ISO 4873, level 2  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);" M";  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
ESC SP N  
27 32 78  
1B 20 4E  
ISO 4873, level 3  
BASIC:  
CHR$(27);" N";  
CPR  
Cursor Position Report:  
Response by a printer to an application for  
a Printer Status Request (DSR) cursor position request. It returns the  
current horizontal and vertical position via the serial connection.  
Source:  
Destination:  
Application  
Printer  
Format  
Mnemonic:  
Decimal:  
Hex:  
CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 R  
155 Pn1 59 Pn2 82  
9B Pn1 3B Pn2 52  
BASIC:  
CHR$(155);Pn1;";";Pn2;"R";  
Description  
The CPR parameters are defined as follows:  
Pn1:  
Pn2:  
Numeric parameters describing the active vertical position.  
Numeric parameter describing the active horizontal position.  
209  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CRM  
Control Representation Mode:  
This sequence enters or exits a mode  
in which the printer prints a graphic token for each byte. In this  
mode, the printer does not act upon control characters.  
Source:  
Destination:  
Exception (debug tool)  
Application  
Format  
ESC 3 h  
ESC 3 l  
Set CRM  
Reset CRM  
Description  
When Control Representation Mode is set, the printer does not act on  
control or special characters, with the following exceptions:  
<LF>  
Line Feed (LF) is printed as  
Feed is executed.  
, then a Carriage Return/Line  
<FF>,  
then a Form Feed is executed.  
Form Feed (FF) is printed as  
The Control Representation Mode reset command is printed as  
<CSI> 3 1  
, then is executed.  
CUU  
Cursor Up:  
Executes Vertical Position Backwards (VPB). CUU exists  
for backwards compatibility with older printers only. Use VPB instead  
of CUU. Future printers may not implement CUU.  
Source: Application Destination: Level 3 (outmoded command)  
Description  
See VPB.  
DA  
Printer Attributes:  
Requests the printer product identification. The  
printer responds to the DA command by sending a Printer Attributes  
Report (DAR). See DAR.  
Use DA (generic response) for normal Print manager inquiries and  
forward compatibility. Use DA (alias response) for backwards  
compatibility with older printers.  
It is recommended that you send this command with no parameter.  
Although the DEC PPL3 parsing rules allow a parameter in any  
control sequence, this command is traditionally sent without one.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI PS c  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Print manager  
Ps (if present) must equal 0.  
210  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DAR  
Printer Attributes Report (generic response):  
Response to a Print  
manager request for a Printer Attributes (DA) report.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Print manager  
Printer  
CSI ? Ps1 Ps2 … Psn c  
Description  
The printer sends this command when set to the generic response.  
The printer may be set to use the alias response. See DAR (alias  
response) in this chapter.  
Ps1 = 73  
Ps2-Psn describe the implemented extensions to the protocol. See the  
introduction to this chapter for an explanation of extensions. The  
following table contains a list of possible extensions.  
Parameter  
Hex  
34  
35  
36  
Decimal  
Protocol Extension  
Sixel graphics  
Katakana character set  
Reserved  
4
5
6
38  
8
Reserved  
39  
9
Variable page format select  
Text ruling vector drawing  
Reserved  
31 30  
31 31  
31 32  
10  
11  
12  
Hebrew character sets  
The reply to the DA request is sent to the host only after all preceding  
data (except DSR) has been processed and printed. This provides a  
way for host software to determine when all preceding data has been  
successfully printed.  
When values are not returned, they are left out of the response  
entirely (that is, there are not any blanks indicated by semicolons).  
However, software should always accept blank parameters.  
The printer sends parameters in ascending order. However, software  
should accept the parameters in any order.  
211  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DAR  
Printer Attributes Report (alias response):  
Response to a Print  
manager request for a Printer Attributes (DA) Report.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Print manager  
Printer  
CSI ? Ps1 Ps2 Psn c  
Description  
The printer sends this sequence when set to the alias response. The  
printer may be set to use the generic response. See the Programming  
Supplement for configuration information, and for the alias responses  
supported by the printer.  
The reply to the DA request is sent to the host only after all preceding  
data (except DSR) has been processed and printed. This provides a  
way for host software to determine when all preceding data has been  
successfully printed.  
DA2  
Secondary Printer Attributes:  
Requests a Secondary Printer  
Attributes Report.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Print manager  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
CSI PS > C  
Ps (if present) must equal 0.  
Description  
The printer responds to the DA2 request by sending a Secondary  
Printer Attributes Report (DAM).  
Notes to Software  
This command should be used only by diagnostic programs or  
specialized print managers.  
Use DA (generic response) for normal Print manager inquiries and  
forward compatibility. No additional data is sent by the printer to the  
print manager.  
212  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECAUPSS  
Assign User Preference Supplemental Set:  
Assigns a particular  
character set to the User Preference Supplemental set. This becomes  
the character set designated by the User Preference character set  
final when used in a Select Character Set (SCS) sequence.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Print manager  
DCS Ps U D ... D ST  
Description  
Ps indicates whether the User Preference set is a 94-character or a  
96-character set:  
Ps  
0
1
Meaning  
94-character set  
96-character set  
D ... D is a string containing the intermediate and final characters of  
the designating sequence used to explicitly select the supplemental  
character set. See SCS in this chapter for a list of intermediate and  
final characters.  
To assign DEC Supplemental as the User Preference character set,  
use the following DECAUPSS command:  
DCS 0 ! u %5 ST  
To assign ISO Latin-1 Supplemental as the User Preference set, use  
the following DECAUPSS command:  
DCS 1 ! u A ST  
To use the User Preference set, see User Preference under SCS.  
The supported character sets are as follows:  
DEC Supplemental (Ps must equal 0)  
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental (Ps must equal 1)  
DEC Hebrew Supplemental (Ps must equal 0)  
ISO Latin-Hebrew Supplemental (Ps must equal 1)  
DEC Technical (Ps must equal 0)  
Hebrew 7-bit (Ps must equal 0)  
213  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Handling  
The printer accepts the User Preference Supplemental character set  
selection even if the selected character set is not currently available.  
The character set may be downloaded before imaging text. If the  
character set is still not available when an imaging function is  
attempted, the printer follows the action taken on a character set  
fault.  
If Ps does not have the appropriate value for the D ... D identifier, a  
character set fault results.  
DECAWM  
Autowrap Mode:  
Instructs the printer whether to execute an  
automatic Carriage Return/Line Feed when the active position  
exceeds the right margin.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 2  
Application  
CSI ? 7 h  
Set Autowrap mode.  
CSI ? 7 1  
Reset Autowrap mode.  
Description  
When DECAWM is set and the active position is beyond the right  
margin, printable characters that follow are printed on the next line  
beginning at the Line Home Position. When DECAWM is reset, all  
printable characters received beyond the right margin are ignored  
(truncated).  
The printer never autowraps text during justification. See JFY for  
more information.  
The printer always autowraps during Control Representation Mode  
(CRM).  
DECCAHT  
Clear All Horizontal Tabs:  
Clears horizontal tab stops.  
Source: Application Destination: Level 2  
(outmoded command)  
Format  
ESC 2 1/11 3/2  
Description  
See Tabulation Clear (TBC) with Ps = 2.  
Notes to Software  
This command is included for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use this command.  
214  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECCAVT  
Clear All Vertical Tabs:  
Clears vertical tab stops.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Application  
Level 2  
(outmoded command)  
Format  
ESC 4  
Description  
See Tabulation Clear (TBC) with Ps = 4.  
Notes to Software  
This command is included for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use this command.  
DECCRNLM  
Carriage Return /New Line Mode:  
Instructs the printer whether to  
perform a Line Feed (LF) upon receipt of a Carriage Return (CR).  
Source: Print manager  
Format  
Destination: Levels 2, 3  
CSI ? 4 0 h  
CR acts as New Line.  
CR acts as Carriage Return.  
CSI ? 4 0 1  
Description  
If DECCRNLM is set and a CR is received, the active position  
advances to the Line Home Position of the next line. If DECCRNLM is  
reset and a CR is received, the active position returns to the Line  
Home Position of the current line.  
Notes to Software  
Print managers developed by Digital handle record terminators  
without using Carriage Return/New Line Mode. This command is  
available for third-party Print managers.  
DECHTS  
Horizontal Tab Set:  
Executes Horizontal Tab Set (HTS).  
Source:  
Destination:  
Application  
Level 2(outmoded  
command)  
Format  
ESC 1  
Description  
See HTS in the Control Characters section, p. 202.  
Notes to Software  
This command is included for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use this command.  
215  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECIPEM  
Entering IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode:  
Executes Set Other  
Coding System (SOCS), enabling IBM Proprinter Emulation mode.  
Source: Destination:  
Print manager  
Levels 2, 3  
Exception  
Format  
CSI ? 5 8 h  
Description  
See SOCS with final character "=" (3DH).  
Some printers do not support Emulation mode  
Notes to Software  
This command is provided for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should use SOCS instead.  
DECNS  
New Sheet:  
Executes a conditional Form Feed.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 3 extension  
CSI Pn SP s  
Pn must equal 0.  
DECPSM  
Pitch Select Mode:  
When set, postpones processing of Set Horizontal  
Pitch (DECSHORP). The pitch is based on the font. When reset, uses  
the horizontal pitch selected by DECSHORP.  
Source:  
Destination:  
Levels 2, 3  
Application  
(outmoded command)  
Format  
CSI ? 2 9 h  
CSI ? 2 9 1  
Description  
Sets Horizontal Pitch Select Mode.  
Resets Horizontal Pitch Select Mode.  
When the selected font cannot be modified algorithmically to match  
the pitch selected by DECSHORP, DECPSM defines whether to use  
the pitch from the font, or to print the characters at an unnatural  
pitch.  
By extension, even if the font can be modified, DECPSM is used to  
force the use of the natural pitch of the selected font and postpone  
the processing of DECSHORP.  
When DECPSM is set, received DECSHORP values are stored but not  
processed. When DECPSM becomes reset, the pending DECSHORP (if  
any) is processed.  
If there is no concept of natural pitch implemented within the printer,  
DECPSM is ignored.  
Side Effects  
DECPSM can cause a change in pitch such that a pending  
DECSHORP may be executed. This results in the side effects  
described under the DECSHORP command.  
216  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the DECPSP (Proportional Spacing) command is set, the DECPSM  
command sets the tabs and margins as usual, as listed in Side  
Effects under DECSHORP in this chapter. However, the pitch is  
stored and is not used until DECPSP is reset.  
Notes to Software  
This command is provided for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use DECPSP. Use  
DECSHORP with Ps = 0 to select the natural pitch for the currently  
selected font. Use other DECSHORP parameters to select pitches  
other than the natural pitch.  
Use DECPSM with monospaced fonts only.  
DECPSP  
Proportional Spacing Mode:  
When set, enables proportional spacing  
of characters. When reset, selects monospaced printing.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
CSI ? 2 7 h  
CSI ? 2 7 1  
Description  
Sets Proportional Spacing Mode.  
Resets Proportional Spacing Mode.  
When a proportional font is in use and DECPSP is reset, the printer  
prints characters on a monospaced grid.  
DECPSP has no effect on tab settings.  
DECRFS  
Request Font Status:  
Requests a font report.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Print manager  
Levels 2, 3  
CSI Ps " {  
Description  
The selective parameters for DECRFS are as follows:  
0 = Requests both reports (same as 1 followed by 2).  
1 = Requests font status (includes all built-in fonts, downloaded  
fonts).  
2 = Requests status of memory bytes available for downloaded fonts.  
The host sends this command to request a status report of the fonts  
available for printing, the memory available for font download, or  
both.  
The parameter Ps selects the type of font status requested.  
Notes  
Data fields are empty as explained in DECFSR.  
Error Handling  
If Ps is any value other than 0, 1, or 2, the printer ignores this  
command.  
217  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECRVEC  
Draw Relative Vector:  
Draws a vector starting at the active position.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 3 Extension  
CSI Ps1 Pn2 Pn3 SP  
Description  
The selective parameters for Ps1 are as follows:  
Ps1  
0
Action  
Draws an X (horizontal) line to the right.  
Draws a Y (vertical) line down.  
Draws an X (horizontal) line to the left.  
Draws a Y (vertical) line up.  
1
2
3
Numeric parameters provide line length and width:  
Pn  
Meaning  
Pn2  
Pn3  
Line length n  
Line width n  
The printer interprets the line length and width as pixels, decipoints  
or centipoints. The unit is selected using the Select Size Unit (SSU)  
command. The Positioning Unit Mode (PUM) setting does not affect  
the unit selected.  
The starting point of the line is the current position.  
X lines are horizontal with respect to the intended reading page  
orientation, and Y lines are vertical with respect to the intended  
reading page orientation.  
The DECRVEC command does not change the active position. It is  
not affected by the First Character Flag.  
Since a vector has length and width, it is considered a filled  
rectangle. The rectangle is not centered on the endpoints. A vector  
drawn from position (X,Y), with a length of L = (Pn2 - 1) and a width  
of W = (Pn3 - 1), has the four corners listed in the following table.  
Ps1  
0
Upper Left  
X,Y  
Upper Right  
X+L,Y  
Lower Left  
X,Y+W  
X,Y+L  
Lower Right  
X+L,Y+W  
X+W,Y+L  
X,Y+W  
1
X,Y  
X+W,Y  
2
X-L,Y  
X,Y-L  
X,Y  
X-L,Y+W  
X,Y  
3
X+W,Y-L  
X+W,Y  
Error Handling  
Relative vectors may extend beyond the limit bounds (left right, top,  
and bottom margins). If the vector extends beyond the printable area,  
it is clipped at the edge of the printable area.  
218  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECRVEC  
(continued)  
If the requested length is less than 1 pixel long (after conversion to  
pixel units), the printer draws a line I pixel long. If the requested line  
is less than 1 pixel wide, the printer draws a line 1 pixel wide.  
DECSHORP  
Set Horizontal Pitch:  
Selects character spacing for monospaced  
fonts.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Ps w  
Destination:  
Application  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Description  
The DECSHORP command determines the number of  
characters/inch (pitch) that the printer uses when Pitch Select Mode  
(DECPSM) is reset. If DECPSM is set, the printer saves the  
DECSHORP parameter.  
The selective parameters for DECSHORP are as follows:  
Ps  
0
Selection  
Determined by current font.  
720 centipoints (10 cpi)  
600 centipoints (12 cpi)  
550 centipoints (13.2 cpi)  
440 centipoints (16.5 cpi)  
1440 centipoints (5 cpi)  
1200 centipoints (6 cpi)  
1090 centipoints (6.6 cpi)  
870 centipoints (8.25 cpi)  
480 centipoints (15 cpi)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11  
420 centipoints (approx. 17.1 cpi, or  
14/240 in.  
12  
13  
14  
15  
840 centipoints (approx. 8.5 cpi)  
400 centipoints (18 cpi)  
800 centipoints (9 cpi)  
700 centipoints (approx. 10.3 cpi)  
There may be printer limitations on pitch based on resolution  
restrictions. If fallbacks are used, however; the resulting characters  
are the same size or smaller than those requested. See the discussion  
of horizontal resolution in the Programming Supplement for the  
actual pitches supported.  
Side Effects  
Execution of DECSHORP produces the following side effects:  
Sets the Left Margin Position to the origin.  
Sets the Right Margin Position to the right printable limit.  
Clears the Right Margin Flag.  
219  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSHORP  
(continued)  
Sets the Line Home Position equal to the Left Margin Position.  
Sets the Line End Position equal to the Right Margin Position.  
Adjusts horizontal tab stops (multiplies each tab location by the  
ratio of the new Horizontal Advance Increment over the old RAI).  
For example, if a horizontal tab stop is set at column 12 with a  
horizontal pitch of 12 characters/inch, the tab stop stored is I  
inch from the origin. But if a DECSHORP command changes the  
pitch to 6 characters/inch, the tab stop moves to 2 inches from  
the origin in order to retain 12 characters between the origin and  
the tab stop.  
If the active horizontal position is not a multiple of the new HAI, it  
is adjusted rightward to the next multiple of HAI.  
DECSHORP affects justification. See Justify (JFY).  
Error Handling  
All other parameter values cause this command to be ignored except  
for the bounds and Right Margin Flag resets described under Side  
Effects. A parameter that is valid but unsupported in a particular  
printer results in a fallback. See the discussion of horizontal  
resolution in the Programming Supplement for a list of pitches  
supported.  
DECSHTS  
Set Horizontal Tab Stops  
: Adds one or more tab stops to the  
horizontal tab table (max of 16).  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 2  
Application  
CSI Pn Pn u  
Description  
Pn is a number of units, depending on Positioning Unit Mode (PUM)  
and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
Each Pn parameter is a selected horizontal tab stop. A maximum of  
16 tab stops can be selected in one command–the printer can receive  
Pn values in any order, it sorts them and places them into the tab  
table.  
The printer sets tab stops relative to the page origin and not to the  
left margin. Changing the left margin does not change the position of  
tab stops. Changing the pitch with the Set Horizontal Pitch  
(DECSHORP) command modifies tab positions to keep the number of  
columns between tab stops constant.  
The printer allows at least one tab per eight columns along the widest  
paper supported at the smallest built-in monospaced pitch. See the  
Programming Supplement for the exact number.  
Tab stops can be set outside the current margins; however, the  
printer does not use tab stops beyond the right margin.  
220  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSHTS  
(continued)  
Error Handling  
If the printer receives more than 16 tab stops, it sets the first 16 and  
ignores the rest. If the same tab stop is sent more than once, the  
printer sets the tab stop once. The printer ignores a sequence sent  
without tab stop parameters.  
When the number of new tab settings exceeds the maximum, the  
printer discards the tab stops with the highest values.  
DECSLPP  
Set Lines per Physical Page:  
Defines the logical form length. The  
form length is the vertical size of the printed area on a page.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn t  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2  
Application  
Description  
This command sets the page length to the physical distance that  
corresponds to Pn units (lines at the current vertical pitch,  
decipoints, centipoints, or pixels). Once form length is set, changing  
the size of the units does not change the form length  
If Pn equals 0, the printer sets the form length to the logical paper  
size. Pn is a number of units, depending on Positioning Unit Mode  
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
The following table lists the parameter values for a small selection of  
page lengths as a function of vertical pitch. These values are used  
only when PUM is reset.  
Length in  
Inches  
11/3  
8.5/2  
8.5  
Lines Per Page  
2
3
11  
N/A  
N/A  
33  
4
N/A  
17  
6
22  
N/A  
51  
8
N/A  
34  
68  
88  
12  
44  
51  
102  
132  
168  
252  
N/A  
N/A  
17  
22  
28  
34  
11  
14  
21  
44  
66  
42  
63  
56  
84  
112  
168  
42  
84  
126  
Where N/A is indicated, the length is riot selectable while the  
indicated vertical pitch is in effect. If it is selected using another  
vertical pitch and a subsequent pitch change occurs, page lengths of  
a non-integral number of lines may result. Page wrap occurs after the  
last whole line.  
The form length limits the range of possible settings for the Set Top  
and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM) command.  
Side Effects  
The printer resets the top margin to I and the bottom margin to the  
printable area when changing page length. DECSLPP also resets the  
vertical format bounds to the margins.  
DECSLPP affects justification. See Justify (JFY).  
221  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSLPP  
(continued)  
Error Handling  
If the Pn parameter is greater than the maximum size for the paper  
and origin, then the printer sets the form length to the maximum size  
for the paper and origin  
Notes to Software  
Use DECSLPP only at the top of a new page.  
DECSLRM  
Set Left and Right Margins:  
Sets the horizontal margins.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Levels 2, 3  
CSI Pn1 Pn2 s  
Description  
Pn1 is a decimal value that specifies the left margin position.  
Pn1  
0
n
Meaning  
Leave margin unchanged.  
Set left margin to n units.  
The unit for Pn1 and Pn2 is selected using the Positioning Unit Mode  
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) commands.  
The printer places data only within the left and right margins, with  
the following exceptions:  
Draw Vector (DECVEC) and Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC)  
draw lines outside the margins.  
During justification, if the required spacing between words is less  
than the specified minimum width of the space character, text  
may exceed the right margin.  
If margins are less than one Horizontal Advance Increment (HAI)  
apart, text may exceed the right margin.  
The printer sets the margins relative to the page origin, as set by  
Origin Placement Mode (DECOPM). Changing the page origin causes  
the margins to move.  
Changing right and left margins does not affect horizontal tab stops.  
Active position is only affected if it is outside the new margins. See  
Error Handling.  
Select Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP), Page Format Select (PFS),  
Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS), and the reset commands  
affect margin settings.  
Side Effects  
DECSLRM sets the Line Home Position equal to the Left Margin  
Position and the Line End Position equal to the Right Margin  
Position.  
DECSLRM affects justification. See Justify (JFY).  
222  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSLRM  
(continued)  
Error Handling  
If the active position is less than the left margin, then the printer sets  
the active position to the new left margin.  
If the active position is greater than the right margin, the printer sets  
the Right Margin Flag.  
If Pn2 is to the right of the right printable limit, the printer sets the  
right margin to the right printable limit.  
If Pn1 is greater than or equal to Pn2, the printer ignores the  
command, except for the side effects listed above.  
If DECOPM is set, characters that precede the left printable limit are  
not printed.  
DECSLRM Set Left and Right Margins  
Notes to Software  
Margins can be changed or reset as a side effect of other actions.  
Also, changing the origin with DECOPM changes the locations of the  
left and right margins with respect to the paper.  
Side Effects  
DECSNC causes a conditional Sheet Feed. The selected parameter  
affects all subsequent sheets.  
If Pn equals 0, the printer sets Pn to 1.  
A maximum of 99 copies can be selected. If Pn is greater than 99, the  
printer sets Pn to 99.  
DECSTBM  
Set Top and Bottom Margins:  
Sets the vertical margins.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Application  
Levels 2, 3  
CSI Pn1 Pn2 r  
Description  
Pn1 is a decimal value that specifies the top margin position.  
Pn1  
0
n
Meaning  
Leave margin unchanged.  
Set top margin to n units.  
Pn2 is a decimal value that specifies the bottom margin position.  
Pn2  
0
n
Meaning  
Leave margin unchanged.  
Set bottom margin to n units.  
The unit for Pn1 and Pn2 is selected using the Positioning Unit Mode  
(PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU) commands.  
223  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSTBM  
(continued)  
The printer places data only within the top and bottom margins, with  
the following exceptions:  
• Draw Vector (DECVEC) and Draw Relative Vector (DECRVEC) draw  
lines outside the margins.  
• Partial Line Down (PLD) may print part of a character below the  
bottom margin.  
• Partial Line Up (PLU) may print part of a character above the top  
margin  
The Superscript and Subscript attributes set by Select Graphic  
Rendition (SGR) can print characters above the top margin.  
If the margins are less than one character height apart, text may  
exceed the bottom margin.  
If the active position is less than one character height from die  
top margin and the First Character Flag is not set, text may  
exceed the top margin.  
The printer sets the margins relative to the page origin, as set by  
Origin Placement Mode (DECOPM). Changing the page origin causes  
the margins to move.  
Changing the top and bottom margins does not affect vertical tab  
stops. The active position is affected only if it is outside the new  
margins.  
Set Lines per Physical Page (DECSLPP), Page Format Select (PFS),  
Variable Page Format Select (DECVPFS), and the reset commands  
affect margin settings.  
Side Effects  
DECSTBM sets the Page Home Line equal to the top margin and Page  
End Line equal to the bottom margin.  
DECSTBM affects justification. See Justify (JFY).  
Error Handling  
If the active position is above the new top margin, then the printer  
sets the active position to the new top margin, and sets the First  
Character Flag.  
If the active position is below the new bottom margin, the printer sets  
the active position to the new bottom margin.  
If Pn2 is greater than the form length, the printer sets the bottom  
margin to the form length.  
If Pn1 is greater than or equal to Panama, the printer ignores the  
command, except for the side effects listed above.  
If DECOPM is set, characters above the top printable limit are not  
printed.  
224  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSTBM  
DECSTR  
(continued)  
Notes to Software  
Margins can be changed or reset as a side effect of other actions.  
Also, changing the origin with DECOPM changes the locations of the  
top and bottom margins with respect to the paper  
DECSTBM should be used only on a new page.  
Soft Terminal Reset:  
Resets the initial state values in the printer.  
Also returns to DEC PPL3 regardless of the power-up protocol  
selected.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn p  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Application, Print manager  
Pn (if present) must be 0.  
Description  
DECSTR is processed synchronously with the rest of the data stream.  
The printer sets all the Initial State Values listed in the Programming  
Supplement to the "DECSTR" conditions.  
The printer does not run self-test, change the current communication  
settings, or clear the input buffer.  
Side Effects  
DECSTR resets Printer Status Report (DSR) events, including  
communication failure and input buffer overflow.  
The printer performs a conditional Form Feed.  
DECSTR affects justification. See Justify (JFY).  
See Select Other Coding System (SOCS) when an alternate protocol is  
in use.  
Error Handling  
Any parameters received with DECSTR are ignored.  
DECSTR Soft Terminal Reset  
Notes to Software  
It is recommended that you send this command with no parameter.  
Although the DEC PPL3 parsing rules allow a parameter in any  
sequence, this sequence is traditionally sent without one. Older  
Digital printers may not accept the 0 parameter.  
225  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECSVTS  
Set Vertical Tab Stops:  
tab table (max of 16).  
Adds one or more tab stops to the vertical  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 2  
CSI Pn ! p  
Description  
Pn is a number of units, depending on Positioning Unit Mode (PUM)  
and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
Each Pn parameter is a selected vertical tab stop. A maximum of 16  
tab stops can be selected in one command. The printer can receive Pn  
parameters in any order; it sorts them and places them into the tab  
table.  
The printer sets tab stops relative to the page origin and not to the  
top margin. Changing the top margin does not charge the position of  
tab stops. Changing the pitch with Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP)  
modifies tab positions to keep the number of lines between tab stops  
constant.  
The printer allows at least one tab per line along the longest paper  
supported at the smallest built-in line spacing.  
Tab stops can be set outside the current margins; however, the  
printer does not use tab stops beyond the bottom margin.  
Error Handling  
If the printer receives more than 16 tab stops, it sets the first 16 and  
ignores the rest. If the same tab stop is sent more than once, the  
printer sets the tab stop once. The printer ignores a command sent  
without tab stop parameters.  
When the number of new tab settings exceeds the maximum, the  
printer discards the tab stops with the highest values.  
226  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECVEC  
Draw Vector:  
Draw a vertical or horizontal line.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 3 Extension  
CSI Ps1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4 ; Pn5 ! |  
Description  
The selective parameter options are as follows:  
Ps1  
0
1
Action  
Draw X (horizontal) line.  
Draw Y (vertical) line.  
Select the numeric parameters as follows:  
Pn  
Meaning  
Pn2  
Pn3  
Pn4  
Pn5  
X start position  
Y start position  
Line length  
Line width  
DECVEC does not modify the active position.  
The unit for numeric parameters is selected using the Select Size  
Unit (SSU) command Positioning Unit Mode (PUM) has no effect on  
DECVEC unit size.  
For an X line, Pn4 specifies horizontal length and Pn5 specifies  
vertical width. For a Y line, Pn4 specifies vertical length and Pn5  
specifies horizontal width. Since a vector has length and width, it is  
considered a filled rectangle. The rectangle is not centered on the  
endpoints. DECVEC rectangles are positioned identically relative to  
the endpoints as relative vectors. See DECRVEC.  
Error Handling  
If Ps1 is any value other than 0 or 1, the entire command is ignored.  
Missing parameters are interpreted as 0. If the printer receives a  
DECVEC command with too many parameters, the first five are used  
and others are ignored.  
If the requested line is less than 1 pixel long, the printer draws a line  
1 pixel long. If the requested line is less than 1 pixel wide, the printer  
draws a line 1 pixel wide.  
Do not rely upon the defaults for Pn4 and Pn5. Define the vector to  
be at least 1 pixel long and 1 pixel wide. Poor quality may result  
when processing very short or very thin vectors.  
Margin settings do not affect vectors. DECVEC may draw lines that  
extend beyond the margins, but not out of the printable area. Vectors  
that extend outside of the printable area are clipped.  
227  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECVERP  
Set Vertical Pitch:  
Selects line spacing  
Source: Application Destination: Levels 1, 2  
Format  
CST Ps 2  
Description  
Selects the number of lines printed for each inch on a page. Changing  
the vertical pitch changes the white space between lines, not the size  
of the character. If the number of lines/inch is increased, the amount  
of white space is decreased between the lines.  
The selective parameter values for DECVERP are as follows:  
Ps  
0
Decipoints  
120  
Lines/Inch  
6
1
120  
6
2
90  
8
3
4
60  
360  
12  
2
5
240  
3
6
180  
4
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Same as Ps = 11  
115  
86  
66 / A-size printable area  
88 / A-size printable area  
132 / A-size printable area  
22 / A-size printable area  
33 / A-size printable area  
44 / A-size printable area  
57  
346  
230  
172  
In some printers, the printable area is slightly smaller than the  
physical paper size in use. The reduction is never more than 1/4 inch  
on each edge, or a total of 1/2 inch. The DECVERP parameters 11-16  
are the counterparts to 1-6. They are intended to support traditional  
lines/page requirements on a print area that is slightly less than 11  
inches long.  
The exact vertical pitch produced for parameters 11-16 is  
printer-dependent. The result is defined as lines/page on the  
printable area defined for portrait printing on A-sized paper for that  
printer.  
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSTM) does not affect DECVERR  
Side Effects  
Vertical tab stops are adjusted in order to retain a constant number  
of lines between vertical tabs. For example, if a vertical tab stop is set  
at 12 lines with a vertical pitch of 6 lines/inch, the tab stop stored is  
2 inches from the origin. But if a DECVERP command changes the  
pitch to 12 lines/inch, the tab stop moves to 1 inch from the origin in  
order to retain 12 lines between the origin and the tab stop.  
DECVERP does not affect the active position, top and bottom  
margins, or the page length.  
228  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECVERP  
DECVTS  
(continued)  
Error Handling  
If the vertical pitch is set greater than the page length, the printer  
images one line/page.  
If Ps is invalid, the command is ignored.  
Vertical Tab Set:  
Executes Vertical Tab Set (VTS).  
Source: Application  
Destination: Level 2  
(outmoded command)  
Format  
ESC 3  
Notes to Software  
This command is included for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use this command.  
DSR  
Device Status Request:  
Source: Print manager  
Format  
Requests error status or cursor position.  
Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3  
CSI Ps n  
CSI ? Ps n  
Selects Digital private status reporting  
state.  
Description  
In response to a DSR command, the printer sends a single brief or  
extended status report. If you enable unsolicited reports, the printer  
sends additional reports whenever any reportable status condition  
changes state.  
The printer processes the DSR request (except for cursor position  
reports) immediately upon receipt, asynchronously to the rest of the  
data stream. This allows the printer to respond to the request when  
an error has halted the printing process and the input buffer is full.  
The selective parameters for the Printer Status Request command are  
as follows:  
Ps  
Selection  
0 or 5  
6
?1  
Sends an extended status report.  
Sends a Cursor Position Report (CPR).  
Disables all unsolicited status reports.  
Enables brief unsolicited status reports,  
sends extended status report.  
?2  
?3  
Enables extended unsolicited status reports,  
sends extended status report.  
The host sends the Printer Status Request command to request a  
status report of detected errors or to report the current cursor  
position. There are two types of reports - extended and brief The brief  
report sends generic error codes. The extended report sends both  
generic and specific error codes.  
229  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The number of DSR requests the printer can process is limited only  
by the transmission time of each report.  
Error Handling  
If Ps has a value other than those shown, the printer ignores the  
entire command.  
DSR  
Device Status Report:  
Reports error status. The printer sends this  
report:  
In response to an error condition (if unsolicited reports are  
enabled)  
In response to a Printer Status Request (DSR) with Ps = 0, 5, ?2,  
or ?3.  
Unsolicited status reports are sent upon completion of the current  
page.  
Source:  
Destination:  
Printer  
Print manager  
Brief Report Format  
CSI Ps n  
CSI 3 n  
Error  
CSI 30 n  
No errors  
Extended Report Format  
Brief report followed by:  
CSI Pn1 ; Pn2 ; … ; Pnn  
Brief Report Description  
The brief report parameters are as follows:  
Ps  
3
Meaning  
Error  
30  
Error.  
Extended Report Description  
Each Pn value is an error code of up to three digits. Error codes occur  
in pairs: a generic code, followed by a specific code.  
CSI ? 36 ? 216 n  
CSI ? 26 ? 212 n  
Printer paper out error  
Non paper error  
Notes  
If unsolicited reports are enabled, errors are reported as they occur.  
If no errors occurred, the printer returns a generic "no error" code.  
This code varies depending on the printer configuration.  
If an event error occurs when unsolicited reports are disabled, the  
event is stored and reported on the next request. If a state error  
occurs when unsolicited reports are disabled, an error report is  
generated on the next request only if the error condition still exists -  
for example, the cover is open or the printer is off line.  
If enabled, the printer transmits a report before going offline in  
response to a serious engine error.  
230  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GSM  
Graphic Size Modification:  
Modifies the Current Font Definition  
height or width, established by the Graphic Size Selection (GSS)  
command.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
CSI Pn1 Pn2 SP B  
Description  
Pn1 is a decimal value that specifies the height of the character as a  
percentage of die height selected by the GSS command.  
Pn1  
0
n
Meaning  
Set height to 100% of GSS.  
Set height to Ps% of GSS.  
Pn2 is a decimal value that specifies the width as a percentage of the  
width set by the GSS command.  
Pn2  
0
n
Meaning  
Sets width to 100% of width set by GSS.  
Percentage of the width set by GSS.  
The modification remains in effect until the next GSM or Graphic Size  
Selection (GSS) command occurs in the data stream, or until reset or  
power down.  
The GSM command can be used in the middle of a line without  
affecting the alignment of characters along the baseline.  
Side Effects  
The GSM command affects line spacing only when a font-dependent  
Vertical Advance Increment (VAI) is in effect.  
Notes to Software  
If you are not using a font-dependent VAI, or if you switch to taller  
characters in the middle of a line, use Select Vertical Spacing (SVS) to  
accommodate the change in character size.  
231  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GSS  
Graphic Size Selection:  
Establishes the height and width for the  
Current Font Definition.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
CSI Pn SP C  
Description  
Select Pn as follows:  
Pn  
0
n
Meaning  
Sets height to 100 decipoints.  
Sets height to Pn units.  
The unit size depends on the Select Size Unit (SSU) command setting.  
Positioning Unit Mode (PUM) has no affect on GSS.  
The height of a font implicitly defines the width.  
The GSS selection remains in effect until the next occurrence of GSS  
in the data stream, reset, or power down. The height and width  
selected may be further modified by Graphic Size Modification (GSM).  
The GSS command can be used in die middle of a line without  
affecting the alignment of characters along the baseline.  
Side Effects  
GSS sets GSM to 100;100.  
The GSS command affects line spacing only when font-dependent  
spacing is selected.  
Notes to Software  
If you are not using font-dependent spacing, or if you switch to taller  
characters in the middle of a line, use Select Vertical Spacing (SVS) to  
accommodate the change in character size.  
232  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HPA  
Horizontal Position Absolute:  
Moves to a new active horizontal  
position. Motion occurs either to the right or to the left.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Levels 2, 3  
Application  
CSI Pn 9/11 - 6/0  
Description  
Select Pn as follows:  
Pn  
0
Meaning  
Interpreted as 1  
n
Number of units, depending on Positioning  
Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
When lining attributes are invoked by Select Graphic Rendition  
(SGR), HPA underlines, double underlines, overlines, or strikes  
through from the current position to the target position.  
The First Character Flag has no effect on HPA.  
Error Handling  
If Pn is to the left of the Left Margin Position, the printer sets the  
horizontal position to the Left Margin Position.  
Sets the right margin flag if the Pn is greater than the right margin.  
Clears the right margin flag if the Pn is less than or equal to the right  
margin.  
233  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HPB  
Horizontal Position Backward:  
Moves the active position to the left  
a specified number of units.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
Description  
Select Pn as follows:  
Pn  
0
Meaning  
Interpreted as 1.  
n
Number of units, depending on Positioning  
Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
The HPB command can place the active horizontal position to the left  
of the Line Home Position or to the right of the Line End Position.  
When lining attributes are invoked by Select Graphic Rendition  
(SGR), HPB underlines, double underlines, overlines, or strikes  
through from the current position to the target position.  
The First Character Flag has no effect on HPB.  
Error Handling  
If the resulting active position would be to the left of the Left Margin  
Position, the printer sets the horizontal position to the Left Margin  
Position.  
When the Right Margin Flag is set, the command is ignored.  
234  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HPR  
Horizontal Position Relative:  
Moves the active position to the right  
a specified number of units.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn a  
Destination:  
Application  
Levels 2, 3  
Description  
Select Pn as follows:  
Pn  
0
Meaning  
Interpreted as 1  
n
Number of units, depending on Positioning  
Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
When lining attributes are invoked by Select Graphic Rendition  
(SGR), HPR underlines, double underlines, overlines, or strikes  
through text from the current position to the target position.  
The First Character Flag has no effect on HPB.  
Error Handling  
If the resulting position would be to the right of the Right Margin  
Position, the printer sets the horizontal position equal to the Right  
Margin Position and sets the Right Margin Flag.  
When the Right Margin Flag is set, the command is ignored.  
If Pn moves the current horizontal position to the left of the left  
margin, the active position is set to the left margin.  
Double underline and strike through are not supported.  
235  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LNM  
Line Feed/New Line Mode:  
Instructs the printer to move to the Line  
Home Position on the next line upon receipt of a Line Feed (LF).  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Print manager  
Levels 2, 3  
CSI 2 0 h  
LF acts as New Line  
LF acts as Line Feed  
CSI 2 0 1  
Description  
If LNM is set and a Line Feed is received, the active position advances  
to the Line Home Position of the next line. If LNM is reset and a Line  
Feed is received, the active position advances to the same horizontal  
position on the next line.  
LS*/LS*R/SS*  
Locking and Single Shifts:  
These sequences invoke the GO-G3  
character sets into GL or GR.  
Source: Application Destination: Levels 1, 2, 3  
Format  
Name  
Single Shift 2  
Mnemonic  
SS2  
Sequence  
ESC N (1B 4E)  
Function  
The character that follows  
the SS2 is selected from G2.  
The character that follows  
SS3 is selected from G3.  
See Locking Shift 1.  
See Locking Shift 0.  
G0 becomes the active GL  
character set.  
Single Shift 3  
SS3  
ESC O (1B 4F)  
Shift Out  
Shift In  
Locking Shift 0  
SO  
SI  
LS0  
SO (0E)  
SI (0F)  
SI (0F)  
Locking Shift 1  
Locking Shift 2  
Locking Shift 3  
LS1  
SO (0E)  
G1 becomes the active GL  
character set.  
G2 becomes the active GL  
character set.  
G3 becomes the active GL  
character set.  
G1 becomes the active GR  
character set.  
G2 becomes the active GR  
character set.  
G3 becomes the active GR  
character set.  
LS2  
ESC n (1B 6E)  
ESC o (1B 6F)  
ESC ~ (1B 7E)  
ESC } (1B 7D)  
ESC | (1B 7C)  
LS3  
Locking Shift 1  
Right  
Locking Shift 2  
Right  
Locking Shift 3  
Right  
LS1R  
LS2R  
LS3R  
There is no LS0R.  
Description  
See page 198 for more information on designating and invoking  
character sets.  
The effect of a single shift (SS2 or SS3) continues only for the first  
printable GL character that follows the single shift sequence.  
The effect of a locking shift (LS2, LS3, LS1R, LS2R, or LS3R)  
continues indefinitely; that is, until another locking shift changes the  
effect, or until reset or power down.  
236  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PUM  
Positioning Unit Mode:  
Establishes the unit for the numeric  
parameters of certain control functions.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Application  
Level 3  
CSI 1 1 h  
Sets PUM.  
CSI 1 1 1  
Resets PUM.  
Description  
When PUM is set, the setting of Select Size Unit (SSU) determines  
unit size: decipoint, centipoint, or pixels. When PUM is reset, unit  
size is defined as columns in horizontal spacing commands and lines  
in vertical spacing commands. Actual column widths and line heights  
are set by control functions or are taken from the currently selected  
font.  
The Positioning Unit Mode (PUM) establishes the unit for the numeric  
parameters of the following sequences:  
HPA, HPB, HPR  
VPA, VPB, CUU  
VPR, DECSHTS, DECSVTS  
DECSLPP, DECSTBM, DECSLRM  
RIS  
Reset to Initial State:  
Resets printer state variables to their initial  
values. RIS has the same effect as Soft Terminal Reset (DECSTR).  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Print manager  
ESC c 1/11 6/3  
Description  
See the DECSTR command for details.  
Notes to Software  
This command is included for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only. Conforming software should not use this command.  
ESC c is reserved for other uses in some protocols.  
237  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCS  
Select Character Set:  
G1, G2, or G3.  
Designates a graphic character set into G0,  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
ESC I1 I2 ... In F  
Description  
I1 is an intermediate character selected from the following table.  
Hex  
I1 Character  
94-Character Sets  
( Left parenthesis  
) Right parenthesis  
* Asterisk  
Code  
Map into G-set  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
G0  
G1  
G2  
G3  
+ Plus sign  
96-Character Sets  
- Minus sign  
. Period  
2D  
2E  
2F  
G1  
G2  
G3  
/ Slash  
238  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table lists the character set designating characters.  
These character sets are selected using the identifier as F or I2 F in  
the SCS sequence.  
I2F Designator  
Characters  
Hex  
Code  
Character Set  
94-Character Sets  
British  
A
B
4
41  
42  
ASCII  
DEC Dutch  
34  
DEC Finnish  
5
35  
French  
R
52  
DEC French-Canadian  
German  
9
39  
K
4B  
DEC Hebrew Supplemental  
DEC 7-bit Hebrew  
ISO Italian  
“4  
%=  
Y
22 34  
25 3D  
59  
Legal  
%4  
I
25 34  
49  
JIS Katakana  
JIS Roman  
J
4A  
DEC Norwegian/Danish  
ISO Spanish  
6
36  
Z
5A  
DEC Swedish  
7
37  
DEC Swiss  
=
3D  
Norwegian/Danish  
DEC Supplemental  
DEC Technical  
`
60  
%5  
>
25 35  
3E  
DEC Special Graphics  
DEC Portuguese  
User Preference Supplemental1  
96-Character Sets  
ISO Latin-1 Supplemental  
ISO Latin-Hebrew Supplemental  
ISO Latin-9 Supplemental (Euro)  
0
30  
%6  
<
25 36  
3C  
A
H
b
41  
48  
62  
1For compatibility with older printers, set the User Preference  
Supplemental character set to the DEC Supplemental character set.  
The following SCS sequences select Digital character sets as  
fallbacks. Since Digital reserves the right to redefine these sequences  
in the future to conform to ISO standards, it is recommended that  
conforming software not use these sequences but instead use the  
Digital escape sequences in the previous table to select these sets.  
239  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCS  
(Continued)  
G1  
SCS Fallbacks  
G3  
G0  
G2  
Character Set  
ESC ( C  
ESC ) C  
ESC * C ESC + C  
Fallback to DEC Finnish  
Fallback to DEC French  
Canadian  
ESC ( Q  
ESC ) Q  
ESC * Q ESC + Q  
Fallback to DEC  
ESC ( E  
ESC ( H  
ESC ) E  
ESC ) H  
ESC * E ESC + E  
ESC * H ESC + H  
Norwegian/Danish  
Fallback to DEC Swedish  
Error Handling  
Do not invoke a 96-character set into GL. This is considered an error  
condition.  
SGR  
Select Graphic Rendition (Selecting Attributes):  
Selects printing  
attributes, including lining functions, superscript and subscript  
functions, and emphasis functions.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Levels 1, 2, 3  
Application  
CSI Ps ; Ps ; Ps m  
CSI ? Ps Ps Ps m  
Description  
Selects standard attributes.  
Selects Digital private attributes.  
Select an attribute using standard SGR parameters as follows:  
Ps  
0
Action  
Turn off all attributes, standard and private.  
Turn on bold.  
1
3
Turn on slant.  
4
Turn on underline, turn off double underline  
Turn on double underline, turn off underline  
Turn off bold.  
21  
22  
23  
24  
53  
55  
Turn off slant.  
Turn off underline and double underline.  
Turn on overline.  
Turn off overline.  
240  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SGR  
(Continued)  
Select an attribute using Digital private SGR parameters as follows:  
Ps  
Action  
Turn off all private attributes (outmoded  
parameter.  
0
4
Turn on superscript, turn off subscript.  
Turn on subscript, turn off superscript.  
Turn on overline (outmoded parameter).  
Turn off superscript and subscript.  
5
6
24  
26  
Turn off overline (outmoded parameter).  
Notes to Software  
Parameter ?0 is provided for backwards compatibility with older  
printers only (outmoded parameter). Conforming software should not  
use this parameter. Use parameter 0 instead.  
Parameters ?6 and ?26 are provided for backwards compatibility with  
older printers only (outmoded). Conforming software should not use  
these parameters. Use parameters 53 and 55 instead.  
Using SGR to Select Character Attributes  
You can send more than one parameter at a time, separating them  
with semicolons. Do not mix standard and private parameters in one  
command.  
The printer uses the selected attribute across line and page  
boundaries until the attribute is turned off or until a reset or power  
down.  
Lining Attributes  
Underline, double underline, overline, and strike-through attributes  
affect all printable characters in the data stream, including:  
• Space (SP)  
• Horizontal Position Relative (HPR)  
• Horizontal Position Backward (HPB)  
• Horizontal Position Absolute (HPA)  
SGR Select Graphic Rendition - Selecting Attributes  
Tabs are riot affected.  
The thickness and positioning of the lining attributes depend on the  
selected font.  
The strike-through attribute marks characters for deletion- Legal  
documents often use the strike-through attribute to indicate words  
deleted from a previous version of the document. The printer draws a  
line through the marked characters, in die same manner as  
underline.  
241  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SGR  
(Continued)  
All lining attributes are contiguous relative to the baseline of the  
entire line, even when used on superscript or subscript text. This  
applies to SGR superscript and subscript only, not to Partial Line Up  
(PLU) or Partial Line Down (PLD). Do not use underline with PLU and  
PLD. The result may differ depending on the printer.  
Lining attributes extend to cover the full Horizontal Advance  
Increment (HAI) except for the first and last characters on a justified  
line. See Justify (JFY).  
Superscript and Subscript Attributes  
If superscript or subscript is requested, the printer attempts to  
choose a font with smaller characters. The algorithm used is similar  
to that used for Graphic Size Modification (GSM) of 50%, applied to  
the font currently in use. This results in a size reduction only if a  
smaller compatible font is available. The printer uses the Superscript  
Vertical Offset (CFFF 3.5.3.1) field to determine the superscript offset  
from the baseline, and the Subscript Vertical Offset (CFFF 3.5.3.3)  
field to determine the subscript offset from the baseline.  
Line feed distance, Graphic Size Modification (GSM), and active  
position are not affected by superscript or subscript.  
Superscripts and subscripts cannot be nested.  
Emphasis Attributes  
If bold printing is selected, the printer uses a bold (darker) font from  
the current type family, if available. Otherwise, it uses an algorithm  
to produce darker characters. See Chapter 4 for more information on  
font selection and algorithmic transformations.  
When slant printing is selected, the printer uses an italic font file, if  
available. Otherwise, see the Programming Supplement for more  
information about built-in algorithmic transformations and the slant  
algorithm.  
Wrapping algorithms apply to the unmodified character Characters  
that have only the modified part extending outside the margins do  
not wrap.  
242  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SGR  
Select Graphic Rendition (Selecting Fonts):  
Selects a font for  
printing.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Application  
Level 3  
.
CSI Ps ; Ps ; Ps ; m  
Selects standard font  
Description  
Use as predefined or as defined by DECATFF.  
Once a font has been assigned to one of the SGR font selection  
parameters (10-19), SGR selects that font for subsequent printing.  
You can assign a font to an SGR parameter using Assign Type Family  
or Font (DECATFF) or you can use the default assignments. See  
DECATFF for specific information on assignment.  
If you do not assign a font using DECATFF, the printer uses the  
default assignments. See the Programming Supplement for the initial  
state values of SGR parameters.  
If you use SGR to select a proportional font, make sure that  
Proportional Spacing Mode (DECPSP) is set.  
The select font command can be used anywhere in the data stream.  
The selected font remains in effect until any of die following occurs:  
The printer receives another select font command (SGR 10-19).  
The font assigned to the currently selected SGR parameter is  
changed (DECATFF).  
The printer is reset or powered down.  
A character set change may result in a temporary font change.  
Side Effects  
If the font is assigned to the selected SGR parameter by font  
collection plus, the printer sets Proportional Spacing Mode (DECPSP)  
according to byte 8 of the font ID.  
243  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHS  
Set Horizontal Spacing:  
printing.  
Selects character spacing for monospace  
Destination: Level 3  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
CSI Ps SP K  
Description  
Determines the Horizontal Advance Increment (HAI). If Proportional  
Spacing Mode (DECPSP) is set, SHS has no immediate effect.  
Select the SHS parameter as follows:  
Ps  
0
Centipoints  
720  
Characters/Inch  
10  
12  
15  
6
1
600  
2
480  
3
1200  
SHS does not affect character size or horizontal tab stops.  
The printer saves the HAI value upon receipt of SHS even when  
DECPSP is set; however, it does not use the value until DECPSP is  
reset.  
The HAI value chosen remains in effect until one of the following  
occurs:  
Another SHS command  
A Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) command  
A Spacing Pitch Increment (SPI) command  
Reset or power down  
244  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SnC1R/DEC*C1  
C1 Transmit/Receive:  
Defines the type of C1 processing or  
encoding.  
Format  
Command  
Sequence  
Meaning  
DECTC1  
ESC SP 6  
Process 7-bit ESC Fe  
sequences. If 8-bit C1  
control codes are received,  
drop the 8th bit and process  
as C0.  
DECAC1  
S7C1T  
ESC SP 7  
ESC SP F  
ESC SP G  
Process 7-bit ESC Fe  
sequences and 8-bit C1  
control codes.  
Transmit C1 control codes  
as ESC Fe sequences. This is  
the power-on state.  
Transmit C1 control codes  
as C1 codes.  
S8C1T  
Description  
These sequences define how C1 codes are encoded from the host to  
the printer or from the printer to the host. The sequences select  
whether the interface uses 8-bit encoding or 7-bit equivalent (ESC Fe)  
encoding. These equivalents are given in the third column of the table  
on page 196 .  
These sequences are processed in sequence with all other data.  
Therefore, it is recommended that software send these sequences  
before all other commands to prevent confusion.  
If the printer is set to 7 data bits via a setup feature or the front  
panel, this sequence is ignored.  
The printer recognizes either 8 bit or 7-bit equivalent encoding from  
the host. However, it always transmits using the 7-bit equivalent  
encoding.  
245  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPI  
Spacing Pitch Increment:  
Determines the Vertical Advance  
Increment (VAI) or the Horizontal Advance Increment (HAI).  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
CSI Pn1 Pn2 SP G  
Description  
SPI gives maximum flexibility in adjusting character and line spacing.  
If Proportional Spacing Mode (DECPSP) is set, the vertical component  
of SPI has no immediate effect.  
Select Pn1 as follows:  
Pn1  
0
Meaning  
VAI size determined by current font.  
n
VAI size in units, depending on Positioning  
Unit Mode (PUM) and Select Size Unit (SSU).  
Select Pn2 as follows:  
Pn2  
0
Meaning  
HAI size determined by current font.  
n
HAI size in units, depending on PUM and  
SSU.  
The printer saves the HAI value upon receipt of SHS even when  
DECPSP is set; however, it does not use the value until DECPSP is  
reset.  
The RAI and VAI values chosen remain in effect until one of the  
following occurs:  
Another SPI command  
A Set Horizontal Pitch (DECSHORP) command  
A Set Horizontal Spacing (SHS) command  
Reset or power down  
The SPI setting for vertical spacing remains the same until one of the  
following commands is received:  
Another SPI command  
A Set Vertical Spacing (SVS) command  
A Set Vertical Pitch (DECVERP) command  
Reset or power down  
If Pn1 = 0 or Pn2 = 0, the printer uses the default vertical and  
horizontal spacing for the selected font See Sect-ion 3.2.1.2 for more  
information on font-dependent spacing.  
246  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSU  
Select Size Unit:  
parameters.  
Selects a unit of measurement for spacing  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 3  
CSI Ps SP I  
CSI ? Ps SP I  
Description  
Selects a Digital private parameter.  
Select an SSU parameter as follows:  
Ps  
2
Action  
Selects decipoints, 1/720 inch.  
Selects pixels (printer-specific  
Selects centipoints, 1/7200 inch  
7
?1  
SSU selects decipoints, centipoints, or pixels as the unit for certain  
control functions, as noted under the individual commands in this  
chapter.  
In some cases SSU works with Positioning Unit Mode (PUM) to  
determine the unit used. If PUM is reset, characters are used,  
regardless of the SSU setting. If PUM is set, decipoints, centipoints,  
or pixels are used, based on the SSU setting.  
In other cases SSU is used alone, and PUM has no effect.  
SSU remains in effect until the printer receives another SSU  
command or until reset or power down. SSU only affects sequences  
that follow it in the data stream.  
Error Handling  
Selective parameters other those shown above are ignored.  
247  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SVS  
Set Vertical Spacing:  
Selects line spacing for monospace printing.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Level 3  
CSI Ps SP L  
Description  
Determines the Vertical Advance Increment (VAI). If Proportional  
Spacing Mode (DECPSP) is set, SVS has no immediate effect.  
Select the SVS parameter as follows:  
Ps  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Centipoints  
1200  
1800  
2400  
600  
LPI  
6
4
3
12  
900  
8
1416  
2136  
2856  
720  
6/30mm, 5mm  
4/30mm, 7.5mm  
3/30mm, 10 mm  
12/30mm, 2.5 mm  
2, ½ in.  
3600  
SVS does not affect character size or vertical tab stops.  
The following table shows the resulting error accumulation over 25  
centimeters.  
Error  
Parameter  
Lines  
50  
1/300 in.  
2.50  
Inches  
1/120  
1/21  
1/14  
1/6  
Millimeters  
5
6
7
8
0.2  
1.0  
2.0  
4.0  
33  
13.86  
25  
22.00  
100  
50.00  
248  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TBC  
Tab Clear:  
Clears one or all horizontal or vertical tab stops.  
Destination:  
Source:  
Format  
Application  
Levels 1, 2  
CSI Ps Ps 9  
Description  
Select Ps as follows:  
Ps  
0
Meaning  
Clears one horizontal tab at active column.  
Clears one vertical tab at active line.  
Clears all horizontal tabs.  
1
2
3
Clears all horizontal tabs.  
4
Clears all vertical tabs.  
If Ps = 0 or Ps = 1, the tab stop is cleared if it coincides exactly with  
the current active position, regardless of the setting of Positioning  
Unit Mode (PUM) and regardless of whether the tab stop is on the  
grid.  
See also Horizontal Tab (HT) and Vertical Tab (VT).  
Error Handling  
Unrecognized parameters are ignored.  
VPA  
Vertical Position Absolute:  
Moves to a new active vertical position.  
The horizontal position is unchanged. Motion occurs either up or  
down.  
Source:  
Format  
Destination:  
Levels 2, 3  
Application  
CSI Pn d 9/11 *** 6/4  
Description  
Select the VPA parameter as follows:  
Pn Meaning  
0
n
Interpreted as 1  
Number of units, depending on PUM and SSU.  
Set the active vertical position to Pn units from the origin.  
The active position can be moved either up or down on the page with  
VPA.  
If PUM is reset, VPA sets the First Character Flag If PUM is set, VPA  
clears the First Character Flag.  
249  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VPA  
VPB  
(Continued)  
Error Handling  
Be aware that VPA interacts with coordinate system bounds.  
Vertical Position Backward:  
Moves the active vertical position up by  
the specified number of units. The horizontal position does not  
change.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn k  
Destination:  
Level 3  
Application  
Description  
Select the VPB parameter as follows:  
Pn  
Meaning  
0
Interpreted as 1.  
Number of units, depending on PUM and  
SSU.  
n
Error Handling  
Note that this command interacts with coordinate system bounds.  
If the Pn is more than the current vertical position, then the current  
vertical position is set to top margin and the first character flag is set.  
There is no change if Pn is less than 5 decipoints.  
VPR  
Vertical Position Relative:  
Moves the active vertical position down  
by the specified number of units. The horizontal position does not  
change.  
Source:  
Format  
CSI Pn e  
Destination:  
Levels 2, 3  
Application  
Description  
Select the VPR parameter as follows:  
Pn  
0
Meaning  
Interpreted as 1.  
n
Number of units, depending on PUM and  
SSU.  
VPR leaves the First Character Flag unchanged if PUM is reset. If  
PUM is set, the First Character Flag is cleared.  
250  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE COORDINATE SYSTEM  
Before PPL III commands that involve print positioning can be  
understood, the PPL III page coordinate system must be understood.  
This section of the PPL III chapter covers the following subjects:  
Coordinate system model  
Active position, positioning controls, and advance increments  
Coordinate system bounds  
Limits of the printable area  
Logical page to physical sheet mapping  
Variable paper size mapping  
Minimum print area size  
Character adjustment using the First Character flag  
Partial line motion  
Side effects of positioning controls  
Conditional Form Feed  
Conditional Sheet Feed  
Page break  
The page coordinate system defines a logical page. The relationship  
between a logical page and physical printed pages is determined by  
the paper size.  
Coordinate System Models  
There are two coordinate system models – the character cell model  
and the point model.  
Character Cell Model: A position comprises an entire character  
extent. The addressable increment is the entire character.  
Point Model: A position is a dimensionless location and the  
addressable increment is not directly related to characters.  
251  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Character Cell Model  
The character cell model specifies the coordinates of a character cell  
position as the line and character number, starting with character 1  
of line 1. This is a simple model used for monospaced presentation.  
The character cell model is not used for proportionally spaced  
characters.  
Character box:  
The size of the character as stored in the font. This  
size cannot be varied by the host software.  
Character cell:  
This is the distance from one character to another in  
monospaced print mode. This distance can be varied by the host  
software by changing the height of the current line spacing and the  
width of the current character spacing. The host software can set the  
size of the character cell to be larger than, equal to, or smaller than  
the character box of the font being used. When the size of the  
character box does not match the size of the character cell, the  
character is left-justified within the cell.  
Point Model  
In the point model, the coordinates of a print position are specified in  
decipoint units (exactly 1/720-inch), centipoint units (exactly  
1/7200-inch), or printer-dependent pixels.  
The point model is more complex than the character cell model. It  
requires that a particular location in the character box be specified as  
the origin of the character box. Subsequent point mode addressing is  
relative to this origin. The origin, for placement purposes, is on the  
baseline of the character at the left edge of the character box.  
Point mode addressing is enabled by setting the Positioning Unit  
Mode (PUM). Once enabled, the size of the points, or units, depends  
on the current setting of the Select Size Unit (SSU). The size units are  
decipoints or centipoints as described above.  
Point Model Has Precedence  
In PPL III, both models are supported. Whenever the Character Cell  
model is used, coordinates are converted to point positions, where  
the point is the intersection of the left edge of the character box and  
the baseline.  
Origin and Extent  
Origin  
The page coordinate system is an X-Y system in which the positive X  
direction is to the right, and the positive Y direction is down. The  
origin in this coordinate system is (1,1) and not (0,0).  
252  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area  
The printable area is the area on the paper where the printer can  
physically print. The origin may be changed using the DECOPM  
command. If DECOPM is reset, then the origin is at the corner of the  
printable area. If DECOPM is set, then the origin is near the corner of  
the physical page.  
Unit Conversions and the Origin  
Because the origin is at (1,1) and not (0,0), calculations need to take  
this translation into account. The formula to convert from centipoints  
to decipoints (and vice versa) is as follows:  
target = ((source-1)*ratio)+1  
where target is the coordinate in the new system, source is the  
coordinate in the old system, and ratio is the size ratio between the  
two measurement units.  
For example, the coordinate system origin is at (1,1) in pixels,  
decipoints, or centipoints. For a 300 dpi printer, the next diagonal  
pixel is at (2,2) in pixel units, but at (25,25) in centipoints. Similarly,  
a decipoint coordinate of (2,2) is at (11,11) in centipoints.  
Positioning and Movement  
Active Horizontal Position:  
This is the horizontal position where  
printing will occur next. It is updated after each print operation.  
Active Vertical Position:  
This is the vertical position where printing  
will occur next. It is updated after each print operation.  
Horizontal Advance Increment (HAI):  
This is added to the previous  
Active Horizontal Position to determine the next Active Horizontal  
position at the conclusion of a print operation. The classes of HAI are:  
Fixed  
Font-dependent  
Proportional  
Vertical Advance Increment (VAI):  
This is added to the previous  
Active Vertical Position to determine the next Active Vertical position  
at the conclusion of a print operation. The two classes of VAI are:  
Fixed  
Font-dependent  
253  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal Advance Increments  
Fixed HAI  
Fixed horizontal motion does not vary from character to character or  
font to font. The HAI is explicitly defined by control functions.  
A fixed HAI is selected by any of the following:  
Pitch Select Mode (DECPSM) reset, and Set Horizontal Pitch  
(DECSHORP) with last valid Ps  
Spacing Increment (SPI) with last valid Pn2  
Set Horizontal Spacing (SHS) using any valid Ps  
0
0
Control  
Function  
Autowrap  
Type  
Relative  
Margin effect  
Parameter Used  
All  
Flags  
-
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/Subscript count.  
Active only if right margin flag  
is cleared  
Backspace  
Relative  
Absolute  
Relative  
Not possible beyond left  
All  
All  
margin  
-
Carriage  
Return  
Cursor Up  
Clears RMF  
Not possible to move above  
top margin  
Parameter value  
more than 5  
decipoints  
All  
FCF Sets if cursor forced above  
top margin  
Graphics  
Carriage  
Return  
Absolute  
Relative  
Absolute  
Cursor moves back to  
Graphics left margin (left  
margin where graphics  
starts).  
Forces Graphics carriage  
return, New line beyond  
bottom margin leads to Form  
Feed  
-
Graphics  
Next line  
All  
All  
-
Form Feed  
-
Sets FCF  
Clears RMF  
Clears PLU/PLD and  
Superscript/Subscript  
Pn less than right margin  
Resets RMF  
Other Pn values Sets the RMF  
Command ignored if RMF is  
Set  
Horizontal  
Position  
Absolute  
Horizontal  
Position  
Backward  
Horizontal  
Position  
Relative  
Absolute  
Relative  
Relative  
Absolute  
Movement is possible with in  
left and right margin.  
All  
All  
All  
All  
Maximum backward  
movement possible is up to  
left margin.  
New position beyond right  
margin leads to autowrap if  
autowrap is ON.  
If there is no tabs in the tab  
table or no valid tab between  
the current position and RM  
then HT brings the cursor to  
right margin (RM).  
If autowrap OFF then new  
position beyond right margin  
Sets RMF  
HT beyond right margin Sets  
RMF  
Horizontal  
Tab  
Index  
Relative  
Relative  
Relative  
IND in bottom margin leads  
to FF  
LF in bottom margin leads to  
FF  
NEL in bottom margin leads  
to FF  
All  
All  
All  
Clears superscript/subscript  
and PLU/PLD count  
Clears superscript/subscript  
and PLU/PLD  
Clears RMF  
Clears superscript/subscript  
and PLU/PLD  
Line Feed  
Next Line  
Partial Line  
Down  
Special  
Can go down to one PLD  
position below bottom  
margin  
All  
Decrements the PLU/PLD  
count  
(Minimum  
PLU/PLD count  
value is -255)  
254  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control  
Function  
Partial Line  
Up  
Type  
Special  
Margin effect  
Can go up to one PLU  
position above top margin  
Parameter Used  
All  
(Maximum  
PLU/PLD count  
value is 255)  
All  
Flags  
Increments the PLU/PLD count  
Reverse  
Index  
Relative  
Can go up to top margin  
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/Subscript count.  
Resulting vertical position  
above top margin Sets FCF.  
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/ Subscript count..  
In RESET mode command sets  
the FCF flag.  
Vertical  
Position  
Absolute  
Absolute  
Maximum vertical movement  
possible is up to bottom  
margin. Resulting vertical  
position more than bottom  
margin will set the active  
vertical position to bottom  
margin  
All  
All  
Vertical  
Position  
Backward  
Relative  
Can go up to top margin.  
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/Subscript count.  
Sets the FCF if the resulting  
vertical position is above top  
margin.  
Vertical  
Position  
Relative  
Relative  
Performs the FF if resulting  
vertical position is below  
bottom margin.  
All  
All  
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/Subscript count.  
In RESET mode command sets  
the FCF flag.  
Clears PLU/PLD count and  
Superscript/Subscript count.  
Sets the FCF  
Vertical Tab  
Absolute  
If there is no tabs in the tab  
table or no valid tab between  
the current position and BM  
then VT brings the cursor to  
bottom margin (BM).  
Bounds  
Page Home Line is same as Top Margin Line  
Page End Line is same as Bottom Margin Line  
Line Home Position is same as Left Margin Position  
Line End Position is same as Right Margin Position  
255  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIXEL GRAPHICS  
The Sixel Graphics protocol provides the ability for the printer to  
receive and print black and white bitmap data at various sizes to  
create graphics images.  
Terminology and Concepts  
The bitmap data for producing a graphics image is divided into  
six el  
horizontal scan lines, each of which is  
bitmap ements high. The  
. Prior to sending the data, the user  
raster  
term for the bitmap data is  
can define horizontal and vertical spacing between elements. The  
smaller the spacing, the finer the grain and the higher the quality of  
the image will be.  
Pixels  
A pixel is the logical rectangular image area defined by each bit of  
graphics data that you send.  
Sixel  
A group of six pixels arranged vertically and sent as a group.  
The positions on the page where the printer places pixels.  
Grid  
Pixel Aspect Ratio  
The relationship between the length of the pixel to its width. For  
example, a square pixel has a pixel aspect ratio of 1 to 1 (or 100 to  
100). A pixel twice as high as it is wide has a pixel aspect ratio of 2 to  
1 (or 200 to 100).  
Pixel Spot  
The actual area imaged for each pixel. The shape and size of a pixel  
spot is printer-dependent and is only approximately related to grid  
size.  
Dot  
The smallest unit that can be displayed on the printer. Several dots  
may be required to represent a single pixel as a pixel-spot.  
Picture Definition  
The data describing the image, including grid size, pixel aspect ratio,  
and the encoded raster. The picture definition does not include  
formatting information, such as position or actual presentation size.  
Sixel Control Codes  
Within the picture definition, sixel control codes provide additional  
information beyond the encoded raster, such as line breaks.  
256  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Sixel Graphics Operation  
Sixel Graphics printing consists of setting the context and attributes  
for the pixels and then printing the received pixels in adjacent grid  
positions. The following are essential elements of the Sixel Graphics  
print process.  
Selection of Sixel Graphics using the Sixel Printer Control String.  
Setting of the graphics active position and left margin.  
Advancing the graphics active position to the next horizontal grid  
position.  
The String Terminator (ST) control character causes the printer to  
exit Sixel Graphics mode and return to text mode.  
A Graphics Carriage Return (DECGCR) command or a Graphics New  
Line (DECGNL) command moves the graphics active position to the  
graphics left margin. The Graphics New Line command also moves  
the graphics active position down to the next graphics line (six  
vertical grid positions below the current active position.)  
Horizontal and vertical directions follow the text orientation. The  
printer images sixels from left to right, top to bottom.  
257  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sixel Graphics Commands  
DECGCR ($)  
Graphics Carriage Return:  
Moves the graphics active horizontal  
position to the graphics left margin.  
Format  
$
DECGNL (-)  
Graphics Next Line:  
Moves the graphics active position to the  
graphics left margin and down one line of sixels (six actual grid  
units).  
Format  
Description  
This command is affected by page coordinate bounds.  
258  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECGRA (")  
Set Raster Attributes:  
Defines the pixel aspect ratio, overriding Ps1  
of the protocol selector. DECGRA also defines the extent (size) of the  
raster. Level 3 printers ignore the extent parameters.  
Format  
“ Pn1 ; Pn2 ; Pn3 ; Pn4  
Description  
This command must precede picture-definition information requiring  
an aspect ratio: sixel printable characters (sixel data, 3/15-7/14), the  
Graphics New Line (DECGNL) command and, by extension, Graphics  
Repeat Introducer (DECGRI) and Graphics Carriage Return  
(DECGCR). Otherwise, this command is ignored. If multiple DECGRA  
sequences are received, only the last one is accepted.  
Parameter Description  
Pn1  
Pn2  
Pn3  
Pn4  
Pixel aspect ratio numerator  
Pixel aspect ration denominator  
Horizontal extent  
Vertical extent  
Pn1 describes the vertical size of a pixel in an arbitrary distance unit.  
Pn2 describes the horizontal size of a pixel in the same distance unit.  
For example, to define a pixel to be half as wide as it is tall, send 200;  
100 for Pn1 and Pn2.  
The pixel aspect ratio times the horizontal grid size (Ps3 of the  
protocol selector) yields the vertical grid size.  
Pn3 and Pn4 define the horizontal and vertical extent, respectively, in  
pixels. Level 3 printers ignore these parameters. Page composition  
software can include these parameters for compatibility with video  
terminals.  
Error Handling  
If Pn1 or Pn2 is greater than 32K, the value 32K is used. If Pn1 or  
Pn2 is 0 or omitted, the printer sets it to 1.  
The maximum aspect ratio supported by the printer is 1: 10 or 10: 1  
(after reducing the ratio to the lowest possible format).  
The maximum parameter implemented for DECGRA is 999 (decimal).  
If the Set Raster Attributes sequence is received after a sixel printable  
character or another sixel control code is received, the command is  
ignored.  
Any additional parameters received are ignored.  
259  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DECGRI (!)  
Graphics Repeat Introducer:  
Repeats the following sixel a specified  
number of times.  
Format  
! Pn  
Description  
The printer repeats the sixel following the DECGRI sequence Pn  
times.  
The repeat function supports parameters large enough to cover the  
largest print line at the smallest grid size, up to 32K.  
The following examples illustrate repeat sequences:  
! 1 0 ?  
Repeats 10 graphics spaces  
Repeats 6 patterns of top dot  
! 6 @  
Error Handling  
A repeat count of zero or omitted is treated as a repeat count of one.  
Values that exceed the maximum value are treated as the maximum  
value. If no sixel printable character follows the repeat count, the  
repeat count is ignored.  
If a graphics control code is received within a DECGRI sequence, the  
repeat sequence is ignored. This includes sequences in the range 21  
to 2F, 3A, and 3C to 3E. If multiple parameters are received  
(separated by semicolons), the printer uses the first parameter and  
ignores the rest.  
5000 Series  
PPLIII  
Aspect  
Ratio  
200:100  
Appr. Horz.  
Grid Size  
True Vert.  
Grid Size  
100  
Appr. Horz. True Vert.  
Ps1  
0
Grid Size  
Grid Size  
50  
144  
72  
1
2
200:100  
450:100  
300:100  
250:100  
183:100  
150:100  
130:100  
112:100  
100:100  
200:100  
50  
22  
33  
40  
54  
66  
77  
89  
100  
50  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
144  
324  
216  
180  
132  
108  
94  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
72  
3
4
5
6
7
8
81  
9
72  
>9  
144  
260  
Chapter 8. PPL3 Plus Emulation  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX A. USING THE HEX DUMP  
A printout of hexadecimal data is useful primarily to application  
programmers or service representatives as a debugging or  
troubleshooting tool.  
Offline,  
With the printer  
pressing:  
enable the hex dump mode of printing by  
Set Up  
is  
or (left or right) menu browse pushbutton until  
displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD  
(down) menu browse pushbutton  
Select Filter  
or (left or right) menu browse pushbutton until  
is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD  
(down) menu browse pushbutton  
or (left or right) menu browse pushbutton until appropriate  
Serial Parallel (1284)  
Expansion 1  
Expansion 2  
(
,
, or  
or ) port is  
displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD  
(down) menu browse pushbutton  
Hex Dump  
or (left or right) menu browse pushbutton until  
is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD  
Select  
pushbutton  
Hex dump causes data received from the host to be printed out in  
ASCII form. A sample is shown below.  
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 45 46  
0123456789ABCDEF  
..THE TWO DOTS Y  
OU JUST SAW WERE  
A RESULT OF A C  
ARRIAG RETURN AN  
D LINE FEED...AL  
L CONTROL CHARAC  
TERS ARE REPRESE  
NTED BY DOTS THI  
S DOT . IS AN ES  
CAPE CODE...A DO  
T TO THE RIGHT O  
F A HEX CODE MEA  
NS THAT THE PI L  
EAD WAS SET AT T  
HAT TIME...SEE T  
OD 0A 54 48 45 20 54 57 4F 20 44 4F 54 53 20 59  
4F 55 20 4A 55 53 54 20 53 41 57 20 57 45 52 45  
20 41 20 52 45 53 55 4C 54 20 4F 46 20 41 20 43  
41 52 52 49 41 47 20 52 45 54 55 52 4E 20 41 4E  
44 20 4C 49 4E 45 20 45 45 45 44 2E 0D 0A 41 4C  
4C 20 43 4F 4E 54 52 4F 4C 20 43 48 41 52 41 43  
54 45 52 53 20 41 52 45 20 52 45 50 52 45 53 45  
4E 54 45 44 20 42 59 20 44 4F 54 53 20 54 48 49  
53 20 44 4F 54 20 1B 20 49 53 20 41 4E 20 45 53  
43 41 50 45 20 43 4F 44 45 2E 0D 0A 41 20 44 4F  
54 20 54 4F 20 54 48 45 20 52 49 47 48 54 20 4F  
46 20 41 20 48 45 58 20 43 4F 44 45 20 4D 45 41  
4E 53 20 54 48 41 54 20 54 48 45 20 50 49 20 4C  
45 41 44 20 57 41 53 20 53 45 54 20 41 54 20 54  
48 41 54 20 54 49 4D 45 2E 0D 0A 53 45 45 20 54  
48 45 20 44 4F 54 53 20.20.20.20.49 4E 20 54 48  
HE DOTS  
IN TH  
The hexadecimal printout is shown on the left side and the equivalent  
plain text is shown on the same line at the right. Exceptions: ASCII  
control code characters below hexadecimal 20 are printed out as  
periods on the right side. An SP or hexadecimal 20 causes a blank  
apace in the equivalent print position.  
By examining the printout, you can see what data was actually sent  
to the printer.  
261  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX B. FONT PRINT SAMPLES  
The following samples were printed at 10 characters per inch (CPI) at  
6 lines per inch (LPI).  
HIGH SPEED FONT  
GOTHIC DRAFT – DATA PROCESSING FONT  
GOTHIC NEAR LETTER QUALITY  
CHARACTER GRAPHICS FONT  
262  
Appendix B. Font Samples  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CORRESPONDENCE FONT  
BETTER QUALITY THAN DRAFT-BETTER SPEED THAN NLQ  
(
)
OCR-A FONT  
OCR-B FONT  
COURIER NLQ FONT  
ITALIC NLQ FONT  
263  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HIGH SPEED 2  
264  
Appendix B. Font Samples  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX C. POSTNET BAR CODES  
ENTERING AND EXITING POSTNET BAR CODES  
Selecting POSTNET Style Bar Codes  
The following sequence selects the style of bar code to be printed. In  
this case POSTNET is chosen:  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
ESC [50;p2;p3;p4;p5;p6;p7;p8;p9;p10}  
LPRINT CHR$(27);''[50;9;1;2;6;2;6;2;0;0}"  
or simply:  
ESC [50}  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[50}"  
Parameters p2 - p10 do not affect POSTNET but if they are sent. they  
will be stored and used if another bar code style is selected.  
POSTNET symbols can neither be rotated nor have their size or  
density modified.  
Before the printer can print input data as POSTNET bar code  
symbols, the bar code mode must be both selected and activated.  
There are two ways for this to be accomplished depending on the  
setting of ANSI emulation option 1.  
ANSI emulation option 1 is used to enable the SI (shift In) and SO  
(shift out) ASCII codes to activate and deactivate special mode  
functions. In this case, the special mode function is bar codes. With  
ANSI emulation option 1 in (active), code SO will turn on or activate  
the bar code mode. SI will turn bar codes off.  
Enter the POSTNET bar code mode of printing with the following  
control sequence sent by the host:  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
ESC [ 3 t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";";  
Data sent after the above sequence is interpreted and printed as  
POSTNET bar code symbols.  
Exit POSTNET bar code mode using:  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
ESC [ O t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t;  
ESC [3 t  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[3t";  
Selects the bar code special mode.  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
SO  
LPRINT CHR$(14);  
Activates POSTNET bar codes and prints received data as POSTNET  
symbols (only after it has been selected by ESC[3t above).  
265  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
<SI>  
LPRINT CHR$(15);  
Deactivates bar codes and allows printing of normal text. (POSTNET  
is still selected but not active. )  
Mnemonic:  
BASIC:  
<ESC> [0t  
LPRINT CHR$(27);"[0t;  
Deselects bar codes.  
When an ESC[0t is received before the Al code, bar codes are both  
deactivated and deselected.  
Valid Characters  
Only certain characters are valid as data within the POSTNET bar  
code escape sequence. Any other character causes the error symbol  
(XOX) to be printed instead. Valid characters are the numerals 0-9.  
The dash (-) will be ignored if it is found in character position six or  
greater to allow processing of ZIP+4 data (22980-1999).  
Characters acting as delimiters (space, comma, and horizontal tab)  
are allowed to separate and add space between consecutive POSTNET  
symbols.  
Delimiters (Spacing between codes)  
Delimiters are used to separate and add space between POSTNET  
codes without exiting bar code printing.  
comma  
A
will add no additional space between symbols. The  
distance between two symbols will be the quiet zone (0. 4 inch).  
space  
A
character will add 0. 1 inch of space between symbols. One  
space character and the quiet zone will equal a total of 0. 5 inch.  
horizontal tab  
A
will add the appropriate number of empty spaces to  
go to the next tab before starting the symbol. Horizontal tabs in  
POSTNET are based on 10 columns. or text characters, per inch (10  
CPI).  
Incorrect Number of Digits  
If less than five digits for a ZIP Code or nine for a ZIP+4 are received,  
the symbol will be printed with the missing digits replaced by error  
symbols.  
If more than six digits (ZIP and correction digit) are received, the data  
will be treated as a Z1P+4 or ZIP+6 code. If less digits than a ZIP+4 or  
ZIP+6 are received, error symbols will be printed to fill the symbol.  
Note: The U. S. Postal Service may implement ZIP+6 at a later date.  
When more digits are received than are required for a valid symbol,  
the symbol will be terminated, printed, and a new symbol started.  
266  
Appendix C. Postnet Bar Codes  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restrictions  
Printer option strap 13 in General Printer Options, paper position  
reset to top of bar code after printing, is ignored while using  
POSTNET. (See Appendix D, General Printer Options, Group 2).  
If the symbol exceeds the right margin, the symbol is cut off at the  
margin.  
POSTNET codes cannot be used on the same line as the high speed  
font.  
Exit the bar code mode before sending other control codes or escape  
sequences.  
267  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX D. DESCRIPTION OF STRAPPING OPTIONS  
This appendix contains descriptions for firmware strap settings,  
which are changed using the Set Up menu.  
268  
Appendix D. Descriptions of Strapping Options  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL PRINTER OPTIONS DEFINITIONS  
I/F Hardware Straps  
H Bits  
01-32  
01  
Function  
If Enabled  
If Disabled  
Prime  
High = Buffer Clear.  
On all Control Codes.  
Low = Buffer Clear.  
Disabled on all Control Codes, except  
LF, VT, FF, CR, DC1 and DC3.  
Causes an Interrupt.  
02  
Interrupt  
03  
04  
DEL  
DEL  
Does not cause an Interrupt.  
Does not cause Prime.  
Causes Prime.  
05-06  
07  
08  
Reserved.  
Underline character  
PI Lead  
Treated as CR.  
Causes Interrupt.  
Does not reflect  
Printed.  
Does not cause Interrupt.  
09  
ACK lead  
ONLINE/LOCAL status. 05  
must be enabled.  
Reflects ONLINE/LOCAL status.  
Character  
conversion to space.  
10  
Enabled. (See 41-48.)  
Disabled.  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
CR  
FF  
LF  
VT  
DC3  
DC1  
Busy  
Not decoded.  
Not decoded.  
Not decoded.  
Not decoded.  
Not decoded.  
Not decoded.  
Does not reflect ACK.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Generate an Interrupt.  
Reflects ACK.  
Busy/Demand per  
character.  
Software control of  
Busy.  
18  
19  
Enabled.  
Disabled  
Disabled.  
Enabled.  
Does not reflect  
(ONLINE/LOCAL) FAULT/PO  
status.  
Reflects (ONLINE/LOCAL) FAULT/PO  
status.  
20  
Busy  
Does not reflect (FAULT)  
ONLINE/LOCAL status.  
Does not reflect (PO)  
ONLINE/LOCAL/PO status.  
Does not reflect PO.  
Does not reflect FAULT.  
0-7 are active high.  
High.  
High.  
Enabled.  
High.  
High.  
Reflects (FAULT) ONLINE/LOCAL  
status.  
Reflects (PO) ONLINE/LOCAL/PO  
status.  
Reflects PO.  
Reflects FAULT.  
0-7 are active low.  
Low.  
Low.  
Disabled.  
Low.  
21  
22  
Busy  
Busy  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
ACK  
ACK  
Data leads  
Busy is active  
PI is active  
PI  
STB is active  
SELECT is active  
PO is active  
FAULT is active  
Low.  
Low.  
Low.  
High.  
High.  
H Bits  
33-64  
33  
Function  
If Enabled.  
If Disabled  
Demand delay.  
Disabled.  
Enabled.  
34  
35  
Delay  
None  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
36  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
37  
Set ACK delay from  
Strobe.  
1 µsec  
2 µsec  
3 µsec  
Width  
None  
34-35  
36-37  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Set ACK Pulse  
Width.  
1 µsec  
2 µsec  
3 µsec  
Reserved.  
38-40  
41-48  
49-64  
Used with strap 10 to select space character substitution. 41 corresponds with Bit 1 of the  
character code.  
Reserved.  
269  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LEGACY PARALLEL SOFTWARE STRAP DEFINITIONS  
I/F Software Straps  
Bits  
Function  
If Enabled  
If Disabled  
01-32  
01-03  
04  
05  
06-07  
08  
09-32  
Bits  
33-64  
33-39  
40  
Reserved for future use.  
Prime on Select.  
Disabled.  
Disabled.  
Enabled.  
Enabled.  
No Fault on PO or Deselect.  
Reserved for future use.  
8 bit Data.  
Enabled.  
Bit 8 equals 0.  
If Disabled  
Enabled.  
Reserved for future use.  
Function  
If Enabled  
Disabled.  
Reserved for future use.  
Parallel timeout.  
Reserved for future use.  
41-64  
270  
Appendix D. Descriptions of Strapping Options  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMULATION OPTION DESCRIPTIONS  
ANSI (4800)  
Meaning if Active If Active  
Options  
01  
If Inactive  
No selection via  
SI/SO  
Oversize and Bar code  
Select via SI/SO.  
RCC mode  
Reset RCC mode.  
Set RCC mode.  
Reset when ESC C  
is received.  
02  
ESC C control  
Disable ESC C sequence.  
03  
Reserved.  
Reserved.  
04  
05  
Reset (80-9F per  
GENCS2).  
GENCIC control  
Set (80-8F as control).  
06  
Reset (80-9F  
ignore)  
LF = LF  
GENCS2 control  
Line grid control  
Dbl strike/shadow  
control  
Set (80-9F, 15, print).  
LF = next LPI grid  
Double Strike  
07  
08  
09  
Shadow.  
Character  
Graphics/Postnet  
Char Graphics in SCR[2]  
esc[12m.  
Canad. Postnet in  
SGR[2] esc[12m.  
10  
Reserved.  
11-32  
ANSI (4410)  
If Active  
Options  
Function  
SI/SO selects Oversize  
and Bar code  
If Inactive  
Select..  
Ignore SI/SO.  
01  
Reserved.  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
ESC C control  
Reserved.  
Disable ESC C sequence.  
Reset when ESC C is received.  
Reserved.  
GENCIC control  
GENCS2 control  
Line grid control  
Dbl strike/shadow  
control  
Set (80-8F as control).  
Set (80-9F, 15, print).  
LF = next LPI grid.  
Reset (80-9F per GENCS2).  
Reset (80-9F ignore).  
LF = LF.  
Double Strike  
Shadow.  
09  
10  
Character  
Graphics/Postnet  
Char Graphics in SCR[2]  
esc[12m.  
Canadian. Postnet in SGR[2]  
esc[12m.  
8th bit selects 256 character  
offset.  
Bit 8 control  
Reserved.  
8th bit is alternative font..  
11  
12  
13  
Disable  
14  
Disable  
15  
Disable  
16  
Disable  
SGR  
10  
Font Name  
Gothic Draft  
Gothic Draft  
Char Graphics  
Gothic NLQ  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
11  
12  
13  
Alternate Font  
Selection Defaults  
14  
Courier NLQ  
High Speed  
13-16  
17-32  
15  
16  
OCR-A NLQ  
OCR-B NLQ  
Italics NLQ  
17  
18  
19  
Correspondence  
Reserved  
271  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Proprinter III XL  
Options  
Function  
If Active  
If Inactive  
Copy of ENG_OP_SLASH_ZERO from GenPtrOpts  
Strap 3).  
RESERVED (Slashed  
Zero)  
01  
Line Length  
8 inches.  
12 cpi.  
13.6 inches.  
20 cpi.  
02  
03  
04  
Condensed Print  
Initial Code page  
Character Set Select  
default  
Multinational.  
USA.  
Character set 2.  
Character set 1.  
05  
06  
07  
Default Form Length  
12” Form.  
11” Form.  
Copy of AUTOLF_ON_CR from Print Control  
Menu..  
Reserved  
Copy of AUTOCR_ON_VM from Print Control  
Menu.  
Reserved  
NLQ II  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
Can use mulitnational.  
No multinational.  
Copy of AUTOCR_ON_LF from Print Control  
Menu..  
Copy of AUTOCR_ON_FF from Print Control Menu.  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Ignore Esc I  
Process Esc I  
command  
Ignore Esc I command  
Standard 132  
Simulate 136 columns.  
columns.  
Simulate 136  
Reserved  
13  
14-32  
272  
Appendix D. Descriptions of Strapping Options  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EPSON FX286e  
If Active  
Options Function  
If Inactive  
Condensed  
Enabled  
Disabled.  
01  
Print.  
Italics font  
control  
Default Print  
Quality  
Default Perf  
Skip  
Codes 128-255 are Code  
Page.  
Default print quality is  
NLQ.  
Codes 128-255 are Italics.  
Default print quality is draft.  
No perf skip default.  
02  
03  
1 inch perf skip default.  
04  
Ignore Esc I  
Ignore Esc I command  
Simulate 136 Columns  
Process Esc I command  
Standard 132 Columns.  
05  
06  
136 Col.  
Reserved  
07-32  
273  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printronix Pseries  
Options  
01  
02  
Function  
Overstrike  
If Active  
Enabled.  
If Inactive  
Disabled.  
8 LPI.  
No PI required for VFU  
load.  
80 to 9F hex are  
control codes.  
= Double High.  
ACK selects LPI for 1 line  
10.3 LPI.  
VFU load  
PI required for VFU load.  
03  
04  
Defines codes 80 to 9F  
80 to 9F hex are printable.  
= Backspace.  
Backspace  
Reserved.  
05  
06-32  
Printronix P300/600  
Options  
01  
02  
Function  
If Active  
= Carriage Return.  
If Inactive  
Edit mode.  
Edit Line (Carriage Return)  
Restrict LPI  
To 8.  
Non-restricted LPI.  
Reserved.  
03-12  
Font  
Name  
Gothic  
Draft  
Gothic  
Draft  
Char  
Graphics  
Gothic  
NLQ  
Courier  
NLQ  
13  
14  
15  
16  
SGR  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Enable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
Enable  
Enable  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Alternate Font Selection  
Defaults  
13-16  
High  
Speed  
OCR-A  
NLQ  
OCR-B  
NLQ  
Italics  
NLQ  
Correspon  
dence  
Reserved  
17-32  
Dec LG Plus  
Options Function  
If Active  
If Inactive  
Unsolicited Reporting  
Enabled (See strap S-2).  
Extended unsolicited  
reports.  
Disabled (default).  
01  
Brief unsolicited  
reports. (default).  
= DEC Supplemental  
(default).  
Unsolicited status report size  
02  
User Preference  
Reserved.  
= Latin 9 (Euro Ready)  
03  
04-32  
Dec PPL3  
Options Function  
If Active  
If Inactive  
ISO Latin9  
Enabled.  
Disabled.  
01  
02-32  
Reserved.  
274  
Appendix D. Descriptions of Strapping Options  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX E. DSC CODE CHARTS  
275  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
277  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
279  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
281  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
283  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
285  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
287  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
289  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
291  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
293  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
294  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
295  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
296  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
297  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
298  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
299  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
300  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
301  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
302  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
303  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
304  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
305  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
306  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
307  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
308  
Appendix E. DSC Code Charts  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
309  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
ESC ]........................See Operating System Command  
Escape <ESC>..........................................................14  
Escape Sequence Directory......................................16  
EVFU..................See Electronic Vertical Format Unit  
Channel control code ...........................................43  
EVFU, Downloading................................................42  
Font Handling and Enhancements............................31  
Form Feed <FF> ......................................................15  
Graphics ...................................................................36  
Eight-Bit Graphics...............................................39  
Six-Bit Graphics ..................................................36  
Grapics  
Dot Patterns and Densities...................................36  
Horizontal Tab <HT>...............................................15  
Line Feed <LF>........................................................15  
Margins and Tabs.....................................................28  
Operating System Command <OSC> ......................19  
Oversize Character Font...........................................60  
Entering and Exiting............................................60  
Printer Control Strap............................................64  
Size ......................................................................61  
Paper and print position movements ........................25  
Reset to Initial State <RIS>......................................19  
Shift In <SI> ............................................................15  
Shift Out <SO> ........................................................15  
String Terminator <ST>...........................................19  
ANSI (4410) Emulation Options Table ......................271  
ANSI (4800) Emulation Options Table ......................271  
Appendix E. Font Print Samples.................................262  
A
ANSI  
Back Space <BS> .................................................... 14  
Bar Codes ................................................................ 46  
Default Characteristics ........................................ 50  
Entering and Exiting............................................ 46  
Error Symbol....................................................... 52  
Horizontal Spacing.............................................. 54  
Horizontal Tabs................................................... 59  
Human-Readable Line (HRL) ............................. 50  
Vertical................................................................ 57  
Bell <BEL>.............................................................. 14  
Carriage Return <CR>............................................. 14  
Commands  
Begin Font Load <BFL> ..................................... 35  
C1 Control Code Mode - PC Set 1 <GENC1C>.. 34  
Character Map Load............................................ 23  
Character Set 2 Mode - PC Set 2 <GENSC2>..... 34  
Device Control String <DCS>............................. 40  
Download Font Control <GENDFC>.................. 35  
Emulation Control <GENEMU>......................... 21  
Forms Definition <GENFD>............................... 28  
Graphic Size Modifications <GSM>................... 31  
Horizontal and Vertical Position <HVP>............ 26  
Horizontal Position Absolute <HPA> ................. 27  
Horizontal Position Backward <HPB>................ 26  
Horizontal Position Relative................................ 25  
Horizontal Tab Set <HTS>.................................. 28  
Line Feed New Line Mode <LNM>.................... 34  
Multiple Horizontal Tab Set <GENHTS>........... 30  
Multiple Vertical Tab Set <GENVTS> ............... 30  
Partial Line Down <PLD>................................... 25  
Partial Line Up <PLU> ....................................... 25  
Proportional Print Mode <GENPRM>................ 34  
Repeat Text or Dot Graphics Character <REP>.. 40  
Reset Mode <RM>.............................................. 34  
Select Graphic Rendition <SGR>........................ 32  
Select Graphics Mode <GENGRM>................... 41  
Select National Characters <GENSNC> ............. 22  
Self-Test <GENTST>.......................................... 20  
Set Left/Right Margins <GENSLR> ................... 29  
Set Mode <SM> .................................................. 34  
Spacing Increment <SPI>.................................... 32  
Tab Clear <TBC>................................................ 28  
Vertical Position Absolute <VPA> ..................... 26  
Vertical Position Backwards <VPB> .................. 27  
Vertical Position Relative.................................... 26  
Vertical Tab Set <VTS>...................................... 28  
VFU Channel Command <GENVFU>................ 44  
Control Codes.......................................................... 14  
Control Sequence Introducer (CSI).......................... 19  
Control Sequence Introducer <CSI>........................ 14  
Device Control 1 <DC1>......................................... 14  
Device Control 3 <DC3>......................................... 14  
Electronic Vertical Format Unit............................... 42  
ESC [ ............. See CSI (Control Sequence Introducer)  
C
Control Codes.................................................................8  
control sequence introducer............................................9  
D
DEC LG Plus Emulation Options Table.....................274  
DEC PPL3 Emulation Options Table .........................274  
decipoints......................................................................10  
E
Emulation Option descriptions ...................................271  
Epson FX-2863  
Additional escape sequences..................................125  
Epson FX-286e  
Commands  
Absolute print position, set ................................139  
Code page, assign to one of four variables.........147  
Code page, assign to variable 1..........................148  
Code page, select ...............................................147  
Condensed print mode, select ............................135  
Double-high printing, turn on/off.......................143  
Double-strike mode, cancel ...............................141  
310  
Index  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Double-strike mode, select ................................ 141  
Double-wide printing, cancel............................. 142  
Double-wide printing, select.............................. 142  
Elite pitch, select ............................................... 135  
Emphasized print, cancel................................... 141  
Emphasized print, select.................................... 141  
Font style, select................................................ 144  
Graphics, 9-pin, select ....................................... 154  
Graphics, high-speed double-density, set .......... 152  
Graphics, low-speed double-density, set ........... 152  
Graphics, mode, reassign................................... 153  
Graphics, mode, select....................................... 153  
Graphics, normal density, set............................. 152  
Graphics, quadruple-density, set........................ 152  
Half-speed print, turn on/off.............................. 140  
Horizontal tab stops, set .................................... 136  
Initialize printer................................................. 149  
Intercharacter spacing, set ................................. 135  
International character set, select....................... 146  
Italic print, cancel.............................................. 143  
Italic print, select ............................................... 143  
Left margin, set.................................................. 133  
Line spacing, 1/6 inch, set ................................. 134  
Line spacing, 1/8 inch, set ................................. 134  
Line spacing, 7/72 inch, set ............................... 134  
Line spacing, n/216 inch, set ............................. 134  
Line spacing, n/72 inch, set ............................... 134  
Master print mode, select................................... 144  
MSB (most significant bit) control, cancel........ 149  
MSB (most significant bit) control, set to 0....... 149  
MSB (most significant bit) control, set to 1....... 149  
MSB (most significant bt) control, set............... 149  
NLQ or draft printing, select ............................. 144  
Page length in inches, set................................... 132  
Page length in lines, set ..................................... 132  
Paper movement................................................ 138  
Pica pitch, select................................................ 135  
Printable code area expansion ........................... 145  
Printable code area expansion, select ................ 143  
Printable code page expansion, cancel .............. 143  
Proportional print mode, on/off......................... 135  
Relative print position, set................................. 140  
Right margin, set ............................................... 133  
Skip over perforation, cancel............................. 132  
Skip over perforation, set................................... 132  
Special character printing.................................. 145  
Superscript/subscript printing, cancel................ 142  
Superscript/subscript printing, select................. 142  
Underlining........................................................ 141  
Unidirectional print mode, select....................... 139  
Unidirectional printing, turn on/off ................... 139  
Variable line feed, single................................... 138  
Vertical tab stops, set......................................... 136  
Vertical tabs, multi-channel 0-7, set.................. 137  
Control Codes ........................................................ 126  
<BEL> Bell ....................................................... 126  
<BS> Backspace................................................ 126  
<CAN> Cancel.................................................. 126  
<CR> Carriage Return....................................... 126  
<DC1> Device Control 1................................... 126  
<DC2> Device Control 2................................... 126  
<DC3> Device Control 3................................... 126  
<DC4> Device Control 4...................................126  
<DEL> Delete....................................................126  
<ESC> Escape ...................................................126  
<FF> Form feed.................................................126  
<HT> Horizontal tab..........................................127  
<LF> Line feed..................................................127  
<NUL> Null.......................................................127  
<SI> Shift In ......................................................127  
<SO> Shift Out..................................................127  
<VT> Vertical Tab.............................................128  
Dot graphics ...........................................................150  
Specifying line length ........................................150  
Escape Sequence Directory....................................129  
Functional differences ............................................124  
Print mode combinations........................................123  
Unsupported escape sequences...............................125  
Epson FX286-e...........................................................122  
Epson FX286e Emulation Options Table ...................273  
Escape Sequences  
definition ....................................................................8  
G
General Printer Options Definitions ...........................269  
I
I/F Hardware Strap Table ...........................................269  
I/F Software Straps Table ...........................................270  
L
Legacy Parallel Software Strap Definitions................270  
LG/LG Plus ................................................................155  
Commands  
<HT> Horizontal tab..........................................155  
<LF> Line feed..................................................155  
7-bit C1 transmission <S7C1T> ........................175  
7-bit code, select ................................................173  
8-bit code, select ................................................174  
Application program command <APC> ............161  
Assign user preference supplemental set  
<DECAUPSS>..............................................170  
Autowrap mode <DECAWM> ..........................182  
Bar code attributes, select <DECSBCA>...........188  
Bar Coding, start <DECBARC>........................170  
Bar coding, stop <ROCS> .................................174  
Block character mode, start <DECBLOCKC> ..173  
Carriage return / new line <DECCRNLM> .......182  
Channel command <VFU>................................183  
Control sequence introducer <CSI>...................160  
Cursor up <CUU>..............................................174  
Delete forms <DECDFM>.................................166  
Delete logo sequence <DECDLG>....................164  
Device control string <DCS>.............................160  
Device status requests <DSR>...........................185  
Drawing vectors <DECVEC>............................194  
End VFU load <VFU>.......................................183  
311  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Forms sequence, start <DECIFM>.................... 167  
Forms sequence, terminate <DECTFM>........... 171  
Graphic size modification <GSM>.................... 175  
Graphic size selection <GSS>........................... 175  
Graphics density, set <DECSGD> .................... 193  
Horizontal pitch, set <DECSHORP> ................ 192  
Horizontal position, absolute <HPA>................ 178  
Horizontal position, backward <HPB>.............. 184  
Horizontal position, relative <HPR>................. 178  
Horizontal spacing, select <SHS>..................... 177  
Horizontal tab stops, set <DECSHTS> ............. 191  
Horizontal tab, set ............................................. 159  
Index <IND> ..................................................... 158  
Line feed / new line <LNM>............................. 181  
Lines per physical page, set <DECSLPP> ........ 190  
Load vertical format unit <VFU>...................... 182  
Loading forms <DECLFM>.............................. 165  
Loading Logo <DECLG>.................................. 169  
Logo sequence, select........................................ 164  
Margins, left and right, set <DECSLRM>......... 190  
Margins, top and bottom, set <DECSTBM> ..... 189  
Next line <NEL>............................................... 158  
Operating system command <OSC> ................. 161  
Partial line down <PLD>................................... 159  
Partial line up <PLU>........................................ 159  
Pitch select mode <PSM> ................................. 182  
Position unit mode <PUM>............................... 181  
Privacy message <PM>..................................... 161  
Product identification <DA> ............................. 180  
Proprinter emulation mode <DECIPEM> ......... 161  
Request font status <DECRFS> ........................ 163  
Request logo status <DECRLGS>..................... 162  
Reset mode <RM> ............................................ 184  
Reset to initial state <RIS>................................ 179  
Reverse index <RI>........................................... 160  
Select graphics rendition <SGR> ...................... 162  
Select other coding system (Epson) <SOCS> ... 173  
Select other coding system (Proprinter) <SOCS>  
...................................................................... 174  
Set mode <SM>................................................. 181  
Single shift 2 <SS2>.......................................... 160  
Single shift 3 <SS3>.......................................... 160  
Sixel graphics.................................................... 168  
Soft terminal reset <DECSTR>......................... 187  
String terminator <ST> ..................................... 160  
Tab clear <TBC>............................................... 181  
Vertical pitch, set <DECVERP> ....................... 192  
Vertical position, absolute <VPA>.................... 180  
Vertical position, backward <VPB>.................. 184  
Vertical position, relative <VPR> ..................... 180  
Vertical spacing, select <SVS> ......................... 177  
Vertical tab stops, set <DECSVTS>.................. 191  
Vertical tab, set.................................................. 159  
Control codes......................................................... 155  
<BEL> Bell ....................................................... 155  
<BS> Backspace ............................................... 155  
<CAN> Cancel.................................................. 157  
<CR> Carriage return........................................ 156  
<DC1> Device Control 1 .................................. 156  
<DC3> Device Control 3 .................................. 157  
<ESC> Escape................................................... 157  
<FF> Form feed ................................................ 156  
<SI> Shift in ......................................................156  
<SO> Shift out...................................................156  
<SUB> Substitute..............................................157  
<VT> Vertical tab..............................................156  
line terminators.............................................................10  
O
operating system command (OSC).................................9  
P
PPL 3..........................................................................195  
7-bit Versus 8-bit environments.............................196  
C1 control characters..............................................201  
Coded characters ....................................................195  
Command Directory...............................................207  
Commands  
Announce subset of code extension facilities  
<ASCEF>......................................................209  
Autowrap Mode <DECAWM>..........................214  
C1 Transmit / Receive <SnC1R/DEC*C1>.......245  
Carriage Return / New Line Mode <DECCRNLM>  
.......................................................................215  
Clear All Horizontal Tabs <DECCAHT>..........214  
Clear All Vertical Tabs <DECCAVT>..............215  
Control representation mode <CRM>................210  
Cursor position report <CPR> ...........................209  
Cursor up <CUU>..............................................210  
Device Status Report .........................................230  
Device Status Request <DSR> ..........................229  
Draw Relative Vector <DECRVEC> ................218  
Draw Vector <DECVEC> .................................227  
Entering IBM Proprinter Emulation Mode  
<DECIPEM>.................................................216  
Graphic Size Modification <GSM>...................231  
Graphic Size Selection <GSS> ..........................232  
Graphics, carriage return <DECGCR> ..............258  
Graphics, next line <DECGNL>........................258  
Graphics, raster attributes, set <DECGRA> ......259  
Graphics, repeat introducer <DECGRI>............260  
Horizontal Position Absolute <HPA>................233  
Horizontal Position Backward <HPB>..............234  
Horizontal Position Relative <HPR>.................235  
Horizontal Tab Set <DECHTS> ........................215  
Line Feed / New Line Mode <LNM>................236  
Locking and Single Shifts..................................236  
New Sheet <DECNS> .......................................216  
Pitch Select Mode <DECPSM>.........................216  
Positioning Unit Mode <PUM>.........................237  
Printer attributes <DA> .....................................210  
Printer attributes report <DAR> ........................211  
Proportional Spacing Mode <DECPSP> ...........217  
Request Font Status <DECRFS>.......................217  
Reset to Initial State...........................................237  
Secondary printer attributes <DA2>..................212  
Select Character Set <SCS>...............................238  
Select Graphics Rendition <SGR> ....................240  
Select Size Unit <SSU>.....................................247  
312  
Index  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Horizontal Pitch <DECSHORP>................. 219  
Set Horizontal Spacing <SHS> ......................... 244  
Set Horizontal Tab Stops <DECSHTS>............ 220  
Set Left and Right Margins <DECSLRM> ....... 222  
Set Lines per Physical Page <DECSLPP> ........ 221  
Set Top and Bottom Margins <DECSTBM>..... 223  
Set Vertical Pitch <DECVERP> ....................... 228  
Set Vertical Spacing <SVS>.............................. 248  
Set Vertical Tab Stops <DECSVTS>................ 226  
Soft Terminal Reset <DECSTR> ...................... 225  
Spacing Pitch Increment <SPI>......................... 246  
Tab Clear <TBC>.............................................. 249  
Vertical Position Absolute <VPA> ................... 249  
Vertical Position Backward <VPB>.................. 250  
Vertical Position Relative <VPR>..................... 250  
Vertical Tab Set <DECVTS>............................ 229  
Control characters  
<CSI> Control sequence introducer .................. 201  
<DCS> Printer control string............................. 201  
<EPA> End of protected area............................ 201  
<ESA> End of selected area.............................. 201  
<HTS> Horizontal tab set.................................. 202  
<IND> Index ..................................................... 202  
<NEL> Next line............................................... 202  
<PLD> Partial line down................................... 202  
<PLU> Partial line up........................................ 202  
<RI> Reverse index........................................... 202  
<SS2> Single shift 2.......................................... 202  
<SS3> Single shift 3.......................................... 202  
<ST> String terminator...................................... 202  
<VTS> Vertical tab set...................................... 202  
Control codes......................................................... 199  
<BEL> Bell ....................................................... 199  
<BS> Backspace................................................ 199  
<CAN> Cancel.................................................. 199  
<CR> Carriage return........................................ 199  
<ESC> Escape................................................... 199  
<FF> Form feed................................................. 199  
<HT> Horizontal tab ......................................... 200  
<LF> Line feed.................................................. 200  
<SI> Shift in...................................................... 200  
<SO> Shift out .................................................. 200  
<SUB> Substitute.............................................. 200  
<VT> Vertical tab ............................................. 200  
Horizontal advance increments.............................. 254  
Page coordinate system.......................................... 251  
Character cell model.......................................... 252  
Origin and extent............................................... 252  
Point model ....................................................... 252  
Positioning and movement ................................ 253  
Printable characters................................................ 198  
Sixes graphics ........................................................ 256  
printer emulation ............................................................ 8  
Printronix 300/600 ....................................................... 66  
Printronix P300/600  
<ENQ> Normal density plot line.........................67  
<EOT> High density plot line..............................67  
<ETX> End of transmission ................................67  
<FF> Form Feed..................................................67  
<HT> Horizontal Tab ..........................................67  
<LF> Line Feed ...................................................67  
<RS> Record Separator .......................................67  
<SI> Shift In ........................................................68  
<SO> Shift Out....................................................68  
<SP> Space..........................................................68  
<UNDL> Underline.............................................68  
<US> Unit Separator ...........................................68  
<VT> Vertical Tab...............................................68  
Bell code <BEL> .................................................66  
Control Codes<DEL> Delete ...................................67  
Electronic Vertical Format Unit ...............................72  
Graphics ...................................................................69  
Dot Patterns .........................................................70  
Dot Patterns and Densities...................................69  
Printronix P300/600 Emulation Options Table...........274  
Printronix Pseries Emulation Options Table...............274  
Proprinter  
Command Directory...............................................111  
Commands  
<HT> Horizontal Tab ........................................110  
Automatic line feed............................................114  
Deselect printer..................................................117  
Double strike print, start ....................................115  
Double wide print, on/off...................................118  
Emphasized print, start.......................................115  
Emphasized print, stop.......................................115  
Form length in inches, set ..................................115  
Graphics, high-speed double density, set...........120  
Graphics, low speed double density, set.............120  
Graphics, quadruple density, set ........................121  
Graphics, set normal density..............................120  
Horizontal margins, set ......................................118  
Horizontal tab stops, set.....................................115  
Overscore...........................................................112  
Print continuously from all character chart ........112  
Print mode, select...............................................116  
Print single character from all character chart....112  
Proportional spacing, set....................................117  
Select character set 1..........................................114  
Select character set 2..........................................114  
Select code page.................................................113  
Set 12 cpi ...........................................................112  
Set 7/72 line spacing..........................................113  
Set 8 lpi..............................................................113  
Set form length in lines......................................115  
Set graphics line spacing....................................114  
Set top of form...................................................114  
Skip perforation, cancel .....................................116  
Skip perforation, set...........................................116  
Start text line spacing.........................................113  
Store 7/72 line spacing.......................................114  
Superscript / Subscript, reset..............................117  
Superscript / Subscript, Set................................117  
Tabs, power on settings, set all ..........................117  
Underscore.........................................................112  
Unidirectional printing, set ................................117  
Variable line feed...............................................116  
Control Codes .......................................................... 66  
<ACK> Line at 8lpi............................................. 66  
<BS> Elongated Character Line.......................... 66  
<CR> Carriage Return Slew Zero or Edit Mode . 66  
<DC1> Ready/Select........................................... 66  
<DC3> Busy/Select............................................. 67  
<DLE> High vertical density graphics................ 67  
313  
GEK-00029B  
5000 Series Programmer’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Codes  
High vertical density graphics............................102  
Normal density graphics ....................................103  
Overscoring..........................................................90  
Print Control Codes .............................................92  
Select International Character Set........................84  
Set Form Length in Lines ....................................93  
Set Forms Length in Inches .................................93  
Set line spacing 1/6 inch ......................................94  
Set line spacing 1/8 inch ......................................95  
Set line spacing 7/72 inch ....................................96  
Set line spacing n/216 inch ..................................97  
Set line spacing n/72 inch ....................................96  
Set single line spacing..........................................95  
Single Line Double High .....................................85  
Single Line Double Wide Print............................86  
Single line, high horizontal density....................103  
Superscript / Subscript.........................................90  
Superscript / Subscript Reset ...............................90  
Underline .............................................................91  
Control Codes  
<BEL> Bell ....................................................... 108  
<BS> Backspace ............................................... 108  
<CAN>Cancel................................................... 108  
<CR> Carriage return........................................ 109  
<DC1> Device Control 1 .................................. 109  
<DC2> Device Control 2 .................................. 109  
<DC3> Device Control 3 .................................. 109  
<DC4> Device Control 4 .................................. 109  
<ESC> Escape................................................... 109  
<FF> Form Feed................................................ 109  
<LF> Line Feed................................................. 110  
<NUL> Null...................................................... 110  
<SI> Shift In...................................................... 110  
<SO> Shift Out ................................................. 110  
<VT> Vertical Tab............................................ 110  
Dot graphics........................................................... 119  
Double strike print, stop......................................... 116  
Proprinter III XL Emulation Options Table ............... 272  
P-Series  
Character Sets........................................................ 106  
Command Index....................................................... 78  
Command Line ........................................................ 76  
Commands  
<BEL> Bell..........................................................80  
<BS> Backspace..................................................80  
<CR> Carriage Return.........................................80  
<FF> Form Feed..................................................81  
<LF> Line Feed...................................................81  
Extended Character Sets.........................................106  
Font Styles..............................................................106  
Pitches....................................................................106  
Plot Mode Graphics..........................................98, 107  
Special Function Control Character <SFCC> ..........76  
Bold Print OFF.................................................... 85  
Bold Print ON...................................................... 84  
Character Set Select............................................. 82  
Double Wide Print............................................... 86  
Emphasized Print OFF ........................................ 86  
Emphasized Print ON.......................................... 85  
Emulation Reset .................................................. 92  
Execute Control Codes........................................ 92  
Extended Character Set Access ........................... 87  
Extended Character Set Cancel ........................... 88  
Font Selection...................................................... 89  
High density graphics........................................ 103  
High horizontal density graphics....................... 102  
S
SCS..............................................10. See Smart Graphics  
Smart Graphics .............................................................10  
314  
Index  
GEK-00029B  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Echo Blower Type 1E PB 2100 User Manual
Electro Voice Musical Instrument Amplifier EVF 2151D User Manual
Euro Pro Carpet Cleaner EP908H User Manual
Extron electronic Universal Remote IR 452 User Manual
Festool Sander RAS 11504 E User Manual
Foundations Baby Furniture 103 BQS User Manual
Gas Fired Products Gas Heater 100 User Manual
GE Convection Oven PT970SMSS User Manual
Generac Power Systems Fan OG 2697 User Manual
Giant Water Pump P200A 3100 5100 User Manual